P20050001 Databook

PRODUCT DATABOOK
Project No. MRS-MEA-15005

Project Name 20FT Workshop Container
Customer Modex Energy Rentals Singapore Pte Ltd.
Container No. P20050001
Manufacture No. MOOU500022 6
Owner No. P20050001
OWNER PREPARED CHECKED APPROVED
Modex Alice Cao Henry He Jinghui Cui

Table of Content
1. Container Certificates 2.7-1 & 2.7-2 & CSC
2. Type Approval Certificates
3. Load Test Report & Weight Report
4. Vendor Data Intrinsic Safe Equipment

5. Lifting Sling Certificate
6. Operation Manual & Hook Up
7. AC Operation Manual
8. Material Test Certificates

9. Welding Procedure Specification
10. Welder / Welding Operator Qualification Records
11. Dimensional Report
12. Welding & NDT Report

13. NDT Procedure / NDT Operator Certificates
14. Painting Record
15. Manufacturing Workflow Card

16. Manufacturing Test Reports
17. As built Drawings & Specification
18. MSDS Compliance Documents
CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT
The information contained in this document and its attachments is confidential. Unless otherwise specified,
no part of this publication may be reproduced or utilized in any form or by any means, electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying and microfilm, without permission in writing from the owner
Copyright © 2015
2016 Modex. All rights reserved
1. CONTAINER CERTIFICATES
2.7-1 & 2.7-2 & CSC
3
DNV.GL
Typ-Zertifikat fii r Container Zert. Nr. /Cert. No.:
Type Certificate for Container FC 9830 | OO2
Ein Container des unten beschriebenen Typs wurde geprrift unter Beachtung:
One Container of the type described below was tested nnsidering:
E International Convention for Safe Containers, 1972 (CSC) CSC No.: D-HH-8757 / GL 9830
E UfC 592-2 regulation of International Union of Railways (UlC)
Herstellerkennzeichnung der Container gemdR:

Manufacturers ma*ing of the container anording:
Customs Conventidh on the International Transport of Goods

under cover of TIR carnets (TlR Convention, 1 975):
Der Container entspricht

T he Conta in et co rresaond s
n in vollem Umfang
fully
El teitweise
patially
n siehe 14
see 14
den anwendbaren |SO-Empfehlungen und den Richtlinien des GL fiir den Bau und die Prtifung von Containern.
to the applicable lSO-Reconmendations and the Requiements of GL for the Construction and Testing of Containers.
ISO-(D lN) Normbezeichnung: - 16058

| x 2438 x 2896 mm I Strickzahl:
_.__''J
Designation No. of unils
Typbezeichnung des Herstellers: Wsrori.ol - ]

Type designation of the manufad.urer
Ort und Datum der Typ-Prtifung: lQidong,12.2015 I

I
Place and date of type test
Zul.Gesamtgewicht R: 10.000 kg 22.046 lb Leergewicht T: 1.500 kg 3.307 rb

Permlssib/e gross mass ,are rnass
Netto-Rauminhalt . flr3 - cu.ft U-Wert der lsolierung WrK

Net cubic capacity Ulactor of the insulation
Dieses Zertifikat gilt fdr die mit nachfolgenden ldentifizierungsnummern versehenen Container, die dem geprtiften Typ entsprechen.
Prttflasten und Umfang der Typprilfung sind umseitig aufgeftihrt.
This Certificate is valid for the Containers with following identification numbers, which have been manufactured in conformity with the reference type been fesle4
loads and extent of type test are stated on page no. 2 of thb ceftificate.
CSC-ldent-Nr. / Bau-Nr.: P 20050001 .20050002

CSC ident no. / Manufadurers no
Eigner-Nr.: MOOU 500022.500023 (P20050001-20050002)

Owners seial no.
Herstellungsdatum Date manufactured 0112016
Antragsteller: Taicang Modex Energy Engineering Limited Hersteller: Qidong Singamas Offshore Equipment Go., Ltd.
Appticant Jiangsu / p.R. China Manufacturer Jiangsu / P.R. China
Eigner: Modex Energy Rentals Singapore Pte. Ltd.

Owner: Singapore / Singapore
Hamburg, 2016-04-05
Place and Date
'''-.- .,
DNV GL SE, Brooktorkai LA, D - 20457 Hamburg - www.dnvgl.com F048KE / 2015-05

Zertifikat Nr, / Jbersichtszeichnung 3oezifikation Nr.
General anangement Specification No.
Certificate No.: FG 9830/002
ws.20.P1.01 -.sT.DW.1 001 ws.20.P1.01
3auweise, Werkstoff (Ku rzbeschreibung) Construction, mateials (brief description)
Ganzstahl, all steel
fiood immunization heatment (acc. to maker's statement): NO EXPOSED TIMBER
_fd Umfang der Typ-Pri.ifung entsprechend tSO 1496-1 Iest Besondere Bemerkungen
\r. Extent of the Type Test according to ISO 1 496-1 Additional remarks
1 Stapeln Belastung je Eckpfosten Zul.Stapellast bei 1,Bg (CSC)

stacking load per comer post lllowable stacking load for 1,89 (CSC)
f= 848 kN
X 192.000 kg 423.320 lbs
2. Heben an den oberen Eckbeschlagen senkrecht

lifting fron the four top coner fittings (2R) veftical X
3. Heben an den unteren Eckbeschldgen .- ^" zut Horizontalen
lifting from the four bottom comer ftftings (2R) a = 4c
to the horizontat X
4. -dngsbeanspruchung des Bodenrahmens 2R / 1R pro Seite
re straint (long itu d ina l) 2R / 1R pet side X
Stirnwand-Belastung NIL
strengh of end walls Pg
h Seitenwand-Belastung NIL
Pg
strength of side walls
t. )ach-Belastung
strenglh of the roof
300 kg
X
8. 3oden-Belastung (Radlasten) N'A
floor strength kg
9. /erwindung (Belastung in Quenichtung)

rigidity (transverse)
| = 150,0 kN
X
10. /erwindung (Belastung in Ldngsrichtung)
rigid ity (longitu din al)
f= 75,0 kN
X
11 Gabelstaplertaschen-Test Beladen auf
fork lift oockets test loaded to 1,6 R X
0,625 R
12. Sreifkanten-Test Beladen auf

Lifting at base grappler arn position loaded to
1,25 R
13. rrrifung der Spritzwasserdichtigkeit

weatherproofness test
14. Sonstige Prufungen / Bemerkungen: other tests / remarks:
DNV GL SE, Brooktorkai 78, D :20457 Hamburg - www.dnvgl.com F048KE / 2015-05

2. TYPE APPROVAL CERTIFICATES
4
3. LOAD TEST REPORT & WEIGHT REPORT
5
4. VENDOR DATA INTRINSIC SAFE EQUIPMENT
6
PROJECT NO. P2005
Ex Equipment List Type 20FT Pressurized Workshop Cabin
REV DESCRIPTION DATE EXEC. CHECK APP. UNIT NO.
1 Initial design 15/12/2015 Shuai.Xue Shiliang Steve DOC NO. P2005-EL-LS-0102
REV 1
ISSUE DATE 15/12/2015
AREA
ITEM DESCRIPTION TAG NO. MAKER MODEL NO. TECHNICAL SPEC. LOCATION IP RATING EX TYPE QTY ATEX&IECEx. NO REMARK
RATING
PTB 99 ATEX 1161

1 Ex. Safety switch 1 92-ECS-001 CEAG GHG 263 2301 R0002 Rated 690V, 40A, 50/60Hz Outside IP66 Zone1 Exed IIC T6 1
IECEx BKI 07.0012
-55℃ to +52℃
PTB 00 ATEX 1074
2 Ex. Safety switch 2 92-ECS-002 CEAG GHG 261 0005R0010 Rated 690V, 10A, 50/60Hz Outside IP66 Zone1 Ex ed IIC T6 1
IECEx BKI 07.0014
Nemko 10 ATEX 1054

3 PA loudspeaker 92-RA-001/002 DNH CAREEX-6T 100V, Aluminum Inside IP67 Zone1 Ex de IIB+H2 T6 2 -20℃ to +40℃
IECEx NEM 11.0016
WCP2A-R470SF- Sira 06 ATEX 2131X

4 MCP 92-BM-001 KAC 30Vdc Max. . Inside IP66 Zone0 Ex ia IIC T4 1 -25℃ to +70℃
K013 IECEx SIR 08.0105X
8.5 to 33Vdc, Alarm current 40mA@ Baseefa 06 ATEX0007X

5 Smokedetector+base 92-BS-001/002 Apollo ORB-OP-52028-APO Inside IP44 Zone0 Ex ia IIC T5 2 -40℃ to +40℃
24V dc IECEx BAS 06.0002X
IBEx U99ATEX 1096

6 PA JB 92-TJ-001 Bartec 07-56D2-0411 SS316L, 200x200x120 Outside IP66 Zone1 Ex e IIC T5 1 -20℃ to +55℃
IECEx IBE 09.0017
Data JB with Ex IBExU99 ATEX 1096

7 92-TJ-002 Bartec 07-3116-2012 SS316L, 200x200x120 Outside IP66 Zone 1 Ex e II T6 1
relaybuilt in IECEx IBE 09.0017
IBEx U99ATEX 1096

8 Signal JB 92-CJ-001 Bartec 07-56D2-0411 SS316L, 200x200x120 Outside IP66 Zone1 Ex e IIC T5 1
IECEx IBE 09.0017
-20℃ to +55℃
Power JB with Ex IBEx U99ATEX 1096
9 92-EJ-001 Bartec 07-3116-3012 SS316L, 300x200x120 Outside IP66 Zone 1 Ex e II T6 1
IBEx U99ATEX 1096

10 EX JB 92-EJ-003 Bartec 07-56B2-0111 SS316L, 150x150x80 Inside IP66 Zone 1 Ex e II T6 1
IECEx IBE 09.0017
48X1.2W LED'S 60W，AC110- SIRA 09 ATEX 5159X

11 Ex Flood Light 92-EFL-001 HADAR HDL106N1HMHW004 Outside IP66 Zone1 Ex e mb IIC T4 1 -20ºC to +50ºC
240V，50/60hz IECEx SIR 09.0064X
PTB 98 ATEX 3121

12 Ex Light Switch 92-ELS-002 CEAG GHG273 2000 R0003 Zone1 ATEX&IECEX,2xM20 Inside IP66 Zone1 Ex ed IIC T6 1 –20 °C to +40 °C
IECEx BKI 07.0036
230V,50/60Hz 2x8W with INERIS 13 ATEX 0027X

13 Emergency light 92-EXL-001/002 Bartec EVFG208E Inside IP66 Zone1 Ex d IIC T5 2 -20℃ to +60℃
batterybackup IECEx INE 13.0056X
PTB 00 ATEX 1068

14 ESD button 92-ECS-004A/B Bartec 07-3511-10N84 Zone1 ATEX&IECEX Inside IP66 Zone1 Ex ed IIC T6 2 -55℃ to +60℃
IECEx PTB 08.0022
NEMKO 04ATEX 1338
15 Duct heater(Optional) 92-FE-001 Backer OKB-2020 4kw, 400V, Duct heater Inside IP66 Zone 1 Ex ed II T3 1 -60℃ to +80℃
IECx NEM 13.0020X
Operation on 380-690V power
SIRA 10ATEX 1239X
16 CPFG Panel 92-IB-001 PDC EJB 241M supply, combined pressure, F&G Inside IP65 Zone 1 Ex d [ia] IIB T5 1 -20℃ to +55℃
IECEx SIR 12.0071X
control, IP65
PTB 02 ATEX 1159
17 Audible&Visual alarm 92-IX1-001 Bartec 07-3103-2209 24Vdc, triple lights for alarm Inside IP65 Zone 1 Ex d IIC T6 1 -55℃ to +80℃
IECEx PTB 10.0043
CH4 gas detector（in CROWCO 10-30Vdc, output 4- Baseefa 04 ATEX0024X

18 92-AB-001 Xgard type 5 Inside IP65 Zone 1 EEx d IIC T6 1 -40℃ to +50℃
air inlet） N 20mA,consumption 50mA@24V IECEx BAS 05.0043X

main room ,Optional) N 20mA,consumption 50mA@24V IECEx BAS 05.0043X
Page 1 of 2
PROJECT NO. P2005
REV 1
AREA
RATING
CH4 gas detector（in Zone1 ATEX&IECEx, 7- DMT 02ATEX E 202X

20 92-AB-003 MSA Ultima XE Inside IP66 Zone 1 EEx d IIC T4 1 -40℃ to +60℃
airlock） 30VDC,3wires, 4-20mA IECEx FWG 07.0006X
Baseefa 04 ATEX
H2S gas detector CROWCO
21 92-AS-001 Xgard type 1 10-30Vdc, output 4-20mA Inside IP65 Zone 0 Ex ia IIC T4 1 0115/6X -20℃ to +50℃
(Optional) N IECEx BAS 05.0042X
SCHISCHE PTB 04 ATEX 1028X

22 Fire DamperActutor ExMAX-15-SF 24 - 230Vac/dc Inside IP66 Zone 1 EEx d IIC T5/T6 2 -40℃ to +40℃
K IECEx PTB 07.0057X
Fire Damper Limit IBEXU 01ATEX1007X

23 92-GE-001/002 Bartec 07-2511 24Vdc Inside IP66 Zone 1 Ex d IIC T6 2 -55°C to +75 °C
Switch IECEx PTB 07.0045X
Fire Damper Junction PTB 08ATEX 1064

24 Bartec 07-5103-1221/2090 Max 1100V, 500A Inside IP66 Zone 1 Ex e II T6 2 -55℃ to +40℃
Box IECEx PTB 09.0009X
Pressurization fan
25 92-GK-003 Systemair EX 180-4 400V, 3-Phase, Centrifugal fan Outside IP56 Zone 1 EEx e II T3 1 SP03ATEX3101X -20℃ to +40℃
motor
-20 °C to +60 °C OriginalIP rating is

CESI 01 ATEX 103
26 Condenser fan motor 92-GK-001/002 CEMP AC80 220v/380v,50Hz,0.6KW Outside IP56 Zone 1 Ex de IIC T4 2 IP 55, Modex installprotection cover
IECEx CES 10.0014
to increase the IPrating to IP56
DMT 02ATEX E183

27 Exd Telephone 92-RG-001 Bartec FHF 24 VDC to 66 VDC Inside IP66 Zone1 EEx emb[ib] IIC T5 1 -25℃ to +60℃
IECEx BVS 11.0033
Reserved for disconnection of UPS INERIS 03 ATEX 0210

28 Isolator Panel 92-IB-002 Bartec CCF2 Inside IP66 Zone1 Ex d IIB T6 1 -20℃ to +40℃
battery IECEx INE 13.0065X
29 CPFG Battery 92-EB-002 STAHL 8316/22-24-100 24V,10AH, With Exe enclosure Inside IP65 Zone 1 Ex d IIC T6 1 KEMA 04ATEX 2237X -20℃ to +40℃
Brass, Nickel plated, for armoured Inside/Out TUV 14ATEX 7534X

30 Cable Gland CCG E1EXU IP66 Zone 1 Ex de IIC T3 -20℃ to +95℃
power& instrumentation cable side IECEx ITA 14.0008X
Brass, Nickel plated, for Inside/Out TUV 13ATEX 7397X

31 Cable Gland CCG A2F IP66 Zone 1 Ex de IIC T3 -20℃ to +95℃
communication cable. side IECEx ITA 12.0014X
Brass, Nickel plated, compund barrier Inside/Out Sira 06 ATEX 1097X

32 Cable Gland CMP PX2KX-REX IP66 Zone 1 Ex d IIC T3 -20℃ to +95℃
gland for Exd enclosure side IECEx SIR 06.0044X
Page 2 of 2
1. EX SAFETY SWITCH 1
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMISSION
IEC Certification Scheme for Explosive Atmospheres
for rules and details of the IECEx Scheme visit www.iecex.com
Certificate No.: IECEx BKI 07.0012 Issue No: 2 Certificate history:

Issue No. 2 (2013-11-12)
Status: Current Page 1 of 4 Issue No. 1 (2011-09-19)
Issue No. 0 (2007-03-06)
Date of Issue: 2013-11-12
Applicant: Cooper Crouse-Hinds GmbH

previously CEAG Sicherheitstechnik GmbH
Neuer Weg Nord 49
D-69412 Eberbach, Germany
Germany
Electrical Apparatus: Load interrupter, master, motor protection and safety switch
Optional accessory: Type GHG 262….R…. and GHG 263….R….
Type of Protection: General requirements, Flameproof enclosure, Increased safety, Intrinsic safety,
Marking: Ex ed ia IIC T6
-55 °C ≤ Tamb ≤ +55 °C
Ex tD A21 IP66 T 55°C (GHG 262….R….)
Ex tD A21 IP66 T 53°C (GHG 263….R….)
-20 °C ≤ Tamb ≤ +40 °C
Approved for issue on behalf of the IECEx János FEJES

Certification Body:
Position: Director
Signature:
(for printed version)
Date:
1. This certificate and schedule may only be reproduced in full.

2. This certificate is not transferable and remains the property of the issuing body.
3. The Status and authenticity of this certificate may be verified by visiting the Official IECEx Website.
Certificate issued by:

Testing Station for Explosion Proof Equipment
H 1037 BUDAPEST
MIKOVINY S.u. 2-4
Hungary
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Certificate No: IECEx BKI 07.0012 Issue No: 2
Date of Issue: 2013-11-12 Page 2 of 4
Manufacturer: Cooper Crouse-Hinds GmbH

Neuer Weg Nord 49
Germany
Additional Manufacturing
location(s):
S.C. COOPER INDUSTRIES ROMANIA S.R.L
ARAD, Zona Industrial NV, str III, no 12
Romania
This certificate is issued as verification that a sample(s), representative of production, was assessed and tested and found to comply with the
IEC Standard list below and that the manufacturer's quality system, relating to the Ex products covered by this certificate, was assessed and
found to comply with the IECEx Quality system requirements. This certificate is granted subject to the conditions as set out in IECEx
Scheme Rules, IECEx 02 and Operational Documents as amended.
STANDARDS:
The electrical apparatus and any acceptable variations to it specified in the schedule of this certificate and the identified documents, was
found to comply with the following standards:
IEC 60079-0 : 2004 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres - Part 0: General requirements
Edition:4.0
IEC 60079-1 : 2001 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres - Part 1: Flameproof enclosures 'd'
Edition:4
IEC 60079-11 : 1999 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres - Part 11: Intrinsic safety 'i'
Edition:4
IEC 60079-7 : 2001 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres - Part 7: Increased safety 'e'
Edition:3
IEC 61241-0 : 2004 Electrical apparatus for use in the presence of combustible dust - Part 0: General requirements
Edition:1
IEC 61241-1 : 2004 Electrical apparatus for use in the presence of combustible dust - Part 1: Protection by enclosures "tD"
Edition:1
This Certificate does not indicate compliance with electrical safety and performance requirements other than those expressly included in the
Standards listed above.
TEST & ASSESSMENT REPORTS:

A sample(s) of the equipment listed has successfully met the examination and test requirements as recorded in
Test Report:
HU/BKI/ExTR07.0011/00
Quality Assessment Report:
DE/BVS/QAR11.0006/02 DE/BVS/QAR11.0009/00 HU/BKI/QAR06.0005/00

IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Schedule
EQUIPMENT:
Equipment and systems covered by this certificate are as follows:
See details in Addendum to IECEx BKI 07.0012 Certificate of Conformity
CONDITIONS OF CERTIFICATION: NO
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
DETAILS OF CERTIFICATE CHANGES (for issues 1 and above):
New manufacturing location:

S.C. COOPER INDUSTRIES ROMANIA S.R.L
ARAD, Zona Industrial NV, str III, no 12
ROMANIA
The IECEx QAR of the new manufacturing location:

DE/BVS/QAR11.0006/02
Annex:
Addendum to IECEx BKI 07.0012.pdf

ADDENDUM TO IECEx CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY
IECEx BKI 07.0012
Page 1 of 2
1. Description
The load interrupter, master, motor protection and safety switch of type GHG 262 …. R…. and GHG 263 …. R…. comprises a
housing designed to type of protection Increased Safety „e” with integrated flush-mounting switches of type of protection
Flameproof „d” (covered by a separate certificate) and with terminals of type of protection Increased Safety „e” (also covered by
a separate certificate).
If required, wafers or auxiliary switches bearing the required marking may also be used for actuating circuits designed to type of
protection Intrinsic Safety „i”.
Connection proceeds from outside by means of cable bushings (covered by a separate certificate).
The load interrupter, master, motor protection and safety switch, type GHG 262 …. R…. and GHG 263 …. R…. may now also
be used in areas where potentially explosive atmospheres with dust/air mixtures may occasionally occur.
2. Type assortment
GHG 26. ….R….

Legend of the signs from left to right
1._, 2._, 3._ Code for manufacturer
4._, 5._ Type of apparatus (switch)
6._, 7._, 8._ Design and version

213. = main current switch 20 A 3-pole size 1 encl.
223. = safety switch 20 A 3-pole size 1 encl.
300. = safety switch 40 A 6-pole tall encl.
3005 = safety switch 40 A for variable frequency drives
10._ Type of protection

1 = intrinsically safe circuit in switch
9._, 11._, 12._, 13._, 14._, 15._ Code for design variants with no influence on the explosion protection or special
design
3. General parameters
Technical data
Using flush-mounting switch GHG 263 ….R….

Rated voltage Ue: up to 400 V 690 V 690 V
Rated current Ie: max. 40 A 40 A 32 A
Related to utilization category: AC3 AC1 AC3
2 2
Design cross section: max. 2×16 mm single core, 2×10 mm fine stranded wire
Using flush-mounting switch GHG 2.. ….R….

Rated voltage Ue: up to 690 V 400 V 500 V 690 V
Rated current Ie: max. 20 A 20 A 16 A 10 A
Related to utilization category: AC1 AC3 AC3 AC1
2 2
Design cross section: max. 2×2,5 mm single core, 2×4 mm fine stranded wire
Provided the making and breaking capacity complies with the relevant conditions, rated values other than those specified above
are accepted and will be defined by the supplier on the basis of the operating mode, utilization category, etc.
4. Ambient temperature
Ambient temperature range for gas -55 °C to +55 °C

Ambient temperature range for dust -20 °C to +40 °C
5. Ingress protection IP66 IEC 60529

IECEx BKI 07.0012
Page 2 of 2
Conditions of Certification: No
Notes for manufacture and operation
If the clearance requirements for the connectors as specified in IEC 60079-11:1998 cannot be safeguarded with the installation,
wiring that meets the quality criteria Increased Safety „e” shall be used, or the wiring shall be of the fail-safe type.
When using more than one intrinsically safe circuit, the regulations for interconnection shall duly be observed.
Drawing
Description No. 4187 (8 sheets) 1999.03.16
Annex to description No. 4187 (2 sheets) 1999.03.16
Operating instructions GHG 260 7007 P0001 D/E/F (E) (6 sheets) 2004.09.
Drawing No. Z. Nr. GHG 26-1-3933 1999.03.16
26-1-3935 1999.03.16
26-2-3934 1999.03.16
26-2-3942 1999.03.16
26-2-4313 1999.03.16
26-2-4314 1999.03.16
26-2-4315 1999.03.16
24-3-3193 1999.03.16
Test protocol PTB Ex 00-20355 (4 sheets) 2000.11.16
1. Supplement to Description No. 4187 (1 sheet) 2001.04.10
Test protocol No. BVS PP01.2026 EG 2001.03.20
IEC Ex Certificate of Conformity IEC Ex BKI 07.0004 U
IEC Ex Certificate of Conformity IEC Ex BKI 07.0006 U
Annex: No
2. EX SAFETY SWITCH 2
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity

Issue No. 2 (2013-11-12)
Issue No. 0 (2007-03-06)
Applicant: Cooper Crouse-Hinds GmbH

Neuer Weg Nord 49
Germany
Electrical Apparatus: Control, load, master, motor and safety switch

Optional accessory: Type GHG 261. ….R….
Type of Protection: General requirements, Flameproof enclosure, Increased safety, Intrinsic safety,
Marking: Ex ed IIC T6
-55 °C ? Tamb ? +52 °C
Ex tD A21 IP66 T53°C

Certification Body:
Position: Director
Signature:
Date:


H 1037 BUDAPEST
MIKOVINY S.u. 2-4
Hungary
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity

Neuer Weg Nord 49
Germany
location(s):
STANDARDS:
Edition:4.0
IEC 60079-1 : 2001 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres - Part 1: Flameproof enclosures 'd'
Edition:4
Edition:3
Edition:1
Edition:1

Test Report:
DE/BVS/QAR11.0009/00 HU/BKI/QAR06.0005/00
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Schedule
EQUIPMENT:
See details in Addendum to IECEx BKI 07.0014 Certificate of Conformity
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
new QAR
Annex:

IECEx BKI 07.0014
Page 1 of 2
1. Description
The control, load, master, motor and safety switch of type GHG 261 ….R… consists of a plastic enclosure of the
type of protection increased Safety “e” provided with a built-in switch of the type of protection Flameproof
Enclosure “d” and a terminal of the type of protection increased Safety “e”.
Connection is from the outside via Ex cable entries.
All built-in and coupled components were separately tested and certified and are covered by separate test
certificates.
The control, load, master, motor and safety switch of type GHG 261 …. R …. may now also be used in areas in
which explosive atmosphere caused by air/dust mixtures are likely to occur.
2. Type assortment
GHG 261 …. R ….
1._ 2._, 3._ Code for manufacturer
4._ Apparatus: switch
5._, 6._ Switch size

61 = 10 A switch
7._ Type of switch

1 = main switch
2 = safety switch
8._ Switch mechanism

3 = 3 pole
9._, 10._ Type of apparatus

05 = 10 A safety switch
11._, 12._, 13._, 14._, 15._ No influence on Ex protection can be changed as required
Electrical data
with built-in switch component GHG 23. ….R….
Rated insulation voltage

- positive make-contact version ........ 400 V
- positive-break-contact version ........ 400 V
Making and breaking capacity

utilization category AC 3
rated voltage Ue ................................ up to 400 V
rated current Ie .................................. max. 10 A
Utilization category AC 11
rated voltage Ue ................................ up to 230 V 400 V
rated current Ie .................................. max. 10 A 6A
Utilization category DC 1
rated voltage Ue ................................ up to 60 V 110 V 230 V
rated current Ie
single-break ...................................... max. 10 A 1A 0.5 A
rated current Ie
double break ..................................... max. 10 A 1.85 A 0.8 A
Utilization category DC 11
rated voltage Ue ................................ up to 24 V 60 V 110 V 230 V
rated current Ie
IECEx BKI 07.0014
Page 2 of 2
single-break ...................................... max. 6A 0.8 A 0.5 A 0.3 A

rated current Ie
double break ..................................... max. 6A 0.8 A 0.5 A 0.4 A
Rated cross-section .......................... max. 1,5 mm2 (fine stranded wire ) or 2,5 mm2 (single core)
In accordance with the relevant provisions, rated values other than those stated above will be permissible if the
making and breaking capacity is complied with; they must be specified by the manufacturer, in dependence on
the mode of operation, utilization category, etc.
Ambient temperature … up to -55 °C ≤ Tamb ≤ 52 °C
5. Ingress protection: IP66 to IEC 60529
Conditions of certification: No
Drawings
Description No. 4208 (6 sheets) 2000.02.09
Annex to description No. 4208 (1 sheet) 2000.02.09
Operating instructions No. GHG 260 7211 P0001 D/EF/D (13 sheets) 2000.02.09
Drawing Z. No. GHG 241-3-3913
24-3-3268 2000.02.09
26-1-3935 2000.02.09
26-2-3934 2000.02.09
26-3-4320 2000.02.09
26-4-4291 2000.02.09
26-4-4319 2000.02.09
261-3-3912 2000.02.09
262-2-4292 2000.02.09
24-3-3268 2000.02.09
Test and Assessment Report BVS 00.2073 EG (7 sheets) 2000.1107
Test protocol N002-MI4-B1-150500 2000.05.15
Test protocol No. XE-92/93 1992.07.07
Test protocol No. C1-MI4-F1-290300 2000.03.29
1. Supplement to Description (1 sheet) 2000.11.20
IECEx Certificate of Conformity IEC Ex BKI 07.0013 U
3. PA LOUDSPEAKER
Page1 of 2
PROD 004
[1] EC-TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE

[2] Equipment or Protected System Intended for use
in Potentially explosive atmospheres
Directive 94/9/EC
[3] EC-Type Examination Certificate Number: Nemko10ATEX1054 Issue 1
[4] Equipment or Protective System: Loudspeaker

[5] Applicant/ Manufacturer: DNH AS
[6] Address: Grueveien 2-6
3770 Kragerø
Norway
[7] This equipment or protective system and any acceptable variation thereto is specified in the schedule to this
certificate and the documents therein referred to.
[8] Nemko AS, notified body number 0470 in accordance with Article 9 of Council Directive 94/9/EC of 23 March
1994, certifies that this equipment or protective system has been found to comply with the Essential Health and
Safety requirements relating to the design and construction of equipment and protective systems intended for
use in potentially explosive atmospheres given in Annex II to the Directive.
The examination and test results are recorded in confidential report no. 174802
[9] Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements has been assured by compliance with:
EN 60079-0: 2009, EN 60079-1: 2007 and EN 60079-7: 2007.
[10] If the sign “X” is placed after the certificate number, it indicates that the equipment or protective system is
subject to special conditions for safe use specified in the schedule to this certificate.
[11] This EC-TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE relates only to the design, examination and tests of the
specified equipment or protective system in accordance to the directive 94/9/EC.
Further requirements of the Directive apply to the manufacturing process and supply of this equipment or
protective system. These are not covered by this certificate.
[12] The marking of the equipment or protective system shall include the following:
II 2G Ex d e IIB+H2 T6 Gb -20°C ≤ Ta +40°C
Oslo, 2011-09-08
p.p. Rolf Hoel

Certification Manager, Ex-products
This certificate may only be reproduced in its entirety and without any change, schedule included.
Postal address: Office address: Telephone: Enterprise number:
P.O.Box 73Blindern Gaustadalléen 30 +47 22 96 03 30 NO 974404532
N-0314 OSLO, NORWAY 0373 OSLO Fax:
+47 22 96 05 50
Nemko10ATEX1054 Issue 1 Date: 2011-09-08 Page2 of 2
[13] Schedule
[14] EC-TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE No Nemko10ATEX1050 Issue 1
[15] Description of Equipment or Protective System

This Certificate covers a loudspeaker. T in the designation indicates design with transformer.
Type Designations / Technical data

Type: CAREEX/CAPEEX 6(T)
Variants: 1 – Can be equipped with a monitoring card in the Ex d enclosure.
2 – Can be equipped with branching of cable with connection coupling.
Voltage: 100V.
Power: 6W (T48P or T38P x 2 transformer)
15W (T48P transformer)
Freq. range: 150 – 20000Hz
Ambient temperature:
-20°C ≤ Ta +40°C
[16] Report No. 174802

Descriptive Documents
Name/Number Rev. Date Title/Description Sheets
2175-A 01 2010-07 Careex-/ Capeex-6EExeN/T 5 Inch Loudspeaker 1
2175-B 01 2010-07 Careex-/ Capeex-6EExeN/T A:2,5 Inch Loudspeaker- 1
adapter
2175A-B 2011-05 CAP-/ CAR-/ EEX-6EExeN/T 2
or
CAP-/ CAR-/ EEX-6EExeN/T – 2 x 2,5inch
DNH0115 H 2002-10-07 Careex cabinet 1
DNH 5118 A 1992-10-20 Lid 1
730-A4-D D 2010-09-27 LB1 EEX-GJENNOMFØRING (d-rom) PG13,5 1
M20x1,5
Certificate History and Associated Nemko Reports

Issue Date Report Description
0 2010-10-22 136855 Prime Certificate released
1 2011-06-30 174802 The descriptive documents are updated to include IECEx components and standards
[17] Special Conditions for Safe Use

None
[18] Essential Health and Safety Requirements
See item 9
This certificate may only be reproduced in its entirety and without any change, schedule included.
Postal address: Office address: Telephone: Enterprise number:
P.O.Box 73Blindern Gaustadalléen 30 +47 22 96 03 30 NO 974404532
N-0314 OSLO, NORWAY 0373 OSLO Fax:
+47 22 96 05 50
4. MCP
slra
I
CERTIFICATION
1 CERTIFICATE
ECTYPE-EXAMINATION
2 Equipment Explosive
intendedfor usein Potentially 94l9lEC
Directive
Atmospheres
3 CertificateNumber: Sira06ATEX2131X
4 Equipment: ManualBreakGlassFireAlarmCallPointsModelsWCPxx
Waterproof
5 Applicant: Ltd
KACAlarmCompany
6 Address: 15-19TrescottRoad
Redditch
Worcester
B9B7AH
UK
Thisequipmentand any acceptablevariationtheretois specifiedin the scheduleto this certificateand
thereinreferredto.
the documents
Service,notifiedbodynumber0518in accordance
SiraCertification with Article9 of Directive94l9lEC
of 23 March1994,certifiesthat this equipmenthas been found to comply with the EssentialHealthand
Safety Requirements relating to the design and construction of equipment intended for use in
potentially atmospheres
explosive givenin AnnexII to the Directive'
Theexamination andtest resultsare recordedin confidentialrepoftnumberR52A15079A.
Compliancewith the Essential with the exceptionof thoselistedin the
Healthand SafetyRequirements,
to this cedificate,hasbeenassuredby compliance the followingdocuments:
schedule with
EN50014:1997+Amds1&2
EN50020:2002
EN50284:1999
r0 If the sign'X' is placedafterthe ceftificatenumber,it indicatesthat the equipmentis subjectto special
conditions for safeusespecifiedin the schedule to this certificate'
11 This EC type-examinationceftificaterelatesonly to the designand constructionof the specified
fuftherrequirements
equipment.If applicable, of thisDirective andsupplyof
applyto the manufacture
thisequipment.
12 Themarkingof the equipment thefollowing:
shallinclude
/^::1
\Uy'u rc
EExia IIC T4 (-30'C< Tu< +70"C)
ProjectNumber 52AL5079 cEllabyo@

Date 9 June2006 Certification
Officer
C. Index 13 \J
Thisceftificate
reproduced
andits schedulesmayonlybe
in its entiretyandwithoutchange.
Sira Certification Service
Rake Lane, Eccleston,Chester,CH4 gJN, England
Tel: +44 (O\1244 670900

Page1 of 3 Fax: +44 (O)1244681330
Form9176 Issue 12 Email: info@siracertification.com
Web: wvwv.siracertification.com
I
sfta
CERTIFICATION
SCHEDULE
ECTYPE-EXAMINATIONCERTIFICATE Sira06ATEX2131X
13 DESCRTPTIONOF EQUTPMENT
TheWaterproof ManualBreakGlassFireAlarmCallPointModels switchwhichis
WCP**is an electrical
operatedmanually by breaking a glasscoveror pressing frangible
an optionalre-settable element.This
releasesa plunger,whichactivates a microswitch.Optionsallowthe fittingof singleor doublepole;
singleor doublethrowcontacts, variousresistorsanddiodecombinations togetherwith LEDindication
all mounted on a printedcircuitboard, all housedin a plastic
enclosure.Terminationsare madevia a
four-wayterminal. The call pointenclosure can be in colours.
different A test
separate key permits
of the callpoint.Thefollowing
testingand re-setting modelsare included:
WCPlA- Normallyopencontactwith seriesmonitoringresistor
WCPlB- Normallyopencontactwithseriesmonitoring (Savwire
resistor model)
WCP2A- Normallyopencontactwith seriesmonitoringresistorand LEDnetwork
WCP2B- Normallyopencontactwith seriesmonitoringresistorand LEDnetwork(Savwiremodel)
WCP3A- Normallyopenor normallyclosedsinglepolewith singlethrowcontacts
WCP4A- Normallyopenor normallycloseddoublepolewith singlethrowcontacts
-
WCPTA Selectable network,normallyopensinglepolewith singlethrowcontacts
resistor/diode
WCPTB- Selectable
resistor/LEDnetwork,normallyopensinglepolewith singlethrowcontacts
Input parameters
U' = 30V
Ii = 500mA
Pi = 1W
C i = 0
! = 0
TheWaterproof WCPxxcomplywiththe requirements
ManualBreakGlassFireAlarmCallPointsModels
of Clause5.4of EN50020:2002andcanbe considered as'Simple'Apparatus''
L4 DESCRIPTIVE DOCUMENTS
L4.t Drawing No. Sheet Rev. Date Description
06l2sr5 1of1 I 12Apr06 WCPIS General Assembly
0612514 lofl 2 0I Jun06 Labeldetails
Certification
0612516 1of1 1 19Apr06 Electrical details
Configuration
14.2 ReportnumberR52A15079A
Date 9 June2006
Thiscertificate
reproduced
mayonlybe
andits schedules
in iG entiretyandwithoutchange.
Rake Lane, Eccleston,Chester,CH4 gJN, England
Tel: +44 (O)1244 670900

Page2 of 3 Fax: +44 (O)1244 681330
Form9176 Issue 12 Email: info@siracertification.com
r
slra
CERTIFICATION
SCHEDULE
ECTYPE.EXAMINATIONCERTIFICATE Sira06ATEX2L3LX
15 SPECIALCONDITIONSFORSAFEUSE(denotedby X afterthe certificatenumber)

15.1 Whilstthe enclosure is madeof plastic,by virtueof its positionof use,it is assessedthatthe equipment
will not normallybe an electrostatic risk,however,it shallnot be installedin a positionwhereit may be
subjectedto an excessive air/fluidflow or be subjectedto rubbingthat may causean electrostatic
build-up, in additionit shallonlybe cleaned witha dampcloth'
I5.2 Theequipment shallonlybe usedin an ambienttemperature rangeof -30oCto +70oC.
16 ESSENTIAL HEALTHAND SAFETYREQUIREMENTS OFANNEXII (EHSRS)
The relevantEHSRsthat are not addressedby the standardslisted in this ceftificatehave been
andindividually
identified in reportnumberR52A15079A.
assessed
77 CONDITIONSOF CERTIFICATION
17.I The useof this certificateis subjectto the Regulations to Holdersof SiraCertificates.
Applicable
I7.2 Holdersof EC type-examination cedificatesare requiredto comply with the productioncontrol
requirements defined in ArticleB of directive94l9lEC'
Date 9 June2006
Thisceftificate
reproduced
andits schedulesmayonlybe
in its entiretyandwithoutchange.
Sira GertificationService
Rake Lane, Eccleston,Chester,CH4 9JN, England
Tel: +44 (O\1244 670900

Page3 of 3 Fax: +44 (O)1244 681330
Form 9176 Issue 12 Email: info@siracertifi
cation.com
swa
I
tx CERTIFICATION
CERTIFICATE
ECTYPE.EXAMINATION V ARIATION
NUMBER
CERTIFICATE Sira06ATEX2131X Dated 9 June2006
VARIATIONNUMBER 1 (oNE) Dated 24 August2006
VARIATIONTO EQUIPMENT
To permit:
1 The useof an alternativelabeldrawing.
DOCUMENTS
DESCRIPTIVE
Number Sheet Issue Date Description

(Sirastamp)
o6l2s39 lofl 1 24 Aug06 WCP2A detailsfor Tyco
Labelling
ADDITIONALCONDITIONSOF CERTIFICATION
None
File No. 52A15540 cCeftification

E r a bofficer
yo'q
Repoft No. R52A15540A LJ
andits schedules
ThisVariation mayonlybe Sira GertificationService
reproducedin its entiretyandwithoutchange. Rake Lane, Eccleston,Chester,CH4 gJN, England
Page I of 1
Tel: +a4 @\ 1244 670900
Fax: +44 (Ol1244681330
Email: info@siracertification.com
Form 9206 Issue 3 Web: wwwsiracertification.com
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Certificate No.: IECEx SIR 08.0105X Issue No: 2 Certificate history:

Issue No. 2 (2011-02-22)
Issue No. 0 (2008-11-25)
Applicant: KAC Alarm Company Limited

KAC House
Thornhill Road
North Moons Moat
Redditch B98 9ND
United Kingdom
Electrical Apparatus: Waterproof Manual Break Glass Fire Alarm Call Point Models WCP**
Optional accessory:
Type of Protection: Intrinsic Safety and Dust
Marking: Ex ia IIC T4 Ga (-20°C < Ta < 70°C)

Ii = 500mA, Ui = 30V, Pi = 1W
Ex iaD T135°C Da
(-20°C < Ta < 40°C) when Pi = 0.75W
(-20°C < Ta < 70°C) when Pi = 0.65W
Approved for issue on behalf of the IECEx D R Stubbings BA MIET

Certification Body:
Position: Certification Manager
Signature:
Date:


SIRA Certification Service
Rake Lane
Eccleston
Chester
CH4 9JN
United Kingdom
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Certificate No: IECEx SIR 08.0105X Issue No: 2
Manufacturer: KAC Alarm Company Limited

KAC House
Thornhill Road
North Moons Moat
Redditch B98 9ND
United Kingdom
location(s):
STANDARDS:
Edition:4.0
IEC 60079-11 : 2006 Explosive atmospheres - Part 11: Equipment protection by intrinsic safety "i"
Edition:5
IEC 60079-26 : 2006 Explosive atmospheres - Part 26: Equipment with equipment protection level (EPL) Ga
Edition:2
Edition:1
IEC 61241-11 : 2005 Electrical apparatus for use in the presence of combustible dusts - Part 11: Protection by intrinsic safety
Edition:1 'iD'

Test Report:
GB/SIR/ExTR08.0146/00 GB/SIR/ExTR09.0135/00 GB/SIR/ExTR11.0041/00
GB/SIR/QAR08.0020/00
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Schedule
EQUIPMENT:
The Waterproof Manual Break Glass Fire Alarm Call Point Models WCP** is an electrical switch which is operated manually by breaking
a glass cover or pressing an optional re-settable frangible element. This releases a plunger, which activates a micro-switch. Options
allow the fitting of single or double pole; single or double throw contacts, various resistors and diode combinations together with LED
indication all mounted on a printed circuit board, all housed in a plastic enclosure. Terminations are made via a four-way terminal. The
call point enclosure can be in different colours. A separate test key permits testing and re-setting of the call point.
The following models are included:
WCP1A – Normally open contact with series monitoring resistor
WCP1B – Normally open contact with series monitoring resistor (Savwire model)
WCP2A – Normally open contact with series monitoring resistor and LED network
WCP2B – Normally open contact with series monitoring resistor and LED network (Savwire model)
WCP3A – Normally open or normally closed single pole with single throw contacts
WCP4A – Normally open or normally closed double pole with single throw contacts
WCP7A – Selectable resistor/diode network, normally open single pole with single throw contacts
WCP7B – Selectable resistor/LED network, normally open single pole with single throw contacts
CONDITIONS OF CERTIFICATION: YES as shown below:
1 The equipment enclosure is made of plastic. By virtue of its shape, design and position of use, it is assessed that the Equipment
is not considered to be an electrostatic risk; however, the Equipment must not be installed in a position where it may be subjected
to an excessive air/fluid flow or be subjected to rubbing that may cause an electrostatic build-up
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Issue 1 – this Issue introduced the following changes:

1 The option to fit an earth strap at the rear of the enclosure was endorsed.
1 The introduction of a distributors label in the name of Apollo was recognized.
5. SMOKEDETECTOR+BASE
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Certificate No.: IECEx BAS 06.0002X Issue No: 2 Certificate history:

Issue No. 2 (2011-07-12)
Applicant: Apollo Fire Detectors Ltd

36 Brookside Road
Havant
Hampshire
PO9 1JR
United Kingdom
Electrical Apparatus: Orbis IS Series Fire Detectors

Optional accessory:
Type of Protection: Intrinsic Safety
Marking: IECEx BAS 06.0002X

Ex ia IIC T4 Ga -40ºC ? Ta ? +60ºC
Ex ia IIC T5 Ga -40ºC ? Ta ? +40ºC
Approved for issue on behalf of the IECEx R S Sinclair

Certification Body:
Position: Managing Director
Signature:
Date:


Baseefa
Rockhead Business Park
Staden Lane
Buxton
Derbyshire
SK17 9RZ
United Kingdom
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Certificate No: IECEx BAS 06.0002X Issue No: 2
Manufacturer: Apollo Fire Detectors Ltd

36 Brookside Road
Havant
Hampshire
PO9 1JR
United Kingdom
location(s):
STANDARDS:
IEC 60079-0 : 2007-10 Explosive atmospheres - Part 0:Equipment - General requirements

Edition:5
Edition:5

Test Report:
GB/BAS/ExTR06.0035/00 GB/BAS/ExTR06.0052/00 GB/BAS/ExTR11.0172/00
GB/BAS/QAR06.0060/02
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Schedule
EQUIPMENT:
The Orbis IS Series Fire Detectors are designed to detect the presence of fire using optical, heat (which may be
static or rate of rise type) and multisensor (an optical sensor with a heat sensing element) techniques.
Each type of detector shares a common printed circuit board located in a plastic enclosure which is fitted to a
mounting base. Electrical connections to external circuits are made to the terminals located in the mounting base.
Input Parameters
U = 28V C = 0
i i
I = 93.3mA L = 0
i i
P = 0.67W
i
1. To avoid problems with electrostatic charging of the enclosure, the equipment must not be located in a dust-
laden airflow or cleaned with a dry cloth or with solvents.
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Variation 5.1
To permit minor drawing changes that do not affect the original assessment.
Variation 5.2
To confirm that the equipment covered by this certificate has been reviewed against the requirements of IEC
60079-0: 2007 Ed 5 and IEC 60079-11: 2006 Ed 5 in respect of the differences from IEC 60079-0: 2000 Ed 3.1,
IEC 60079-11: 1999 Ed 4 and IEC 60079-26: 2004 and that none of these differences affect this equipment.
ExTR: GB/BAS/ExTR11.0172/00 File Reference: 11/0515

6. PA JB
7. DATA JB WITH EX RELAYBUILT IN
8. SIGNAL JB
9. POWER JB WITH EX RELAYBUILT IN
10. EX JB
11. EX FLOOD LIGHT
CERTIFICATION
1 EC TYPE-EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE
2 Equipment intended for use in Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Directive 94/9/EC
3 Certificate Number: Sira 09ATEX5159X Issue: 6
4 Equipment: HDL106 Warrior Modular Floodlight/Bulkhead
5 Applicant: Hadar Lighting Ltd
6 Address: Jubilee Industrial Estate
Ashington
Northumberland NE63 8UG
UK
7 This equipment and any acceptable variation thereto is specified in the schedule to this certificate and
the documents therein referred to.
8 Sira Certification Service, notified body number 0518 in accordance with Article 9 of Directive 94/9/EC
of 23 March 1994, certifies that this equipment has been found to comply with the Essential Health and
potentially explosive atmospheres given in Annex II to the Directive.
The examination and test results are recorded in the confidential reports listed in Section 14.2.
9 Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements, with the exception of those listed in
the schedule to this certificate, has been assured by compliance with the following documents:
EN 60079-0:2012 EN 60079-7:2007 IEC 60079-18:2009 Ed 3 EN 60079-31:2009
The above list of documents may detail standards that do not appear on the UKAS Scope of Accreditation, but have been added
through Sira’s flexible scope of accreditation, which is available on request.
10 If the sign ‘X’ is placed after the certificate number, it indicates that the equipment is subject to special
conditions for safe use specified in the schedule to this certificate.
11 This EC type-examination certificate relates only to the design and construction of the specified
equipment. If applicable, further requirements of this Directive apply to the manufacture and supply of
this equipment.
12 The marking of the equipment shall include the following:
HDL106S & HDL106E HDL106A
II 2 G D II 2 G D
Ex e mb IIC T4 Gb Ex e mb IIC T6 Gb
Ex t IIIC T103°C Db IP66/67 Ex t IIIC T70°C Db IP66/IP67
Ta = -20°C to +50°C Ta = -20°C to +50°C
Project Number 29154 C Ellaby

Deputy Certification Manager
This certificate and its schedules may only be
reproduced in its entirety and without change.

Rake Lane, Eccleston, Chester, CH4 9JN, England
Page 1 of 4
Form 9400 Issue 1 Tel: +44 (0) 1244 670900
Fax: +44 (0) 1244 681330
Web: www.siracertification.com
CERTIFICATION
SCHEDULE
EC TYPE-EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE Sira 09ATEX5159X

Issue 6
13 DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT
The Type HDL106 Warrior Modular Floodlight/Bulkhead comprises an aluminium or stainless steel
rectangular base with clear or translucent polycarbonate cover. The cover is secured to the base by
four M6 x 16mm screws. The module is intended for use in fixed installations and is provided with
appropriate mounting brackets for this purpose.
The base of the enclosure houses an encapsulated power supply and control board. An LED assembly
is mounted to the base of the enclosure, such that it sits above the encapsulated power supply and
control board, but behind the outer polycarbonate cover. The LED assembly comprises two
compartments, each with integral polycarbonate cover, which are effectively encapsulated onto an
aluminium base plate. Each compartment is fitted with 24 LEDs; the LEDs can be white, infra red,
coloured or a combination.
The base of the enclosure is also fitted with Exe certified terminals, which provide connection facilities
for incoming cables and between the control board and LED assembly.
The interior of the enclosure may also be fitted with an encapsulated fuse assembly.
Up to 8 cable entry holes may be provided depending on customer requirements.
Internal and external earthing facilities are provided.
The units are designed for use on an electrical supply of either 100-240 V 50/60 Hz or 24 V ac/dc
dependant upon their construction.
An optional photocell may be supplied, which is located in an appropriate cable entry hole and provided
with a steel or stainless steel shroud.
Up to 6 modules may be interlinked to provide overall higher output assemblies.
Variation 1 - This variation introduced the following changes:
i. The numbering of the Special Conditions for Safe Use was corrected.
ii. The Special Condition for Safe Use that controls the replacement of the LEDs was amended, refer
to clause 15.8.
iii. The optional addition of a coloured glass plate to the inside of the LED assembly housing was
recognised.
i. The introduction of two alternative encapsulated power supply and control board assemblies.
i. The addition of an optional, aluminium battery housing to the rear of the unit, this allows battery
operation. In this arrangement, the unit is designated as a HDL106E Emergency LED Floodlight.
ii. The Description of Equipment was amended to clarify that the applicable electrical rating depends
on the construction of the unit.

reproduced in its entirety and without change. Sira Certification Service
Tel: +44 (0) 1244 670900
Page 2 of 4
Fax: +44 (0) 1244 681330
Form 9400 Issue1
CERTIFICATION
SCHEDULE

Issue 6

i. The introduction of a new luminaire, type reference HDL106A, with a T6 temperature classification.
ii. Following appropriate assessment to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of a later
standard, EN 61241-0:2006 and EN 61241-1:2004 were replaced by EN 60079-31:2009.
iii. The inclusion of an extra wide beam (90°) version.
iv. The option of a ‘warm white light version’ and the separation of the ‘yellow light version’ into two
categories; ‘yellow filter white light’ and ‘yellow filter warm white light’ was endorsed.
v. A ‘single compartment’ LED enclosure version was recognised.
i. Following appropriate assessment to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of the latest
technical knowledge, EN 60079-0:2012 replaced EN 60079-0:2006.
14 DESCRIPTIVE DOCUMENTS
14.1 Drawings
Refer to Certificate Annexe.
14.2 Associated Sira Reports and Certificate History
Issue Date Report no. Comment
0 16 February 2010 R19590A/00 The release of the prime certificate.
1 17 June 2010 N/A Issued to correct the date listed in Issue 0
2 27 August 2010 R22684A/00 The introduction of Variation 1.
3 24 January 2011 R23576A/00 The introduction of Variation 2.
4 12 July 2011 R24254A/00 The introduction of Variation 3.
5 21 December 2012 R27847A/00 The introduction of Variation 4.
6 27 February 2013 R29154A/00 The introduction of Variation 5.
15 SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR SAFE USE (denoted by X after the certificate number)
15.1 Except for internal wiring, not more than one single or multiple strand lead shall be connected into
either side of any terminal, unless multiple conductors have been joined in a suitable manner, e.g. two
conductors into a single insulated crimped boot lace ferrule.
15.2 Leads connected to the terminals shall be insulated for the appropriate voltage and this insulation shall
extend to within 1 mm of the metal of the terminal throat
15.3 When terminals in accordance with certificate IECEx SIR 05.0035U are used, all terminal screws, used
and unused, shall be tightened down to between 0.5 Nm and 0.7 Nm.
15.4 When terminals in accordance with certificate IECEx SIR 05.0037U are used, all terminal screws, used
and unused, shall be tightened down to between 1.2 Nm and 2 Nm.
15.5 When terminals in accordance with certificates IECEx SIR 05.0035U and IECEx SIR 05.0037U are used,
they shall only be installed and wired with cable within a temperature range of -10°C to 80°C.
15.6 When cross-connecting combs are used on terminals to certificates IECEx SIR 05.0035U and
IECEx SIR 05.0037U, the relevant conditions associated with those certificates shall be applied.

Tel: +44 (0) 1244 670900
Page 3 of 4
Fax: +44 (0) 1244 681330
Form 9400 Issue1
CERTIFICATION
SCHEDULE

Issue 6
15.7 Cable entry holes shall be fitted with either an appropriately certified cable gland or appropriately
certified blanking element. These shall provide and maintain a minimum enclosure ingress protection of
IP66 or IP67 as appropriate.
15.8 If more than 8 individual LEDs are not illuminated, the LED assembly shall be replaced.
15.9 When the optional fuse is not fitted, the supply circuit shall be protected by a fuse capable of
withstanding a prospective short circuit current of 1500 A.
16 ESSENTIAL HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS OF ANNEX II (EHSRs)
The relevant EHSRs that are not addressed by the standards listed in this certificate have been
identified and individually assessed in the reports listed in Section 14.2.
17 CONDITIONS OF CERTIFICATION
17.1 The use of this certificate is subject to the Regulations Applicable to Holders of Sira Certificates.
17.2 Holders of EC type-examination certificates are required to comply with the production control
requirements defined in Article 8 of directive 94/9/EC.
17.3 Every unit, including fuse assembly when fitted, shall be subjected to a routine dielectric strength test
of at least 1508 V r.m.s. a.c. applied for at least 1 s, or at least 1810 V r.m.s. a.c. applied for at least
100 ms, between all terminals and the equipment enclosure, in accordance with Clause 9.2 of
IEC 60079-18:2009.
17.4 Every unit shall be subjected to a visual inspection in accordance with Clause 9.1 of
IEC 60079-18:2009.

Tel: +44 (0) 1244 670900
Page 4 of 4
Fax: +44 (0) 1244 681330
Form 9400 Issue1
Certificate Annexe
Certificate Number: Sira 09ATEX5159X
Equipment: HDL 106 Warrior Modular Floodlight/Bulkhead
Applicant: Hadar Lighting Limited
CERTIFICATION
Issue 0
Number Sheet Rev. Date Description
ALC0014 1 to 3 0 16 Jul 09 HDL 106 LED Luminaire
ALC0003 1 of 1 - 08 Mar 06 Encapsulated Fuse Assembly
Issue 1 No new drawings were introduced.
Issue 2
Number Sheets Rev. Date (Sira stamp) Title
ALC0014 1 of 3 0 26 Aug 10 HDL 106 LED Luminaire
Issue 3
ALC0015 1 of 1 0 18 Jan 11 Alternative Control Gear
Issue 4
ALC0016 1 04 06 Jul 11 HDL 106 Emergency Battery Enclosure
Issue 5
ALC0014 1 to 3 05 11 Dec 12 HDL106 LED Luminaire Ex emb

Tel: +44 (0) 1244 670900
Page 1 of 1
Fax: +44 (0) 1244 681330
Form 9400 Issue 1
12. EX LIGHT SWITCH
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity

Issue No. 2 (2012-03-08)
Issue No. 0 (2007-10-02)
Applicant: Cooper Crouse Hinds GmbH

Neuer Weg Nord 49
Germany
Electrical Apparatus: Installation switch

Optional accessory: Type GHG 273 ….R….
Type of Protection: General requirements, Flameproof enclosures, Increased safety, Dust explosion protection
Tamb see 4. Point
Ex tD A21 IP66 T 67 °C

Certification Body:
Position: managing director
Signature:
Date:


H 1037 BUDAPEST
MIKOVINY S.u. 2-4
Hungary
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity

Neuer Weg Nord 49
Germany
location(s):
S.C. Cooper Industries Romania S.R.L
ARAD, Zona Industrial NV, str III, no. 12
Romania
Romania
STANDARDS:
Edition:4.0
IEC 60079-1 : 2003 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres - Part 1: Flameproof enclosure 'd'
Edition: 5
Edition:3
Edition:1
Edition:1

Test Report:
DE/BVS/QAR11.0006/01 DE/BVS/QAR11.0009/00 HU/BKI/QAR06.0005/01

IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Schedule
EQUIPMENT:
The installation switch type GHG 273 ….R…. serves as a current switch for light, load and control circuits.
It is connected via terminals integrated in the socket. If this type is made from a material of surface resistance of ≥ 1 GΩ, it will carry a
warning note.
See details in Addendum to IECEx BKI 07.0036.
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
New manufacturing location:
S.C. Cooper Industries Romania S.R.L, Romania
Annex:

IECEx BKI 07.0036
Page 1 of 2
1. Description
The installation switch type GHG 273 ….R…. serves as a current switch for light, load and control circuits.
It is connected via terminals integrated in the socket. If this type is made from a material of surface resistance of ≥ 1 GΩ, it will
carry a warning note.
2. Type assortment
GHG 273….R….
1._, 2._, 3._ Code for manufacturer
4._, 5._ Code for apparatus group
6._ Code for enclosure material

3 = plastic made of non-combustible material
7._ Type of switch

1 = cut-out, one pole
2 = cut-out, two pole
3 = pushbutton, one pole
4 = pushbutton, two pole
5 = series switch
6 = changeover switch
7 = one-pole, double switch
8 = one-pole, double pushbutton
8._, 9._, 10._, 11._, 12._, 13._, 14._, 15._ No influence on the explosion protection
Rated voltage Ue … up to 250 V
Rated current Ie … max 16 A
In accordance with the relevant provisious, rated values other than those stated above are permissible if the marking and
breaking capacity is complied with; they have been specified by the manufacturer as a function of the mode of operation,
utilization, category, etc.
At a rated thermal current Ith … 16 A
for use in areas of temperature class T6
2
Rated cross section … max. 2 × 4 mm solid lead
2
2 × 2,5 mm flexible lead
When used in areas exposed to gas, vapours, fog:
2
Ambient temperature range, when connecting 1,5 mm conductors -55 °C ≤ Tamb ≤ +40 °C
2
When used in areas exposed to flammable dust:
2
2
4.1 Temperature class T6

4.2 Surface temperature T 67 °C
5. Ingress protection IP66 to IEC 60529

IECEx BKI 07.0036
Page 2 of 2
Drawing
Description No. 4171 3 pages 1998.01.21.
Annex to description No 4171 3 pages 1998.01.21.
Drawing No. GHG 27-4-4262 1998.01.21.
GHG 27-1-4264 1998.01.21.
Test Report PTB Ex 98-30008 3 pages 1998.10.15.
1. Supplement Descriptive documents
Description to 1. Supplement 1 page 2000.09.06.
Test Report BVS PP 00.2046 EG 7 pages 2000.09.15.
Test Report PTB Ex 00-30082 4 pages 2000.10.18.
Description No. 4170 to built in switch 4 pages 1998.01.21.
Annex to description No. 4170 1 page 1998.01.21.
Drawing No GHG 27-3-4263 1998.01.21.
Table of Gaps 1 page 1998.01.21.
Test Report PTB 98-18148 3 pages 1998.10.15.
13. EMERGENCY LIGHT
14. ESD BUTTON
Certificate of Conformity: IECEx PTB 08.0022 Page 1 of 3
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Certificate No.: IECEx PTB 08.0022 issue No.:0 Certificate history:
Status: Current
Applicant: BARTEC GmbH

Max-Eyth-Straße 16
97980 Bad Mergentheim
Germany
Electrical Apparatus: Control and Indicating device Type 07-351*-****/****/****

Optional accessory:
Type of Protection: Increased Safety, Protection by Enclosures
Ex tD A21 IP65, IP66, IP67 T80 °C
Approved for issue on behalf of the IECEx Dr.-Ing. Uwe Klausmeyer

Certification Body:
Position: Head of Section "Flameproof Enclosures"
Signature:
Date:


Physikalisch-Technische Bundesanstalt (PTB)
Bundesallee 100
38116 Braunschweig
Germany
http://iecex.iec.ch/IECEx/IECExWeb.nsf/uid/FC387A7E7791BA4FC125746E00278515?o... 25.06.2008
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Certificate No.: IECEx PTB 08.0022
Date of Issue: 2008-06-20 Issue No.: 0
Page 2 of 3
Manufacturer: BARTEC GmbH

Max-Eyth-Straße 16
Germany
Manufacturing location(s):
This certificate is issued as verification that a sample(s), representative of production, was asses sed and tested and
found to comply with the IEC Standard list below and that the manufacturer's quality system, relating to the Ex products
covered by this certificate, was assessed and found to comply with the IECEx Quality system requirements. This
certificate is granted subject to the conditions as set out in IECEx Scheme Rules, IECEx 02 and Operational
Documents as amended.
STANDARDS:
The electrical apparatus and any acceptable variations to it specified in the schedule of this certificate and the identified
documents, was found to comply with the following standards:
Edition: 4.0
Edition: 5
IEC 60079-7 : 2006-07 Explosive atmospheres - Part 7: Equipment protection by increased safety "e"
Edition: 4
IEC 61241-0 : 2004 Electrical apparatus for use in the presence of combustible dust - Part 0: General
Edition: 1 requirements
IEC 61241-1 : 2004 Electrical apparatus for use in the presence of combustible dust - Part 1: Protection by
Edition: 1 enclosures "tD"
This Certificate does not indicate compliance with electrical safety and performance requirements other than those
expressly included in the Standards listed above.

Test Report:
DE/PTB/ExTR08.0025/00

DE/TUN/QAR06.0017/00
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Certificate No.: IECEx PTB 08.0022
Page 3 of 3
Schedule
EQUIPMENT:
Description of equipment
The control and indicating device type 07-351*-****/****/**** comprises of one or several plastic enclosures designed to
type of protection Increased Safety “e”. The enclosures can be fitted with terminals as well as with control and indicating
elements. Cable entries are provided for connection.The components are separately certified.
Electrical Data, Nomenclature and Reference sheets see Annex
Annexe: Annex_IECEx PTB 08.0022.pdf
15. DUCT HEATER(OPTIONAL)
1. Certificates
1.1 NEMKO 04 ATEX 1338. Norske Backer duct heaters type OKB and OKB-S
Rev: 2013.10.17. Side 3 av 18

Rev: 2013.10.17. Side 4 av 18
Rev: 2013.10.17. Side 5 av 18
Rev: 2013.10.17. Side 6 av 18
Rev: 2013.10.17. Side 7 av 18
Rev: 2013.10.17. Side 8 av 18
Certificate of Conformity: IECEx NEM 13.0020X http://iecex.iec.ch/iecex/IECExWeb.nsf/certificatesajaxa...
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Certificate No.: IECEx NEM 13.0020X issue No.:0

Certificate history:
Status: Current
Applicant: Norske Backer AS

Jostein Svendheimsvei 8-10
N-2212 Kongsvinger
Norway
Electrical Apparatus: Immersion heater

Optional accessory:
Type of Protection: Increased Safety
Marking: Ex e d II T3 Gb
Approved for issue on behalf of the IECEx Asle Kaastad

Certification Body:
Signature:
Date:

NEMKO
Gaustadelleen 30
Oslo N-0314
Norway
1 von 3 2013/12/13 11:45

IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Certificate No.: IECEx NEM 13.0020X
Page 2 of 3
Manufacturer: Norske Bäcker AS

Jostein Svendheimsvei 8-10
N-2212 Kongsvinger
Norway
location(s):
This certificate is issued as verification that a sample(s), representative of production, was assessed and tested and
found to comply with the IEC Standard list below and that the manufacturer's quality system, relating to the Ex products
covered by this certificate, was assessed and found to comply with the IECEx Quality system requirements. This
certificate is granted subject to the conditions as set out in IECEx Scheme Rules, IECEx 02 and Operational Documents
as amended.
STANDARDS:
documents, was found to comply with the following standards:
IEC 60079-0 : 2011 Explosive atmospheres - Part 0: General requirements

Edition: 6.0
IEC 60079-1 : 2007-04 Explosive atmospheres - Part 1: Equipment protection by flameproof enclosures "d"
Edition: 6
Edition: 4

Test Report:
NO/NEM/ExTR13.0013/00
NO/NEM/QAR12.0001/00
2 von 3 2013/12/13 11:45

IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Certificate No.: IECEx NEM 13.0020X
Page 3 of 3
Schedule
EQUIPMENT:
Immersion heating system.
Type/model:
"IH-DN.../ANSI.../Special-....DL"
Explanation of model designation:

IH = Immersion Heater
DN = Standard for industrial flange in millimetre [mm] and nominal pipe diameter.
ANSI = Standard for industrial flange with inch size measurements.
Special = Special flange
DL = Depth of immersion in millimeter [mm] from flange.
Technical data:
Rated power: max 2000kW
Rated voltage: max 1250V
Ingress protection code: IP56 or IP66
Maximum 90°C liquid temperature with heating elemen t horizontal mounted
Maximum 70°C liquid temperature with heating elemen t vertical mounted
This product shall only be installed according to the technical specification following with the instructions.
For horizontal mounting - with connection box side mounted - the settings of the sealed temperature sensors are
maximum:
TSH = 90°C and TSHH = 185°C
For vertical mounting - connection box top mounted - the settings of the sealed temperature sensors are maximum:
TSH = 70°C and TSHH = 160°C
The temperature sensors TSH and TSHH shall not be adjusted without conferring manufacturer Norske Backer AS.
3 von 3 2013/12/13 11:45

16. CPFG PANEL
Customer : Modex
Purchase Order No : PO 2015

2016GAU15011B
2015 GAU15011A001
MRS MEA 15005
001
2015-MUE15009A-001
Project Reference : Q2212801
Serial No : 2232748
2232745
2232701
2232844
Scarborough House
Craigearn Business Park
Morrison Way
Kintore
Aberdeenshire
United Kingdom
AB51 0TH
Tel: +44(0)1467 633355 Fax: +44(0)1467 632440

www.pdcsystems.co.uk
Exd Rated CPFG Panel

(EC-03-01)
ATEX-IECEx Approved
Contents
Section Description
1 Enclosure Installation & Safety Instructions
2 Certificate of Conformity
3 CE Declaration of Conformity
4 Quality Test Certificate
5 Drawings : CPFG Panel
• General Arrangement
• Internal Layout
• Internal Power Wiring
• Internal Control Wiring 1
• Internal Control Wiring 2
• Field Terminations
• Bill of Materials
6 ATEX Certification
7 IECEx Certification
8 Associated Equipment ATEX/IECEx Certification Register
9 Operation Procedure/Cause & Effects
PDC Systems Limited Scarborough House Tel: +44 (0)1467 633355

Electrical & Instrumentation Systems, Craigearn Business Park Fax: +44 (0)1467 632440
Project Design, Management, Morrison Way Mobile: 07850 796037
Manufacture and Installation. Kintore Home: +44 (0)1467 622965
Aberdeenshire
Company Registered No:- SC400732 AB51 0TH VAT Registered Number:- 115 1685 31
Enclosure Installation and
Safety Instructions
Equipment : Enclosures, Switchgears and Rack Assemblies for Hazardous Areas.
Series : EJB
Note : Please read these instructions carefully before installing, taking into
operation and maintaining this equipment.
Safety Notice : The Enclosures covered by this operating instructions are cast during
manufacture and are to be considered as heavy, care is to be taken whilst handling or
installing enclosures.
Reference to material handling and lifting is the responsibility of the personnel handling the
enclosures.
Contents:-
1. Safety instructions
2. Conformity with Standards
3. Technical Data
4. Installation
5. Taking into Operation
6. Maintenance
1. Safety Instructions
These operating instructions shall not be kept inside the enclosures during operations.
Unauthorised Changes of the Design and Modifications to the Enclosures are NOT
permitted.
Whilst undertaking any servicing on the equipment enlosures, switchgear or rack

assemblies, the National Safety rules and regulations for Prevention of Accidents
have to be observed as well as the Safety Instructions Included in these operating
instructions and set in Italics the same as this text!
These boxes are suitable for use in Zone I and Zone II hazardous areas acc. To IEC
60079-17.
Not to be used in Zone 0!

Aberdeenshire
2. Conformity with Standards
Compliance with the Essential Health & Safety Requirements has been assured by
compliance with the following standards :
BS EN 60079-0:2012 (IEC 60079-0:2007)
BS EN 60079-1:2007 (IEC 60079-1:2007)
BS EN 60079-11:2012 (IEC 60079-11:2006)
It also complies with the EC Directive for “Apparatus and protective systems for use in
explosive atmospheres” (94/9/EC)
It has been designed, manufactured and tested in accordance to the state of the art and
according to EN29001 (ISO9001)
This apparatus is suitable for use in explosive atmospheres, Zone 1 & Zone 2 according to
IEC60079-10
3. Technical Data
These enclosures can include the following:
Bus –Bar Control & Operation Circuits

Terminals Servomotors without ventilation
Low Voltage Transformers Starters & Ballasts for Discharge Lamps
Air Circuit Breakers Electronic Apparatus
Automatic Circuit Breakers Associated Intrinsic Safety Apparatus
Protection Mode Ex dIIB Gb Ex d [ia] IIB Gb Ex d [ib] IIB Gb Ex d [ia/ib] IIB Gb
Thermal Class According to power dissipation of the internal components,

see label in the supplied equipment.
Protection IP65 acc. EN60529
Certificate of Conformity IECEx SIR 12.0071X

The mark X indicates that the equipment or protective
system is subject to special conditions for safe use. (See
Certificate)
Ambient Temperature -20 to +55°C
Storage Temperature -40 to +60°C

In original packing
Rated Voltage <750V
Rated Current < 1200A
Material Copper Free Aluminium

Coated in Grey Epoxy Double Component
Cable Entries Up to M100 according to needs, different types of threads

according to needs.
Only Ex d IIB minimum certified cable glands or seals suitable for the kind of cable,
to be usedfor handling and installing these accessories, instructions supplied by
manufacture must be followed.

Aberdeenshire
4. Installation
When mounting and operating electrical apparatus for hazardous areas, the relevant
national regulations as well as the general rules of engineering will have to be
observed.
Transport and store in original packing only.
Opening and closing of boxes

The opening of boxes shall always be without Voltage.
To slacken or tighten the stainless steel screws of the cover with a

torque as follows: - M6=9,9Nm, M8=24Nm and M10=30Nm.
Cable entries
To mount the cable glands or seals selected according to the kind and size of the feeding
cable, the instructions supplied by the manufacturer must be followed.
Unused cable entries have to be closed by an Ex d IIB minimum certified plug, which
has to be installed according to the manufacturer instructions.
Main Connection
Connect in accordance with the technical documentation of the supplied equipment.
5. Taking into Operation

Prior to operation, check the equipment enclosure, switchgear or rack assembly for
its proper functioning and electrical installation in compliance with these operating
instructions and other applicable regulations.
Carry out insulation measurements only between L and PE as well as N and PE.
Test voltage 1 kV AC/DC Max
Terminal insulation 5MΩ
Then the enclosures have to be tightly closed.
6. Maintenance
The user is responsible for the luminaire safe use (applies to luminaries only)
The national regulations applicable to the maintenance test and repairing of the
apparatus for hazardous areas and the general rules of engineering will have to be
observed.
Maintenance
The enclosure shall be maintained at regular intervals in accordance with the national
regulations. It is recommended to establish an inspection plan in accordance with IEC
60079-17.
During inspection the parts of protection mode must be inspected with special attention.
-do the body, covers and windows have cracks or damages?
-The flange flameproof joint is clean, greased and without damage or corrosion? And are
there all closing elements of the enclosure?

Aberdeenshire
-Is there any corrosion on the threads in the cable entries?
-Are the cable entries, blanking plugs and terminals well tightened?
Flameproof joints have to be permanently greased in order toensure their protection

against corrosion, water tightness and blocking problems.
To clean remains of grease and corrosion without using sharp metallic tools (these
can damage the joint surface) and to grease with greases thermically and chemically
stable with drop point >200 Deg C.
I.e. MOLYKOTE BR2 Plus by Dow Corning.
If interstice of flange flameproof joint is higher the 0,2mm the equipment has to be
sent to the factory for repairing.
The reparation of the glass seal has to be done by manufacturer. User is

unauthorised for replacing this kind of glass-seal.
When enclosure requires repainting, you will have to be careful to ensure that the
flameproof joints are completely free from paint.
Inspection
To observe the national regulations. The tasks of inspection must be done by qualified
personnel.
Repair
For any equipment reparation use original spare parts from manufacturer.
To observe the national regulations. The tasks of reparation must be done by qualified
personnel.
In case of doubt check with the technical services of PDC Systems.
Spare Parts and Accessories.
-Stainless steel screw M6 x 15 - DIN933, ref 502112911

M8 x 20 - DIN933, ref 444112203
M10 x 35 DIN933, ref 501112237
-Hinge Screw, ref 111117198
-Grease – Molykote BR2 Plus (100g) ref BR2

Aberdeenshire
Fig1
Enclosure Type External Internal Dimension’s Fixings Weight

Dimension's
A B C A1 B1 C1 D E Kg
EJB 12 R 215 131 102 178 89 57 242 188 3,00
EJB 12 A 215 131 162 178 89 110 242 188 3,60
EJB 14 R 412 150 143 358 103 85 436 178 8.30
EJB 23 R 336 217 212 276 163 152 316 202 11,00
EJB 110 373 373 230 305 305 162 310 310 22,00
EJB 120 474 373 230 405 305 162 414 310 28.50
EJB 121 474 373 295 405 305 235 414 310 32,00
EJB 130 577 373 230 518 305 162 520 310 35,30
EJB 131 577 373 295 518 305 235 520 310 39,00
EJB 240 680 474 230 619 405 162 624 414 53,20
EJB 241 680 474 295 619 405 235 624 414 58,80
EJB 241 M1 with transparent window cover Dimension’s 230 x 255

Document No:- PDC-IECEx 2012 (Enclosure Installation Safety)

Date:- 24/07/2012
Revision:- 01
Signed Richard Cowling (Manager)

Aberdeenshire
2232745
2232748
2232701
2015
2015 GAU15011B
2016 GAU15011A 001
001 001
MRS MEA 15005
2232745
2232701
2232748
2232701
2232745
2232748
2232748
2232745
2232701
2232748
2232745
2232701
CERTIFICATION
4 Equipment: A Range Of Flameproof Control Panels
5 Applicant: PDC Systems Limited
6 Address: Scarborough House
Craigearn Business Park
Morrison Way
Kintore
Aberdeenshire AB51 0TH
UK
7 This equipment and any acceptable variation thereto is specified in the schedule to this certificate and
the documents therein referred to.
8 Sira Certification Service, notified body number 0518 in accordance with Article 9 of Directive 94/9/EC
of 23 March 1994, certifies that this equipment has been found to comply with the Essential Health and
potentially explosive atmospheres given in Annex II to the Directive.
The examination and test results are recorded in the confidential reports listed in Section 14.2.
9 Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements, with the exception of those listed in the
schedule to this certificate, has been assured by compliance with the following documents:
EN 60079-0:2006 EN 60079-1:2007 EN 60079-11:2007
10 If the sign ‘X’ is placed after the certificate number, it indicates that the equipment is subject to special
conditions for safe use specified in the schedule to this certificate.
11 This EC type-examination certificate relates only to the design and construction of the specified
equipment. If applicable, further requirements of this Directive apply to the manufacture and supply of
this equipment.
II 2G
II 2 (1)G •
Ex d IIB T6
Ex d [ia] IIB T6 •
• Markings for CPFG panel only
Project Number 22597 C Ellaby

C. Index 04 Certification Officer
Page 1 of 3
Form 9400 Issue 1 Tel: +44 (0) 1244 670900
Fax: +44 (0) 1244 681330
CERTIFICATION
SCHEDULE

Issue 0
The electrical panels are cast aluminium or stainless steel flameproof enclosures with flanged covers. The
enclosures utilised are certified enclosures certified under CESI 01ATEX027 and LOM 02ATEX3060U. The
enclosures are populated with electrical and electronic equipment as described below.
860 A Contactor Panel (CCFE 6)
The 860 A Contactor panel is a CCFE 6 enclosure containing power isolation circuitry.
Battery Supply Isolation Panel (EJB23R)
The Battery Supply Isolation Panel is an EJB23R enclosure containing isolation circuitry. The enclosure
is coupled to a stainless steel increased safety terminal box which is not within the scope of this
assessment, cables pass through flameproof bushings.
Combined Pressure, Fire and Gas (CPFG) Panel (EJB241)
The CPFG Panel is an EJB241 enclosure containing a PLC, HMI and associated control circuitry. The
equipment also contains intrinsic safety barriers. The cover is fitted with five isolator switches,
pushbutton and window. The enclosure is coupled to a stainless steel increased safety terminal box
which is not within the scope of this assessment, cables pass through flameproof bushings.
Power Distribution Panel (EJB240)
The Power Distribution Panel is an EJB240 enclosure containing power distribution circuitry. The cover
is fitted with two isolator switches.
Fan Contactor Panel(EJB23R)
The Fan Contactor Panel is an EJB23R enclosure containing two isolation circuits. The cover is fitted
with two isolator switches.
14.1 Drawings
Issue Date Report number Comment
0 09 September 2010 R22597A/00 The release of the prime certificate.

Tel: +44 (0) 1244 670900
Page 2 of 3
Fax: +44 (0) 1244 681330
Form 9400 Issue1
CERTIFICATION
SCHEDULE

Issue 0
15.1 The CPFG panel contains Pepperl and Fuchs type K*D2-S*-EX1(.P).**-****, type KFDO-CS-EX2.51P
and K*D*-SR*-Ex*.W.* intrinsically safe barriers, the safety parameters as detailed in BAS
00ATEX7216, BAS 98 ATEX7343 and PTB 00ATEX2080 shall be observed:
K*D2-S*-EX1(.P).**-**** KFDO-CS-EX2.51P K*D*-SR*-Ex*.W.* (max. values for each circuit)
Uo = 17.22 V Uo = 25.2 V Uo = 10.5 V
Io = 220 mA Io = 93 mA Io = 13 mA
Po = 0.95 W Po = 0.585 W Po = 0.034 W
Ri = 807.7 ohm (linear characteristic)
Ci = 0 Ci = 0 Ci = 0
Li = 0 Li = 0 Li = 0
15.2 The user/installer shall install the panels taking into account any restrictions or special conditions for
safe use that are applicable to the previously certified devices that are fitted in them.
The relevant EHSRs that are not addressed by the standards listed in this certificate have been
identified and individually assessed in the reports listed in Section 14.2.
17.1 The use of this certificate is subject to the Regulations Applicable to Holders of Sira Certificates.
17.3 Each device shall be subjected to a routine overpressure test in accordance with the table below. In all
cases the pressure shall be maintained for at least 10 seconds as required by clause 16 of IEC 60079-
1:2007. There shall be no permanent deformation or damage to the enclosure.
11.5 bar for types CCFE-6 (860 A Contactor Panel)
13.2 bar for types EJB 23 (Battery Isolation Panel and Fan Contactor Panel)
12.8 bar for types EJB 241 (CPFG)
11.7 bar for types EJB 240 (Power Distribution Panel)
17.4 The manufacturer shall take all reasonable steps to ensure that the user/installer complies with the
special conditions for safe use associated with the panels, in addition, the manufacturer shall provide
the user/installer with an appropriate copy of the certificate for each certified device that is fitted in
them.
17.5 The products covered by this certificate incorporate previously certified devices, it is therefore the
responsibility of the manufacturer to continually monitor the status of the certification associated with
these devices, and the manufacturer shall inform Sira of any modifications of the devices that may
impinge upon the explosion safety design of their products.

Tel: +44 (0) 1244 670900
Page 3 of 3
Fax: +44 (0) 1244 681330
Form 9400 Issue1
Certificate Annexe
Certificate Number: Sira 10ATEX1239X
Equipment: A Range Of Flameproof Control Panels
Applicant: PDC Systems Limited
CERTIFICATION
Issue 0
Drawing No. Sheets Rev. Date (Sira Stamp)
Title
Ex-D1511601-B1 1 of 1 B 18 Aug 10 Power Supply Ex d Enclosure General arrangement
Ex-D1511621-B1 1 of 1 B 18 Aug 10 Power Supply Ex d Enclosure Power Distribution
Internal Wiring
Ex-D1511680-B1 1 of 1 B 18 Aug 10 Power Supply Ex d Enclosure Bill of materials
Ex-D1511601-C1 1 of 1 B 18 Aug 10 Power Supply Ex d Enclosure General arrangement
Ex-D1511621-C1 1 of 1 B 18 Aug 10 Power Supply Ex d Enclosure Power Distribution
Internal Wiring
Ex-D1511680-C1 1 of 1 B 18 Aug 10 Power Supply Ex d Enclosure Bill of materials
Ex-D1622003-A1 1 of 1 A 06 Sep 10 Battery Supply Isolation Panel General Layout
Ex-D1622004-A1 1 of 1 A 06 Sep 10 Battery Supply Isolation Panel Drilling Layout
Ex-D1622021-A1 1 of 1 A 06 Sep 10 Bumpless Supply VDC Contactor Panel Power
distribution internal wiring
Ex-D1622080-A1 1 of 1 A 06 Sep 10 Battery Supply Isolation Panel Bill of materials
Ex-D1511601-A1 1 of 1 B 06 Sep 10 Ex d CPFG Panel General Arrangement
Ex-D1511602-A1 1 of 1 B 06 Sep 10 CPFG Panel Internal Layout
Ex-D1511603-A1 1 of 1 A 06 Sep 10 CPFG Panel Terminal Enclosure Internal Layout
Ex-D1511604-A1 1 of 1 B 06 Sep 10 CPFG Panel Volumetric Drawing
Ex-D1511611-A1 1 of 1 A 06 Sep 10 CPFG Panel Digital Display General Layout
Ex-D1511621-A1 1 of 1 B 06 Sep 10 CPFG Panel Power Distribution Internal Wiring
Ex-D1511622-A1 1 to 4 B 06 Sep 10 CPFG Panel Internal Wiring
Ex-D1511624-A1 1 to 5 B 06 Sep 10 CPFG Panel Field Wiring Terminations 3PH 440VAC
Ex-D1511680-A1 1 of 1 A 06 Sep 10 Pressurisation, Fire and Gas Panel Bill of Materials
Ex-D1622001-D1 1 of 1 A 06 Sep 10 Ex d Multi Power Panel 15116-4 General arrangement
Ex-D1622002-D1 1 of 1 A 06 Sep 10 Ex d Multi power panel 15116-4 internal arrangement
Ex-D1622003-D1 1 of 1 A 06 Sep 10 Ex d Multi power panel 15116-4 General Arrangement
Ex-D1622004-D1 1 of 1 A 06 Sep 10 Ex d Multi power panel 15116-4 Volumetric Layout
Ex-D1622012-D1 1 of 1 A 06 Sep 10 Ex d Multi power panel 15116-4 Label Details
Ex-D1622021-D1 1 to 3 A 06 Sep 10 Ex d Multi power panel 15116-4 Power Distribution
Internal Wiring
Ex-D1622080-D1 1 of 1 A 06 Sep 10 Ex d Multi Power Panel 15116-4 Bill of Materials
Ex-D1622001-B1 1 of 1 B 06 Sep 10 Fan Interface Control Contactor Panel General Layout
Ex-D1622002-B1 1 of 1 A 06 Sep 10 Fan Interface Control Contactor Panel Volumetric
Layout
Ex-D1622021-B1 1 of 1 A 06 Sep 10 Fan interface control contactor panel power distribution
internal wiring
Ex-D1622080-B1 1 of 1 B 06 Sep 10 Ex d Fan contactor isolation panel Bill of Materials
PDC ATEX 01* 1 of 1 0 06 Sep 10 ATEX label drawing
* This drawing was amended by Sira on 9 September 2010.

Tel: +44 (0) 1244 670900
Page 1 of 1
Fax: +44 (0) 1244 681330
Form 9400 Issue 1
Hazardous Area
Certification Register
(These documents are available

on request)
Equipment Part Number Hazardous Area Notes

Certificate Reference
IS Fire & Smoke Barrier KFD0-CS-EX2.51P BAS 98 ATEX 7343 Certificate/Data Sheet
IECEx BAS 05.0004 Available on Request
IS Air Flow & Pressure KCD2-SR-EX2 BASEEFA 06 ATEX 0092 Certificate/Data Sheet
Barrier IECEx BAS 06.0025 Available on Request
IS H2S Detector Barrier KFD2-STC4-EX1 BAS 99 ATEX 7060 Certificate/Data Sheet

IECEx BAS 04.0016 Available on Request

Project Design, Management, Morrison Way Mobile: +44 (0)7850 796037
Aberdeenshire
Company Registered No:‐ SC400732 AB51 0TH VAT Registered Number:‐ 115 1685 31
Operations Manual
Combined Fire, Gas and Air
Pressurisation Control Panel
400..690V Version
Model : (EC-03-01)
This manual is to cover the PLC controlled Combined Power, Pressurisation, Fire and Gas
Detection Control Panels Supplied under our Model (EC-03-01).
The system design is, to operate from a Selecteable Three-Phase 400-500-(600-660-690) Vac
50/60 Hz Power Supply without requiring any adjustments to allow for different supply
voltages within the specified range.
The CPFG is supplied from Three Separate power Supplies and all Supplies must be isolated
elsewhere before opening the CPFG Panel
To comply with DNV2.7.2 (2013) version the supplies are as follows

1) Standard 3Phase CPFG power supply converted to 24dc
2) 110/230Vac Emergency power supply converted to 24dc c/w Battery backup >2 Hours
3) 24Vdc battery Supply from Installation Fire/Gas System 24Vdc 24 Hour Duration.
Prior to opening the CPFG Panel all three power supplies must be isolated.
The Control Panel has been designed to operate as a stand-alone system, where the operator
switches on the system to Air Purge the Facility that it is installed in.
The system consists of an Exd enclosure containing a PLC configured with the relevant software to
carry out the control functions and the following equipment: -
1. Main Incoming Terminals Rated 750V 85A 3 Phase,

2. 1 x 600-660-690Vac – 440Vac 50/60Hz 1,6Kva Transformer
3. 1 x 10A MPCB for Transformer Protection
4. 1 x Voltage Selector Switch for Transformer Input Voltage
5. Purge Fan Contactor and Overload Relay and MCB,
6. Main Power Contactor,
7. 400-500 Vac 3 Phase to 24Vdc Power Supply Unit and MCB,
8. 110/230Vac 1Ph to 24Vdc Power Supply Unit and Fuse Terminal
9. Diode De-Coupler for Combining Power Supply 24Vdc
10. Fire and Gas Interfaces,
11. Air Pressure Switch Interfaces,
12. Remote Alarm Interfaces
13. Alarm and Operational Status Indication Lights,
14. Field Terminals and fuse terminals,
15. Mounted on the face of the enclosure, Power By-Pass Switch, Main Control Circuit
Off/On Switch, Purge Fan Stop/O/Start Switch,Purge By-Pass Switch By-Pass 1/0/By-
Pass 2 Switch and Power On/O/Reset Switch

Aberdeenshire
As an added safety factor all control voltages are 24Vdc and are either Exd or Exi systems
interfaced via galvanic isolated safety barriers.
The control voltage 24Vdc can be isolated by locking off the Switch located RH sidefront side of
Exd enclosure
The control pushbuttons operate as follows:-

a) Power By-Pass Switch Directs Power Out without the CPFG PLC being in Control
b) Control Power Isolation Switch turns off the PLC 24Vdc Control Power
c) Fan Stop/O/Start Switch Stops and Starts the Fan
d) By-Pass 1/O/By-Pass 2 Switch is for Operating under certain circumstances Under
Hot Work Permit
e) Safe/O/ResetSwitch is used to Start the Safe Power and Reset the system after an
Alarm Has Occurred.
The PLC can be reset by switching off the control power rotary switch and switching back on again.
Refer to manual for instructions on error codes.
To operate the system, first ensure that the three-phase power supply has
been correctly installed by competent personnel and that the system is safe
to energise.
The CPFG is fitted with a Low Temperature Thermostat that is design to prevent the PLC Operating
below
-5 Deg C Temperature a relay will latch as the temperature rises above this temperature set point
and the Relay will latch on the Low Temperature has no Executive Action as it is assumed that
once operational the temperature will not fall below the -5 Deg C.
The system will function by operating the fan start switch, the pressurisation fan will run creating an
air flow which will in turn cause the cabin to become pressurised
Once airflow has been detected, the Purge Timing period will commence, if there hasnot been a
loss of Air Pressure during the purge period. The system will proceed to ready to switch on safe
power to safe area equipment.
Pressing the Safe Power push button will energise the main contactor C1 after completion of the air
purge cycle. This will provide power at mains voltage and frequency to power transformer, located
in the cabin.
NOTE – If the cabin transformer has adjustable settings, it MUST be correctly

selected to match the supply voltage.
The system will operate in a watching mode monitoring the Air Pressure, Fire and Gas Detection.
Should an alarm situation arise of either Loss of Air Pressure Loss, Fire, Smoke, Gas at Low LEL or
High LEL the PLC will carry out the correct procedure in either alarming and or shutting down the
system.
The system incorporates a number of visual indication lights,which are used for monitoring status or
defining various faults?

Aberdeenshire
These lights also are capable of flashing at different flash rates (Slow or Fast) refer table below: -
# Light Colour Status Function
1 CPFG Main Power Supply Green On Steady Operational
2 Emergency Power Supply Green On Steady Operational
3 Air Flow Amber On Steady Operational
4 Air Pressure Amber On Steady Operational
5 Inlet Damper Open Green On Steady Open
6 Inlet Damper Closed Red On Steady Closed
7 Outlet Damper Open Green On Steady Open
8 Outlet Damper Closed Red On Steady Closed
9 Fan Run Green On Steady Fan Running
Slow Flash Air Pressure Failed
Fast Flash Air Pressure >200pA
10 Fan Stopped Red On Steady Fan Stopped
Slow Flash Overload Relay Tripped
9 Main Power Green On Steady Main Power Available
Slow Flash By-Pass in Operation
10 Purge Timing Red On Steady Purge Timing Complete
Slow Flash Purging
11 Fire / Smoke Amber On Steady Alarm
Slow Flash Open Circuit
12 Common Alarm Red On Steady Common Fault
13 CH4 Gas #1 (Low LEL %) Amber On Steady Low% LEL Detected
Slow Flash Low Calibration
Fast Flash Open Circuit
14 CH4 Gas #1 (High LEL %) Amber On Steady High% LEL Detected
Amber Fast Flash Short Circuit
15 CH4 Gas #2 (Low LEL %) Amber On Steady Low% LEL Detected
16 CH4 Gas #2 (High LEL %) Amber On Steady High% LEL Detected
Amber Fast Flash Short Circuit
17 H2S Gas (Low PPM) Amber On Steady Low PPM Detected
18 H2S Gas (Low PPM) Amber On Steady High PPM Detected
Fast Flash Short Circuit
Also viewable is the PLC Data Access Transfer Display. This item is used to display the PLC
Operational Status items such as Gas Channels as a Percentage of CH4 Gas, or when fitted PPM
of H2S Gas, this is mode suitable for calibration or testing a Detector.
The DAT also can be used to input the timing range for both the Purge Time and Purge Loss Time
before shutdown, for setting High and Low Gas LEL Set Points and for Changing the Interface
Relay Philosophy.
Normal Relay Philosophy is Fail Safe, so that an Alarm condition will de-energise the relevant
interface relay.
The Data Access Transfer Display can also be used to see any fault error codes that are generated
by the PLC and can be used to take preventative actions if applicable.
To monitor or edit the DAT

1. Press the INT key or BIT to enter the desired mode. The element number flashes (if not
protected) Channel 0,1 and 3 are protected as Gas #1,#2 and Gas #3 percentage Gas
and Channel 2 is protected as Fire Smoke indication.
2. Use the up/down key to scroll through the list of elements.
3. Press ENTER to select the element you want to edit. The element number becomes
steady and the data flashes if it is not protected (Channels 3 and 4) Purge time and
purge delay time. (Note if the element is protected the enter key is ignored).
Aberdeenshire
4. Use the up/down key to change the data. Bit values toggle between ‘ON’ and ‘Off’.
Integer values increment or decrement. Holding down the up/down key causes the
integer value to increment or decrement quickly. (Note if the data is protected or
undefined pressing the up/down key scrolls to the next element in the list.
5. Press ENTER to accept new data. Press ESC or INT/BIT to discard the new data.
6. The function keys F1 and F2 correspond to bits and can be used throughout the control
programme as desired. They have no effect on Bit or Integer monitoring.
The DAT receives power when it is plugged into the controller, pre-installed. Upon power up, the
DAT performs a self-test.
If the test fails, the DAT displays an error code. All indication lights are deactivated and the DAT
does not respond to any essential presses.
After a successful, self-test the DAT reads the DAT function file to determine its configuration.
Following a successful power up sequence, the DAT enters the monitoring mode.
The modifications are performed using the DAT (Data Access Terminal) mounted on the front of the
PLC Module.
Using the Front Keys (Esc) and (Ok) the various Channels can be accessed, use the (Scroll Key) to
advance or detract numbers
The following Table is to assist in altering the Accessible Parameters.
Channel Description and Function

0 HC Gas Channel No 1 (CH4)(Read Only) Gas Percentage
1 HC Gas Channel No 2(CH4)(Read Only) Gas Percentage
2 Fire/Smoke Channel (Read Only)
3 H2S Gas Channel (Read Only) Gas PPM
4 Enter Purge Time Period (In Seconds)
5 Enter Air Failed Pre-Audible Alarm Time Period (In Seconds)
6 Enter Air Failed Delay Time Period (In Seconds)
7 Enter UPS Delay Time Period (In Seconds)
8 Set HC Gas Channel # 1 Low LEL Set Point (5..40%)
9 Set HC Gas Channel #1 High LEL Set Point (10..60%)
10 Set H2S Gas Channel Low PPM Set Point (5..20PPM)
11 Set H2S Gas Channel High PPM Set Point (10..25PPM)
12 HC Gas Channel No 3(CH4)(Read Only) Gas Percentage
13 Change Gas Reset Philosophy
14 Short Test Purge Time (In Seconds)
15 Set HC Gas Channel #2 Low LEL Set Point (5..40%)
19..47 Not Used Audible Alarms Enter code 222 for LOP or 223 for No LOP Audible Alarm
Error conditions
The DAT checks for controller faults every 10 seconds. When the DAT detects a controller fault, the
display shows FL in the element number field and the value of the controller major fault word (S2:6)
is displayed in the value field.
When the DAT detects an error in its own operation, it displays the error screen this consists of Err
01 and a two-digit code.

Aberdeenshire
The DAT can experience two types of error internal errors and communication errors.
Internal errors are non-recoverable, when the DAT experiences an internal error it displays
The error screen and the tool will not respond to any key presses.
Remove and re-install the DAT, if this does not clear the error the DAT must be replaced. If the DAT
experiences a communication error, the error message screen displays. During these error
conditions, the tool will respond to the up/down key the BIT and Integer key and the ESC key.
Pressing any of these keys clears the error message. Any on-going element modifications are
discarded.
Error Description Caused By Recommended Action

Code
00 Interface Time Out Communications traffic Add SVC instructions to ladder
program
01-02 Power up test failure Internal Failure Remove and re-insert DAT if
failure persists replace the unit
03-07 Internal error Internal failure Remove and re-insert DAT if
08 Processor owned Another device has ownership Release ownership by the
of the controller other device
09 Access denied Cannot access that file because Release file ownership by the
another device has ownership other device
31-34 Internal error Internal failure Remove and re-insert DAT if
Understanding the Controller LED status the controller status LEDs provide a mechanism to
determine the current status of the controller if a program device is not present or available.
LED Colour Indicates

Power Off No input Power
Green Power On
Run Off Controller is not in the Run Mode or Rem Run
Green Controller is in Run mode or Rem Run
Green Flashing System is not in Run mode, Memory Module transfer in progress
Fault Off No fault detected
Red Flashing Faulted user program
Red Processor hardware fault or critical fault
Force Off No forces installed
Amber Forces installed
Battery Low Off Battery OK
Red Battery needs replacement
COMM 0 Off Flashes when communications are active
Green
DCOMM Off User configured communications Mode 15 active
Green Default communications Mode 15 active
Inputs Off Input is not energised
Amber Input is energised (Logic Status)
Outputs Off Output is not energised
Amber Output is energised (Logic Status)

Aberdeenshire
When an Error exists in the PLC
If the LEDs Indicate The following Error Probable Cause Recommended Action
Exists
All LEDs off No input power or power No Line power Verify proper line voltage
supply error Power supply overloaded and connections to
controller
Power supply overloaded This problem can occur
intermittently if power
supply is overloaded
when output loading and
temperature varies.
Power and Fault Hardware faulted Processor hardware error Cycle power by reset
LEDs on solid switch; contact your local
PLC rep.
Loose wiring Verify connections to the
controller
Power LED on and Application Fault Hardware/software major 1 Monitor Status file word
Fault LED Flashing fault detected S:6 for major error code,
ref manual for more info
2 Remove hardware
/software condition
causing fault
3 Clear major error halted
flag, BIT S2:1/13
4 Attempt a controller
Run mode entry if
unsuccessful repeat
recommended action
steps above or contact
PLC rep
The Gas detection calibration contained within the PLC programme should not require further
calibration, as the software is not subject to calibration drift.
Check the signal by applying the following

No Gas 25% Gas 50% Gas
DVM Reading 4.0mA 8mA 12mA
Gas Reading 0% 25% 50%
Any error will be detected in the calibration from the Gas detection head, apply calibration to Gas
detection head Zero and Span Adjustments.
The Fire and Smoke Detection requires no calibration except regular smoke tests and manual call
point tests.
The airflow switch and air pressure switches are pre-set, external calibration against a Dead Weight
tester is recommended annually.
The Fan contactor overload has been set in automatic mode and should not require further
maintenance.
Manual Compiled By….
Richard Cowling PDC Systems Ltd.

Aberdeenshire
Cause and Effect Chart
VISUALLY DISPLAYED
Output
VOLT FREE SIGNALS
Alarm
ACTIONS
VSD Module Cause & Effect Matrix LED INDICATION LIGHTS VIA INTERFACE RELAYS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
110V-240Vac Emergency Supply Available
Fire/Smoke or MCP Detected-Activated
HC Gas #1 Low Calibration Slow Flash
Non Ex Power Fail Relay R6 Energised

Fire/Smoke or MCP Fault Slow Flash
H2S Gas Low Calibration Slow Flash

HC Gas #1 Open Circuit Fast Flash
Safe Power Contactor De-Energised
UPS Interface Relay R8 Energised

HC Gas #1 Over Range Fast Flash
High Gas LEL Relay R2 Energised
High H2S ppm Relay R4 Energised
Common Fault Relay R7 Energised

H2S Gas Open Circuit Fast Flash
Safe Power Contactor Energised
Low Gas LEL Relay R1 Energised
Low H2S ppm Relay R3 Energised

3 Phase CPFG Supply Available
Fire/Smoke Relay R5 Energised

H2S Gas Over Range Fast Flash
Fan Contactor De-Energised

Cabin Purging (Flashing)
Fan Contactor Energised

Cabin Purged (Steady)
Main Power (Flashing)
Outlet Damper Closed
Inlet Damper Closed
Damper De-Energised
Outlet Damper Open
HC Gas #1 High LEL
HC Gas #2 High LEL
HC Gas #3 High LEL

Inlet Damper Open
HC Gas #1 Low LEL
HC Gas #2 Low LEL
HC Gas #3 Low LEL
Damper Energised
H2S Gas High ppm
H2S Gas Low ppm
Audible Alarm
Air Pressure
Fan Stopped
Main Power
OUTPUTS
Air Flow
Fan Run
INPUT
1 CPFG 3Phase Supply Available x x x
2 110-240Vac Emergency Supply Available x x x
3 Panel Power Switch On x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
4 Rotate Fan Start x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
5 Air Flow Operational x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
6 Aire Pressure Operational x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
7 Cabin Purge Period Starts x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
8 Cabin Purge Period Ends x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
9 Rotare Safe Power On x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
10
11 Stut Down Events Fan Stop or Loss of Pressure
12 Rotate Fan Stop x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
13 3Phase CPFG Power Not Available (Sudden Lose) x x x x x x x x x x x x
14 Overload Relay Tripped x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
15 LOP less than 10 seconds x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
16 LOP Greater than 10 seconds x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
17 LOP Greater thant 30 seconds x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
18 Flow Pressure Greater than 200pa x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
19 UPS Delay Period > 299 Seconds (Variable) x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
20 Stut Down Events Fire Alarm

21 System Operational Normally (Note Value on DAT (70..80) x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
22 MCP Operated (Note Value on DAT (180..270) x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
23 Fire/Smoke Detected (Note Value on DAT (160..260) x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
24 Fire/Smoke Fault x x x x x x x x x x x x x
25
26 Stut Down Events Hydrocarbon Gas Detected
27 System Operating Normally x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
28 HC Gas Detector #1 Low LEL Detected x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
29 HC Gas Detector #1 High LEL Detected x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
30 HC Gas Detector #1 Open Circuit x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
31 HC Gas Detector #1 Low Calibration x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
32 HC Gas Detector #1 Over Range x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
33
41
49
50 Stut Down Events Toxic Gas Detected
52 H2S Gas Detector Low ppm Detected x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
53 H2S Gas Detector High ppm Detected x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
54 H2S Gas Detector Open Circuit x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
55 HC Gas Detector Low Calibration x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
56 HC Gas Detector Over Range x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
57
58 Stut Down Events Emergency Stop Operated
60 Emergency Stop Operated x x x x x x x x x x x x x
61 Purge Bypass Switch in Position 1 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
62 Purge Bypass Switch in Position 2 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
63 Power Bypass Switch in Postion 1 x x x x
17. AUDIBLE & VISUAL ALARM
18. CH4 GAS DETECTOR(IN AIR INLET)
19. CH4 GAS DETECTOR(IN MAIN ROOM, OPTIONAL)
20. CH4 GAS DETECTOR(IN AIRLOCK)
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Certificate No.: IECEx FMG 07.0006X Issue No: 13

Issue No. 13 (2013-11-06)
Issue No. 11 (2012-03-13)
Date of Issue: 2013-11-06 Issue No. 10 (2012-02-02)
Issue No. 9 (2012-01-09)
Applicant: Mine Safety Appliances Issue No. 8 (2011-07-19)
1000 Cranberry Woods Drive Issue No. 7 (2010-09-14)
Cranberry Township, PA 16066 Issue No. 6 (2009-09-14)
United States of America Issue No. 5 (2009-02-27)
Issue No. 4 (2008-11-12)
Electrical Apparatus: Ultima X Series Controller, Ultima XE Sensor, Ultima XI Sensor, Ultima XIR Issue No. 3 (2008-07-21)
Sensor Issue No. 2 (2007-10-18)
Optional accessory: Refer to Equipment section of this certificate. Issue No. 1 (2007-10-15)
Issue No. 0 (2007-10-05)
Type of Protection: Construction, Test and Marking of type of protection "d", "n", "ia" and "[ib]"
Marking: Refer to annex.
Approved for issue on behalf of the IECEx J.E.Marquedant

Certification Body:
Position: Group Manager, Electrical
Signature:
Date:


FM Approvals LLC
1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike
Norwood, MA 02062
United States of America
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Certificate No: IECEx FMG 07.0006X Issue No: 13
Manufacturer: Mine Safety Appliances

1000 Cranberry Woods Drive
Cranberry Township, PA 16066
location(s):
STANDARDS:

Edition:5
Edition: 5
Edition:5
IEC 60079-15 : 2005-03 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres Part 15: Construction, test and Marking of Type of
Edition:3 Protection "n" electrical apparatus
IEC 60079-29-1 : 2007 Explosive Atmospheres - Part 29-1: Gas Detectors - Performance requirements of detectors for
Edition:1 flammable gases

Test Report:
US/FMG/ExTR07.0004/00 US/FMG/ExTR07.0011/00 US/FMG/ExTR08.0007/00

US/FMG/ExTR08.0009/12 US/FMG/ExTR08.0009/13
FR/INE/QAR08.0011/03
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Schedule
EQUIPMENT:
Controllers: Ultima XL, Ultima XE Main
Sensors: Ultima XE Sensor, Ultima XI Sensor, Ultima XIR Sensor
Accessories: Ultima Calibrator, Ultima Controller, Ultima XE Sensor Weather/Wind/Sensor Guard P/N 10028904, Ultima XI and Ultima
XIR Environmental Guard P/N 10041265, Ultima X Power Supply, HART Module

1) Upon installation of the Ultima XL Control Unit, the label shall be permanently marked to show the type of explosion protection
used for the installation. 2) The Ultima X Control Unit complies with IEC 61779-1 and IEC 61779-4 when connected to a Detector
Head that also has been evaluated to IEC 61779-1 and IEC 61779-4. 3) The Ultima XE Sensor, Ultima XI Sensor, and Ultima XIR
Sensor complies with IEC 61779-1 and IEC 61779-4 when connected to a Control Unit that also has been evaluated to IEC 61779-1
and IEC 61779-4. 4) The Ultima XI Sensor and Ultima XIR Sensor comply with IEC 60079-29-1 when connected to a Control Unit that
also has been evaluated to IEC 60079-29-1. 5) The Ultima XI Sensor shall be connected directly to a junction box or instrument
suitable for the area of installation to provide protection for the flying leads. 6) The Ultima XE Sensor and the Ultima XIR Sensor shall
be connected directly to an Ultima X Series Control Unit or remote junction box.
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity

change to new relay part since old one was disconitnued and firmware update.
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Additional information:
Annex: IECEx FMG 07.0006X provides marking information.
Annex:
IECEx FMG 07.0006X Annex.pdf

FM Approvals LLC
1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike
Norwood, MA 02062
ANNEX to IECEx FMG 07.0006X Issue No. 4
Marking
Ultima XL with XP Port:

Ex d [ib] IIC T6 Ta = -40 ˚C to +60 ˚C IP66
Ex nA [ib] IIC T6 Ta = -40 ˚C to +60 ˚C IP66
IECEx FMG 07.0006X
Ultima XL without XP Port:

Ex d IIC T6 Ta = -40 ˚C to +60 ˚C IP66
Ex nA IIC T6 Ta = -40 ˚C to +60 ˚C IP66
IECEx FMG 07.0006X
Ultima XE Main with XP Port:

Ex d [ib] IIC T4 Ta = -40 ˚C to +60 ˚C IP66
IECEx FMG 07.0006X
Ultima XE Main without XP Port:

IECEx FMG 07.0006X
Ultima XE Sensor:
IECEx FMG 07.0006X
Ultima XI Sensor:
IECEx FMG 07.0006X
Ultima XIR Sensor:

IECEx FMG 07.0006X
HART Module:
IECEx FMG 07.0006X
Ultima X Power Supply:

IECEx FMG 07.0006X
Ultima Calibrator
Ex ia IIC T3
IECEx FMG 07.0006X
Ultima Controller:
Ex ia IIC T3
IECEx FMG 07.0006X
Page 1 of 1
21. H2S GAS DETECTOR(OPTIONAL)
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Certificate No.: IECEx BAS 05.0042X Issue No: 6 Certificate history:

Issue No. 6 (2014-08-06)
Issue No. 4 (2011-04-15)
Issue No. 2 (2007-11-12)
Applicant: Crowcon Detection Instruments Ltd Issue No. 1 (2006-10-20)
172 Brook Drive
Milton Park
Abingdon
Oxfordshire
OX14 4SD
United Kingdom
Electrical Apparatus: Xgard Gas Detector

Optional accessory:
Type of Protection: Intrinsic Safety
Marking: Ex ia IIC T4 Ga (-40°C ≤ Ta ≤ +55°C)
Approved for issue on behalf of the IECEx R S Sinclair

Certification Body:
Position: General Manager
Signature:
Date:


SGS Baseefa Limited
Rockhead Business Park
Staden Lane
Buxton
Derbyshire
SK17 9RZ
United Kingdom
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Manufacturer: Crowcon Detection Instruments Ltd

172 Brook Drive
Milton Park
Abingdon
Oxfordshire
OX14 4SD
United Kingdom
location(s):
STANDARDS:

Edition:6.0
Edition:6.0

IECEx ATR: File Reference:

UK/BAS/04/0839 04/089
GB/BAS/ExTR11.0029/00 10/1013
GB/BAS/ExTR11.0097/00 11/0291
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Schedule
EQUIPMENT:
The Xgard Gas Detector is a loop-powered gas detector which can be used to detect Toxic gases or Oxygen depending upon the
circuitry and electrochemical cell used and provide a 4-20mA output signal. It comprises an electrochemical cell (and accompanying
sensor PCB) and an amplifier PCB mounted within a stainless steel or glass filled nylon enclosure.
Electrical connections to the amplifier PCB are made to a terminal block with cable access to the enclosure being provided by a
threaded entry hole. Access to the terminal block and PCB is gained by a removable threaded lid with an O-ring seal.
Toxic Detector, Terminals + and -

U = 28V C = 14.4nF
i i
P = 1.2W L = 28µH
i i
Oxygen Detector, Terminals + and -

U = 28V C = 30.2nF
i i
P = 1.2W L =0
i i
1. The apparatus has a plastic enclosure (introduced in Issue 2) that constitutes a potential electrostatic hazard. The enclosure must
be cleaned only with a damp cloth.
NOTE: This condition does not apply to the stainless steel enclosure version.
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity

Variation 6.1
This issue permits existing information (for example on Schedule Drawings) to be replaced by the revised certificate holders address.
No other changes may be made to the certified design
File Reference: 14/0639

22. FIRE DAMPER ACTUTOR
23. FIRE DAMPER LIMIT SWITCH
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Certificate No.: IECEx PTB 07.0045X Issue No: 1 Certificate history:

Issue No. 1 (2010-10-06)
Applicant: BARTEC GmbH

Max-Eyth-Straße 16
Germany
Electrical Apparatus: Limit switch type 07-25.1-..../....

Optional accessory:
Type of Protection: Flameproof enclosure "d"
Marking: Ex d IIC Gb T6, T5 resp. Ex db IIC T6, T5
Approved for issue on behalf of the IECEx Dr.-Ing. Martin Thedens

Certification Body:
Position: Head of Section "Flameproof Enclosures"
Signature:
Date:


Bundesallee 100
38116 Braunschweig
Germany
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Certificate No: IECEx PTB 07.0045X Issue No: 1
Manufacturer: BARTEC GmbH

Max-Eyth-Straße 16
Germany
location(s):
STANDARDS:

Edition:5
Edition:6

Test Report:
DE/TUN/QAR06.0017/00
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Schedule
EQUIPMENT:
The limit switch, type 07-25.1-…./…. is used as an auxiliary switch for signal and control circuits.
Encapsulated cables are used for connection.
The limit switch has to be mounted in such a way that it is protected against impact energies according to IEC
60079-0 clause 26.4.2.
The quality of the connecting cable shall satisfy the thermal and mechanical requirements within the functional
range.
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
1) The name of the manufacturer changed.
2) The standards were adapted.
3) The EPL marking was added.
4) Material name changed.
5) An additional casting resin material was added.
6) Additional cable tails were added.
7) Added design variation with lateral resp. dual connection cable.
Annex:
Annex_CoC_07-25_cor.doc
24. FIRE DAMPER JUNCTION BOX
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Certificate No.: IECEx PTB 09.0009X Issue No: 3 Certificate history:

Issue No. 3 (2013-01-17)
Issue No. 1 (2011-11-01)
Applicant: BARTEC-Varnost d.o.o.

Cesta 9 avgusta 59
1410 Zagorje ob Savi
Slovenia
Electrical Apparatus: Junction Box types 07-5103-****/**** , 07-5105-****/****, 07-5106-****/****

Optional accessory: and 07-5107-****/****
Type of Protection: Increased Safety "e", Intrinsic Safety "i", Protection by Enclosure "tb"
Marking: Ex e ia/ib IIA, IIB, IIC T6, T5 Gb

Ex ia/ib IIA, IIB, IIC T6, T5 Gb
Ex tb IIIC T80 °C, T95 °C Db
Ex ia/ib IIIC T80 °C, T95 °C Db
Approved for issue on behalf of the IECEx Dr.-Ing. Uwe Klausmeyer

Certification Body:
Position: Head of Section "Flameproof Enclosure"
Signature:
Date:


Bundesallee 100
38116 Braunschweig
Germany
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Manufacturer: BARTEC-Varnost d.o.o.

Cesta 9. avgusta 59
Slovenia
location(s):
STANDARDS:

Edition:6.0
Edition:5
IEC 60079-31 : 2008 Explosive atmospheres – Part 31: Equipment dust ignition protection by enclosure 't'
Edition:1
Edition:4

Test Report:
SI/SIQ/QAR11.0003/01
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Schedule
EQUIPMENT:
The junction box, type 07-5103-****/****, 07-5105-****/****, 07-5106-****/**** and 07-5107-****/**** is a polyester
enclosure which is designed to type of protection Increased Safety “e”.
The junction box type 07-5103-****/**** and 07-5105-****/**** is also designed to type of protection Protection by
enclosure "tb".
The junction box of type 07-5103-****/**** and type 07-5106-****/**** is equipped with terminals of type of
protection Increased Safety “e” and, optionally, terminals for intrinsically safe circuits. The latter are separated
from the terminals of type of protection Increased Safety “e” and are marked, e.g. by a light-blue colour, for clear
identification.
The junction box of type 07-5105-****/**** and type 07-5107-****/**** houses terminals for intrinsically safe circuits
only.
Connection is by means of Ex-type cable entries. The empty enclosure and all components have been tested and
certified under a separate examination certificate.
Technical data, nomenclature and notes for manufacture and operation see Annex
Conditions for safe use

For enclosures and parts of enclosures with a surface resistance >10^9 Ohm exist potential electrostatic charging
hazard. These enclosures has to be equipped with following marking:
"Warning – potential electrostatic charging hazard. Only wet cleaning. See instructions"
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
When using the silicone seal is the ingress protection is changed to IP66.
Annex:
Annex-IECEx PTB 090009X Issue 3.pdf

Attachment to Certificate
IECEx PTB 09.0009X Issue 3
Applicant: BARTEC Varnost d.o.o.

Cesta 9 avgusta 59
Slovenia
Electrical Apparatus: Junction Box Types 07-5103-****/**** , 07-5105-****/****,
07-5106-****/**** and 07-5107-****/****
The junction box, type 07-5103-****/****, 07-5105-****/****, 07-5106-****/**** and
07-5107-****/**** is a polyester enclosure which is designed to type of protection Increased
Safety “e”.
The junction box type 07-5103-****/**** and 07-5105-****/**** is also designed to type of
protection Protection by enclosure "tb".
The junction box of type 07-5103-****/**** and type 07-5106-****/**** is equipped with
terminals of type of protection Increased Safety “e” and, optionally, terminals for intrinsically
safe circuits. The latter are separated from the terminals of type of protection Increased
Safety “e” and are marked, e.g. by a light-blue colour, for clear identification.
The junction box of type 07-5105-****/**** and type 07-5107-****/**** houses terminals for
intrinsically safe circuits only.
Connection is by means of Ex-type cable entries. The empty enclosure and all components
have been tested and certified under a separate examination certificate.
Technical data
Rated voltage* up to 1100 V

Rated current* max. 500 A
Rated cross section* max. 300 mm2
*) depending on the type of terminal used
Ambient temperature,
depending on temperature class and inspection window
-20 °C to +40 °C: T6, EPDM gasket and inspection window(s)
-55 °C to +40 °C: T6, T80 °C, silicon gasket
-55 °C to +55 °C: T5, T95 °C, and for the Ex ia/ib IIC T6 Gb
version with silicon gasket
Degree of Protection acc. to IEC 60529
IP66 with EPDM gasket
IP66 with silicone gasket
Surface resistance
Housing type 07-5103-****/****: < 10^9 Ohm
Housing type 07-5105-****/****: < 10^9 Ohm
Housing type 07-5106-****/****: > 10^12 Ohm
Housing type 07-5107-****/****: > 10^12 Ohm
Inspection window: > 10^14 Ohm
Physikalisch-Technische Bundesanstalt (PTB) Page 1 of 3

Bundesallee 100, 38116 Braunschweig, Germany
Postfach 33 45, 38023 Braunschweig, Germany
Telephone +49 531 592-0, Telefax +49 531 592-3605
The ratings specified are maximum values, actual values will be subject to the electrical
equipment used from case to case. Depending on the system conditions, the manufacturer
will define the definitive ratings which will be within the range of these limiting values and will
comply with the relevant standards.
The symbols “ia” or “ib” showing the type of protection, and the symbols “IIA” or “IIB” or “IIC”
will be used if the junction box accommodates intrinsically safe circuits of equipment of cate-
gory “ia” or category “ib” and for use in groups “IIA” or “IIB” or “IIC”, and/or circuits of intrinsi-
cally safe electrical equipment of category “ia” or category “ib” and for use in groups “IIA” or
“IIB” or “IIC”.
The admissible temperature range of the installed elements must not be exceeded.
Nomenclature
07- 5 1 **- *** */** **

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1) General type number

2) Number for installation material
3) Number for junction box
4) Number for use
03: Increased Safety, Polyester enclosure type 07-5185-****/****
05: Intrinsic Safety, Polyester enclosure type 07-5185-****/****
06: Increased Safety, Polyester enclosure type 07-5184-****/****
07: Intrinsic Safety, Polyester enclosure type 07-5184-****/****
5) Number for length
min. 080 = 80 mm
max: 600 = 600 mm
6) Number for width
min. 075 = 75 mm
max. 405 = 405 mm
7) Number for height
min. 55 = 55 mm
max. 16 = 160 mm
Marking
Ex e ia/ib IIA, IIB, IIC T6, T5 Gb (Typ 07-5103-***/*** und 07-5106-***/*** )
Ex ia/ib IIA, IIB, IIC T6, T5 Gb (Typ 07-5105-***/*** und 07-5107-***/***)
Ex tb IIIC T80 °C, T95 °C Db (Typ 07-5103-***/*** und 07-5105-***/***)
Ex ia/ib IIIC T80 °C, T95 °C Db (Typ 07-5105-***/***)

Notes for manufacture and operation

Terminals for intrinsically safe circuits have to be installed in such a way that the clearance
and creepage distances between intrinsically safe and non-intrinsically safe circuits and/or
different intrinsically safe circuits and a circuit and earth as set forth in IEC 60079-11 are
met.
Conditions for safe use

For enclosures and parts of enclosures with a surface resistance >10^9 Ohm exist potential
electrostatic charging hazard. These enclosures has to be equipped with following marking:
"Warning – potential electrostatic charging hazard. Only wet cleaning. See instructions"

25. PRESSURIZATION FAN MOTOR
26. CONDENSER FAN MOTOR
5/6/13 Certificate of Conformity: IECEx CES 10.0014
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
for rules and details of the IECEx Scheme visit w w w .iecex.com
Certificate No.: IECEx CES 10.0014 issue No.:0

Status: Current
Applicant: Cemp S.r.l.

Via Piemonte, 16
I – 20030 Senago (MI)
Italy
Three-phase and single-phase asynchronous m otors supplied by m ains or inverter

Electrical Apparatus:
series AC 63, AC/AM 71, AC/AM 80, AC/AM 90, AC/AM 100
Optional accessory:
Type of Protection: Flam eproof enclosures ‘d’; increased safety "e" for term inal box; Dust ignition
Marking: Ex d I or Ex de I
Ex d IIC T6, T5, T4, T3 or Ex de IIC T6, T5, T4, T3
Ex tD A21 IP 65 T 85 °C, T 100 °C, T 135 °C, T 150 °C
Approved for issue on behalf of the IECEx Mirko Balaz

Certification Body:
Position: Head of IECEx CB
Signature:
Date:


CESI
Centro Elettrotecnico
Sperim entale Italiano S.p.A.
Via Rubattino 54
20134 Milano
Italy
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Certificate No.: IECEx CES 10.0014
Page 2 of 3
Manufacturer: Cemp S.r.l.

Via Piemonte, 16
I – 20030 Senago (MI)
Italy
Additional Manufacturing location(s):
This certificate is issued as verification that a sample(s), representative of production, w as assessed and tested and
found to comply w ith the IEC Standard list below and that the manufacturer's quality system, relating to the Ex products
covered by this certificate, w as assessed and found to comply w ith the IECEx Quality system requirements. This
certificate is granted subject to the conditions as set out in IECEx Scheme Rules, IECEx 02 and Operational Documents as
amended.
STANDARDS:
documents, w as found to comply w ith the follow ing standards:
Edition: 4.0
Edition: 6
Edition: 4
IEC 61241-0 : 2004 Electrical apparatus for use in the presence of combustible dust - Part 0: General
Edition: 1 requirements
IEC 61241-1 : 2004 Electrical apparatus for use in the presence of combustible dust - Part 1: Protection by
Edition: 1 enclosures "tD"
iecex.iec.ch/iecex/iecexweb.nsf/certificatesAjax/IECEx CES 10.0014 issue No. 0?opendocument 1/2

5/6/13 Certificate of Conformity: IECEx CES 10.0014

Test Report:
IT/CES/ExTR10.0014/00
IT/CES/QAR07.0002/03
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Certificate No.: IECEx CES 10.0014
Page 3 of 3
Schedule
EQUIPMENT:
Three-phase and single-phase asynchronous motors series AC 63, AC/AM 71, AC/AM 80, AC/AM 90, AC/AM 100
supplied by mains or by inverter. The motors are made of grey cast iron w ith separate compartments: motor enclosure
and terminal box for supply and for auxiliary circuits connection.A special solution w ithout terminal box w ith cable exit
from plate can be provided.
The motors of group I and group IIC have the type of protection Ex d w hen both motor enclosure and terminal box are in Ex
d execution. Type of protection Ex de is achieved by motor enclosure in Ex d execution and terminal box in Ex e
execution. The motors can be equipped w ith auxiliary devices (heaters, thermal detectors, etc.).
See annex for further description.
Annexe: ANNEX to IECEx CES 10_0014_00.pdf
iecex.iec.ch/iecex/iecexweb.nsf/certificatesAjax/IECEx CES 10.0014 issue No. 0?opendocument 2/2

27. EXD TELEPHONE
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Certificate No.: IECEx BVS 11.0033 Issue No: 0 Certificate history:

Issue No. 1 (2013-04-09)
Applicant: FHF Funke + Huster Fernsig GmbH

Gewerbeallee 15-19
45478 Mülheim a. d. Ruhr
Germany
Electrical Apparatus: Ruggedized ExII telephone

Optional accessory:
Type of Protection: Equipment protection by intrinsic safety "i", Construction, test and marking of type of protection
encapsulation 'm' electrical apparatus, Equipment protection by increased safety "e", Protection by
enclosures "tD", Protection by intrinsic safety 'iD'
Marking: Ex emb [ib] IIC T6/T5

Ex tD [ibD] A21 IP66 T80°C/T100°C
Approved for issue on behalf of the IECEx H.-Ch. Simanski

Certification Body:
Position: Head of Certification Body
Signature:
Date:


DEKRA EXAM GmbH
Dinnendahlstrasse 9
44809 Bochum
Germany
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Certificate No: IECEx BVS 11.0033 Issue No: 0
Manufacturer: FHF Funke + Huster Fernsig GmbH

Gewerbeallee 15-19
45478 Mülheim a. d. Ruhr
Germany
location(s):
STANDARDS:
Edition:4.0
Edition:5
IEC 60079-18 : 2004 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres - Part 18: Construction, test and marking of type of
Edition:2.0 protection encapsulation 'm' electrical apparatus
Edition:4
Edition:1
Edition:1
IEC 61241-11 : 2005 Electrical apparatus for use in the presence of combustible dusts - Part 11: Protection by intrinsic safety
Edition:1 'iD'

Test Report:
DE/BVS/ExTR11.0058/00
DE/BVS/QAR07.0004/03
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Schedule
EQUIPMENT:
Description
The Ruggedized ExII telephone type ExResistTel is suitable for use in areas endangered by an explosive
atmosphere. The vertical mounting is permitted.
The handset, the keyboard and the display are designed in type of protection intrinsic safety “i”.
The electrical connection of the Ruggedized ExII telephone type ExResistTel is realised by terminals in type of
protection increased safety “e”.
The ambient temperature range is -25 °C up to +40 °C respectively +60 °C. Depending on the upper ambient
temperature the temperature class and the surface temperature will change.
A breathing and draining device is part of the Ruggedized ExII telephone type ExResistTel.
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
EQUIPMENT (continued):
Parameters
Non intrinsically safe circuits

Phone line (Terminal La / Lb No.: 13 - 14)
Maximum voltage (calling) Um (calling) AC 90 V
Permitted frequency range 16 up to 54 Hz
or
or
Maximum rated voltage Um (supply voltage) DC 66 V
Maximum rated current 100 mA
or
Maximum rated voltage Um (supply voltage) DC 56.5 V
Maximum rated current 110 mA
Maximum short circuit current IK 35 A
Additional external alarm: only for connection to passive load (Terminal W1 / W No.: 15 - 16)
or
or
Maximum rated voltage Um (supply voltage) DC 66 V
or
Maximum rated voltage Um (supply voltage) DC 56.5 V

IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Intrinsically safe circuits
Headset (Microphone) (Terminal KGM No.: 5 - 6)
Maximum output voltage Uo 17 V
Maximum output current Io 90 mA
Maximum output power Po 80 mW
Maximum external capacitance Co 375 nF
Maximum external inductance Lo 1.2 mH
Headset (Speaker) (Terminal KGH No.: 7 - 8)
Headset (Signalling) (Terminal KGS No.: 9 - 10)
Maximum external inductance Lo 100 mH
External speaker (Terminal LSP No.: 11 - 12)
Maximum output voltage Uo 6.6 V
Maximum external capacitance Co 22 µF

IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Ambient temperature range
Temperature class T6 -25 °C up to +40 °C
Temperature class T5 -25 °C up to +60 °C

28. ISOLATOR PANEL
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Certificate No.: IECEx INE 13.0065X Issue No: 0 Certificate history:

Issue No. 0 (2013-09-19)
Status: Current Page 1 of 4
Applicant: COELBO S.r.l.

Via S. Margherita, 83
I - 20861 Brugherio (MB)
Italy
Electrical Apparatus: ENCLOSURES TYPE CCF/CCV

Optional accessory:
Type of Protection: d, d [ia], tb, tb[ia]
Marking:
Ex d IIB T.. Gb
Ex d IIB + H2 T.. Gb
Ex d [ia Ga] IIB T.. Gb
Ex d [ia Ga] IIB + H2 T.. Gb
Ex tb IIIC T.. Db IP66 or IP65
Ex tb [ia Da] IIIC T.. Db IP66 or IP65
Approved for issue on behalf of the IECEx Dominique CHARPENTIER

Certification Body:
Position: Certification Division Manager
Signature:
Date:


IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Certificate No: IECEx INE 13.0065X Issue No: 0
INERIS
Institut National de l'Environnement Industriel
et des Risques
BP n2
Parc Technologique ALATA
F-60550 Verneuil-En-Halatte
France
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Manufacturer: COELBO S.r.l.

Via S. Margherita, 83
I - 20861 Brugherio (MB)
Italy
location(s):
STANDARDS:

Edition:6.0
Edition:6
Edition:6.0
IEC 60079-31 : 2008 Explosive atmospheres – Part 31: Equipment dust ignition protection by enclosure 't'
Edition:1

Test Report:
FR/INE/ExTR13.0065/00
IT/CES/QAR10.0009/03
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Schedule
EQUIPMENT:
Range of flameproof enclosures made in Aluminum light alloy.

These enclosures are intended to contain mainly electrical and/or electronical "NIS" components, they can also contain "IS" elements
covered by a separated IECEx certificate.
These enclosures can be fitted with the accessories (button, drain valve, bulkheads...) and/or window specified in manufacturer's
descriptive documentation.
The versions containing intrinsic safety associated apparatus could be equipped with an internal thermal probe.
These enclosures get the degree of protection IP66 or IP65 in accordance with IEC 60529.

The gap and diametrical clearences are less than the values specified in the tables of IEC 60079-1 standard.
- The width of the flameproof joints is superior to the value specified in the IEC 60079-1 standard.
Annex:
IECEx INE 13.0065X_Annex.pdf

IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Certificate No.: IECEx INE 13.0065X
Page 1 of 6
Annexe: IECEx INE 13.0065X_Annex.pdf
PARAMETERS RELATING TO THE SAFETY

For enclosure without intrinsic safety element:
This version is intended to use in range of ambient temperatures from:
-20°C to +40°C or +50°C or +60°C (all type of enclosures)
-50°C to +40°C or +50°C or +60°C.(enclosures from CCF0 to CCF12B)
Maximum supply voltage : 1000 Vac or Vdc

Maximum dissipated powers are defined in the Table 1.
For enclosure with intrinsic safety element:

This version is intended to use in range of ambient temperatures from:
-20°C to +40°C or +50°C or +60°C.
Maximum supply voltage for Non ‘IS’ elements : 1000 Vac or Vdc
Maximum supply voltage for “IS” elements : 250 V
Maximum dissipated powers are defined in the Table 2, for enclosures without thermal probes.
Maximum dissipated powers are defined in the Table 1, for enclosures with thermal probes.
The maximum threshold of thermal probe shall be:
(maximum barrier’s temperature -5°C)±5°C
MARKING
Marking has to be readable and indelible; it has to include the following indications:
A – Enclosures CCF0 to CCF12B without intrinsic safety element:
 COELBO
 I-20861 Brugherio (MI)
 CCF…(*)
 IECEx INE 13.0065X
 (Serial number)
 Ex d IIB or IIB+H2 T6, or T5 or T4 or T3 Gb
 Ex tb IIIC T85°C or T100°C or T135°C or T200°C Db IP65 or IP66
 …°C < Tamb < …°C (**)
 T.Cable : (***)
 WARNINGS:
 DO NOT OPEN IF AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE MAY BE PRESENT
(*) Type is completed by numbers or number and letters corresponding to size of the
enclosure (see table).
(**) See parameters relating to the safety.
(***) See Table.
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Page 2 of 6
B – Enclosures CCF16 without intrinsic safety element:
 COELBO
 CCF…(*)
 (Serial number)
 Ex d IIB T6, or T5 or T4 or T3 Gb (**)
 Ex tb IIIC T85°C or T100°C or T135°C or T200°C Db IP65 or IP66
 …°C < Tamb < …°C (**)
 T.Cable : (***)
 WARNINGS:
(***) See Table.
C - Enclosures CCF0 to CCF12B with intrinsic safety element:
 COELBO
 CCF…(*)
 (Serial number)
 Ex d[ia Ga] IIB or IIB+H2 T6, or T5 or T4 or T3 Gb
 Ex tb[ia Da] IIIC T85°C or T100°C or T135°C or T200°C Db IP65 or IP66
 …°C < Tamb < …°C (**)
 T.Cable : (***)
 WARNINGS:
(***) See Table.
D – Enclosures CCF16 with intrinsic safety element:
 COELBO
 CCF…(*)
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Page 3 of 6
 (Serial number)
 Ex d[ia Ga] IIB T6, or T5 or T4 or T3 Gb
 Ex tb[ia Da] IIIC T85°C or T100°C or T135°C or T200°C Db IP65 or IP66
 …°C < Tamb < …°C (**)
 T.Cable : (***)
 WARNINGS:
(***) See Table.
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Page 4 of 6
Table 1: Enclosure without intrinsic safety element
T6 for ambient: T5 for ambient: T4 for ambient: T3 for ambient:

40°C 50°C 60°C 40°C 50°C 60°C 40°C 50°C 60°C 40°C 50°C 60°C
P[W] P[W] P[W] P[W] P[W] P[W] P[W] P[W] P[W] P[W] P[W] P[W]
CCF0 23 17 10 33 27 20 57 50 43 90 83 77
CCF1 31 22 13 44 35 26 75 66 57 119 110 101
CCF1A 35 25 15 50 40 30 86 76 66 136 126 116
CCF2 57 41 24 82 65 49 139 122 106 220 204 188
CCF3 70 50 30 100 80 60 170 150 130 270 250 230
CCF3A 91 65 39 130 104 78 221 195 169 351 325 299
CCF4 51 37 18 74 55 42 125 111 92 199 139 129
CCF4A 66 48 24 96 72 54 161 143 120 257 179 167
CCF5 81 59 30 118 89 66 199 177 148 318 222 207
CCF5A 99 72 36 144 108 81 243 216 180 387 270 252
CCF6 90 66 33 131 99 74 222 197 164 353 246 230
CCF6A 110 80 40 160 120 90 269 239 199 429 299 279
CCF7 112 82 41 164 123 92 276 245 205 440 307 286
CCF7A 136 99 49 198 148 111 334 297 247 532 371 346
CCF8 110 80 40 160 120 90 270 240 200 430 300 280
CCF8A 146 105 64 210 169 129 351 310 269 555 514 473
CCF9 139 100 61 201 162 123 335 296 257 530 491 452
CCF9A 169 121 74 243 196 148 405 358 310 641 594 547
CCF10 167 120 73 240 194 147 401 354 307 634 588 541
CCF10A 200 144 88 288 232 176 480 424 368 760 704 648
CCF10B 233 168 103 335 270 205 559 494 429 885 820 755
CCF11 220 159 97 317 256 194 529 467 405 837 775 714
CCF11A 256 184 113 368 297 225 614 542 471 972 900 829
CCF11B 291 210 128 419 338 256 699 618 536 1107 1025 944
CCF12 250 180 110 360 290 220 600 530 460 950 880 810
CCF12A 289 208 127 416 335 254 694 613 532 1099 1018 937
CCF12B 328 236 144 473 381 289 788 696 604 1247 1156 1064
CCF13 72 52 32 103 83 63 172 152 132 273 253 233
CCF14 111 80 49 160 129 98 267 236 205 422 391 360
CCF16 402 290 177 579 467 354 965 853 740 1528 1416 1303
CCF16A 461 332 203 664 535 406 1107 978 849 1753 1624 1495
CCF16B 521 375 229 750 604 458 1249 1103 958 1978 1832 1686
CCF20 142 103 63 205 165 125 342 302 262 541 501 462
CCF20A 194 140 86 280 226 171 467 412 358 739 685 630
CCF20B 257 185 113 370 298 226 616 545 473 976 904 832
T.CABLE 80°C 95°C 130°C 175°C
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Page 5 of 6
Table 2: Enclosure with intrinsic safety element
Ambient temperure of the enclosure:

40°C 50°C 60°C
Maximum ambient Maximum ambient Maximum ambient
temperature of IS barriers : temperature of IS barriers : temperature of IS barriers :
60°C 70°C 80°C 60°C 70°C 80°C 60°C 70°C 80°C
P[W] P[W] P[W] P[W] P[W] P[W] P[W] P[W] P[W]
CCF0 7 10 17 - 7 10 - - 7
CCF1 9 13 22 - 9 13 - - 9
CCF1A 10 15 25 - 10 15 - - 10
CCF2 16 24 41 - 16 24 - - 16
CCF3 20 30 50 - 20 30 - - 20
CCF3A 26 39 65 - 26 39 - - 26
CCF4 14 28 42 - 14 28 - - 14
CCF4A 18 36 54 - 18 36 - - 18
CCF5 22 44 66 - 22 44 - - 22
CCF5A 27 54 81 - 27 54 - - 27
CCF6 25 49 74 - 25 49 - - 25
CCF6A 30 60 90 - 30 60 - - 30
CCF7 31 61 92 - 31 61 - - 31
CCF7A 37 74 111 - 37 74 - - 37
CCF8 30 60 90 - 30 60 - - 30
CCF8A 47 82 111 - 47 82 - - 47
CCF9 45 78 106 - 45 78 - - 45
CCF9A 54 94 128 - 54 94 - - 54
CCF10 53 93 127 - 53 93 - - 53
CCF10A 64 112 152 - 64 112 - - 64
CCF10B 75 130 177 - 75 130 - - 75
CCF11 70 123 167 - 70 123 - - 70
CCF11A 82 143 194 - 82 143 - - 82
CCF11B 93 163 221 - 93 163 - - 93
CCF12 80 140 190 - 80 140 - - 80
CCF12A 93 162 220 - 93 162 - - 93
CCF12B 105 184 249 - 105 184 - - 105
CCF13 23 40 55 - 23 40 - - 23
CCF14 36 62 84 - 36 62 - - 36
CCF16 129 225 306 - 129 225 - - 129
CCF16A 148 258 351 - 148 258 - - 148
CCF16B 167 291 396 - 167 291 - - 167
CCF20 46 80 108 - 46 80 - - 46
CCF20A 62 109 148 - 62 109 - - 62
CCF20B 82 144 195 - 82 144 - - 82
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Page 6 of 6
ROUTINE EXAMINATIONS AND TESTS
3 3
Enclosures from 800cm to 4700cm :
In accordance with clause 16.1 of the IEC 60079-1 standard, an overpressure test of a period
comprised between 10 and 60 seconds under:
 10.2bar for -20°C.
 13.35bar for -50°C.
3 3
 11.55bar for -20°C.
 14.55bar for -50°C..
3 3
 13.65bar for -20°C.
 16.65bar for -50°C.
3 3
 15.6bar for -20°C.
29. CPFG BATTERY
30. CABLE GLAND
2014-04-30
31. CABLE GLAND
32. CABLE GLAND
CERTIFICATION
4 Equipment: Ranges of Cable Glands Types A2F, A2E, A2FRC, A4ERC, A2F-FC, SS2K,
C**, E** and PX**
5 Applicant: CMP Products Limited
6 Address: Glasshouse Street
St Peters
Newcastle upon Tyne
NE6 1BS
UK
7 This equipment and any acceptable variation thereto is specified in the schedule to this
certificate and the documents therein referred to.
8 Sira Certification Service, notified body number 0518 in accordance with Article 9 of Directive
94/9/EC of 23 March 1994, certifies that this equipment has been found to comply with the
Essential Health and Safety Requirements relating to the design and construction of
equipment intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres given in Annex II to the
Directive.
The examination and test results are recorded in the confidential reports listed in Section
14.2.
9 Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements, with the exception of those
listed in the schedule to this certificate, has been assured by compliance with the following
documents:
EN 60079-0:2006 EN 60079-7:2007 EN 61241-1:2004
EN 60079-1:2007 IEC 61241-0:2004
10 If the sign ‘X’ is placed after the certificate number, it indicates that the equipment is subject
to special conditions for safe use specified in the schedule to this certificate.
11 This EC type-examination certificate relates only to the design and construction of the
specified equipment. If applicable, further requirements of this Directive apply to the
manufacture and supply of this equipment.
II 2 GD or I M2
Ex d IIC/Ex e II Ex d I/Ex e I
Note: The manufacturer may
Ex d IIC choose to include additional
Ex d I
Ex e II compliance marking Ex e I
Ex tD A21 IP66
(Refer to certificate for the markings that are applicable to each gland type)
Project Number 23739 D R Stubbings BA MIET

C. Index 07 Certification Manager
Tel: +44 (0) 1244 670900
Fax: +44 (0) 1244 681330
Page 1 of 16 Email: info@siracertification.com
Form 9400 Issue 0 Web: www.siracertification.com
CERTIFICATION
SCHEDULE

Issue 13
General
The ranges of cable glands are metallic and intended to terminate circular armoured,
unarmoured and braided cables (as defined by their type designations) into a threaded entry
point within associated flameproof, increased safety or dust tight enclosures (as defined by
their coding). Without compromising the explosion protection provided by the enclosures in
accordance with relevant codes of practice.
Design options
• The front entry component may be manufactured with a profiled groove to captivate an
‘O’ ring seal which locates on the mating face with the associated enclosure. This option
having the gland type designation prefixed with the letter R, e.g. 25RE1FW.
• Alternative materials of manufacture:
Brass to BS2874:1986 Grade CuZn39Pb (CW614N)
Mild steel to BS970 Pt1:1991 Grade 220M07Pb
Stainless steel to BS970 Pt1:1991 Grades 316S11, 316S13, 316S31 or 316S33
Aluminium alloy to BS1474:1987 Grade 6082 or BS1490 Grade LM25 TF (Not Group I)
• Alternative entry component thread forms:
Metric ISO 965-1, ISO965-3 medium fit (6g) for external threads
ET(Conduit) BS 31:1940 (1979), Table A
PG DIN 40430:1971
BSPP BS 2779:1973 class A full form for external threads
BSPTBS 21:1985 standard threads only as clause 5.4, gauging to clause 5.2 system A
ISOISO 7/1:1982, gauging to ISO 7/2 clause 6.3 for external threads
NPTANSI/ASME B1.20.1-1983 gauging to clause 8.1 for external threads
NPSMANSI/ASME B1.20.1-1983 gauging to clause 9 for external threads
The E-Type range of cable gland entry threads are to maintain compliance with the
requirements of EN 60079-1:2004 Clause 5.3 Tables 3 and 4 and clause C.2.2 as
applicable.
• The option to manufacture glands with entry threads that are one size up from the
nominal quoted gland size.

This certificate and its schedules may only be Rake Lane, Eccleston, Chester, CH4 9JN, England
reproduced in its entirety and without change. Tel: +44 (0) 1244 670900
Fax: +44 (0) 1244 681330
Page 2 of 16 Web: www.siracertification.com
Form 9400 Issue 0
CERTIFICATION
SCHEDULE

Issue 13
i) Elastomeric sealed Cable Glands Ranges for braided or unarmoured cables

Type designation A2F Range
Coded: II 2 GD or I M2
Ex d IIC Ex d I
Ex e II Ex e I
Ex tD A21 IP66
The A2F range of cable glands are intended to terminate circular braided or unarmoured
cables into enclosures without compromising the explosion protection provided by the
enclosures in accordance with relevant codes of practice. They consist of a male-threaded
front entry component and a seal actuation nut. The front entry component fitted with an
elastomeric displacement sealing ring, and nylon 6 stepped skid washer, is intended to screw
into an entry point of its associated enclosure. The seal actuation nut threads into the front
entry component thereby effecting flameproof and environmental sealing onto the cable outer
sheath.
Type designation A2E Range
The A2E range of cable glands are identical to the A2F range but with entry thread
engagement lengths minimised
Coded: II 2 GD
Ex e II
Ex tD A21 IP66
Additional Specific Design options
• Alternative material of manufacture of the skid washer to be the same as the gland
material.
Type designation A2FRC Range
Coded: II 2 GD
Ex d IIC/Ex e II
Ex d IIC
Ex e II
Ex tD A21 IP66
The A2FRC range of cable glands are intended to terminate circular braided or unarmoured
enclosures in accordance with relevant codes of practice. They consist of a male-threaded
front entry component, a seal actuation nut and either an outer captivated or running
coupling. The front entry component, fitted with an elastomeric displacement sealing ring
and a carbon steel `C’ clip or pressed-over section, is intended to screw into an entry point of
its associated enclosure. The seal actuation nut threads into the front entry component
thereby effecting flameproof and environmental sealing onto the cable outer sheath. The
Fax: +44 (0) 1244 681330
Form 9400 Issue 0
CERTIFICATION
SCHEDULE

Issue 13
outer running coupling is retained in the seal actuation nut using the carbon steel ‘C’ clip to
allow free running thread connection to conduit.
• Alternative material of manufacture of the skid washer to be the same as the gland
material.
• Alternative ‘C’ clip plate finish: Stainless steel
Phosphor bronze
Beryllium copper
Type designation A4ERC Range
Coded: II 2 GD
Ex e II
Ex tD A21 IP66
The A4ERC range of cable glands are intended to terminate tape armour cables into
enclosures without compromising the explosion protection provided by the enclosures in
accordance with relevant codes of practice. They consist of a male-threaded front entry
component, a front seal, a main body component, a rear seal, an actuating nut and a rear
running coupling. The front entry component is intended to screw into an entry point of its
associated enclosure. The seals are compressed onto the cable when the body component
and actuating nut are tightened. A continuity diaphragm and skid washer are fitted behind
the front seal. The outer running coupling is retained in the seal actuation nut using the
carbon steel ‘C’ clip to allow free running thread connection to conduit.
Cable clamping is achieved with the outer seal arrangement compressed onto the outer
sheath of the cable.
Type designation A2F-FC Range
Coded: II 2 GD
Ex d IIC/Ex e II
Ex d IIC
Ex e II
Ex tD A21 IP66
The A2F-FC range of cable glands is intended to terminate circular braided or unarmoured
enclosures in accordance with relevant codes of practice. They also provide an anchor for a
flexible metallic conduit which can protect the cable from damage. They consist of a male-
threaded front entry component, a seal actuation nut and a conduit anchor element that
screws into the inside of the conduit. The front entry component, fitted with an elastomeric
displacement sealing ring is intended to screw into an entry point of its associated enclosure.
The seal actuation nut threads into the front entry component thereby effecting flameproof
and environmental sealing onto the cable outer sheath. The conduit anchor is secured
between the seal actuation nut and seal to form a skid washer.

Fax: +44 (0) 1244 681330
Form 9400 Issue 0
CERTIFICATION
SCHEDULE

Issue 13
The gland and seal sizes are determined by the entry thread and cable range take sizes:
Gland Size Entry Thread Entry thread ‘B’ Cable Outer Sheath Ø (mm)
version Min. Max.
16 M16 x 1.5 - 3.2 8.7
20s/16 M20 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 3.2 8.7
20s M20 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 6.1 11.7
20 M20 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 6.5 14.0
25 M25 x 1.5 M32 x 1.5 11.1 20.0
32 M32 x 1.5 M40 x 1.5 17.0 26.3
40 M40 x 1.5 M50 x 1.5 23.5 32.2
50s M50 x 1.5 M63 x 1.5 31.0 38.2
50 M50 x 1.5 M63 x 1.5 35.6 44.1
63s M63 x 1.5 M75 x 1.5 41.5 50.0
63 M63 x 1.5 M75 x 1.5 47.2 56.0
75s M75 x 1.5 M90 x 2.0 54.0 62.0
75 M75 x 1.5 M90 x 2.0 61.1 68.0
90 M90 x 2.0 M100 x 2.0 66.6 80.0
100 M100 x 2.0 M115 x 2.0 76.0 91.0
115 M115 x 2.0 M130 x 2.0 86.0 98.0
130 M130 x 2.0 Not available 97.0 115.0
Note * A2FRC and A4ERC ranges of cable glands do not consist of these sizes.
Type designations SS2K & SS2KPB ranges of cable glands
Ex d IIC Ex d I
Ex e II Ex e I
Ex tD A21 IP66
The SS2K & SS2KPB ranges of cable glands are intended to terminate circular braided or
unarmoured cables into enclosures without compromising the explosion protection provided
by the enclosures in accordance with relevant codes of practice. They consist of a male-
threaded front entry component, a main body component and an outer seal actuation nut.
The front entry component, fitted with an elastomeric sealing ring and a Nylon 6 skid washer,
is intended to screw into an entry point of its associated enclosure. The main body
component, fitted with a locking ring, threads into the front entry component thereby
effecting flameproof and environmental sealing onto the cable inner sheath. The outer seal
actuation nut, fitted with an elastomeric sealing ring and a Nylon 6 skid washer, threads into
the main body component thereby effecting environmental sealing onto the cable outer
sheath. Two versions of the outer seal nut are available to allow alternative sizes of outer
sheath to be gripped.
Cable clamping is achieved with the outer seal arrangement.
The type SS2KPB front entry component being additionally fitted with a metallic continuity
diaphragm and skid washer for use with lead sheathed cable.

Fax: +44 (0) 1244 681330
Form 9400 Issue 0
CERTIFICATION
SCHEDULE

Issue 13
Type designation SS2KTA range of cable glands
Coded: II 2GD The SS2KTA range of cable glands is intended to terminate tape
Ex e II armour cable into enclosures without compromising the explosion
Ex tD A21 IP66 protection provided by the enclosures in accordance with relevant
codes of practice. The devices are identical to the SS2K range of
glands but with the addition of a metallic continuity diaphragm and
skid washer
Additional Specific Design option
• Alternative material of manufacture of the skid washer to be the same as the gland material.
• Alternative outer seal arrangement to allow the glands to be attached to flexible conduit.
Gland size Entry thread Entry thread ‘B’ Cable inner seal sheath Cable outer seal sheath Alternative outer seal
version range Ø (mm) range Ø (mm) sheath range Ø (mm)
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max .
16 M16 x 1.5 - 3.2 8.7 3.1 8.7 6.1 11.5
20s/16 M20 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 3.2 8.7 3.1 8.7 6.1 11.5
20s16/20s M20 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 3.2 8.7 6.1 11.7 9.5 15.9
20s M20 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 6.1 11.7 6.1 11.7 9.5 15.9
20s/20 M20 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 6.1 11.7 6.5 14.0 12.5 20.9
20 M20 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 6.5 14.0 6.5 14.0 12.5 20.9
20/25 M20 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 6.5 14.0 11.1 20.0 18.2 26.2
25 M25 x 1.5 M32 x 1.5 11.1 20.0 11.1 20.0 18.2 26.2
25/32 M25 x 1.5 M32 x 1.5 11.1 20.0 17.0 26.3 23.7 33.9
32 M32 x 1.5 M40 x 1.5 17.0 26.3 17.0 26.3 23.7 33.9
32/40 M32 x 1.5 M40 x 1.5 17.0 26.3 22.0 32.2 27.9 40.4
40 M40 x 1.5 M50 x 1.5 23.5 32.2 22.0 32.2 27.9 40.4
40/50s M40 x 1.5 M50 x 1.5 23.5 32.2 29.5 38.2 35.2 46.7
50s M50 x 1.5 M63 x 1.5 31.0 38.2 29.5 38.2 35.2 46.7
50s/50 M50 x 1.5 M63 x 1.5 31.0 38.2 35.6 44.1 40.4 53.1
50 M50 x 1.5 M63 x 1.5 35.6 44.1 35.6 44.1 40.4 53.1
50/63s M50 x 1.5 M63 x 1.5 35.6 44.1 40.1 50.1 45.6 59.4
63s M63 x 1.5 M75 x 1.5 41.5 50.0 40.1 50.1 45.6 59.4
63s/63 M63 x 1.5 M75 x 1.5 41.5 50.0 47.2 56.0 54.6 65.9
63 M63 x 1.5 M75 x 1.5 47.2 56.0 47.2 56.0 54.6 65.9
63/75s M63 x 1.5 M75 x 1.5 47.2 56.0 52.8 62.0 59.0 72.1
75s M75 x 1.5 M90 x 2.0 54.0 62.0 52.8 62.0 59.0 72.1
75s/75 M75 x 1.5 M90 x 2.0 54.0 62.0 59.1 68.0 66.7 78.5
75 M75 x 1.5 M90 x 2.0 61.1 68.0 59.1 68.0 66.7 78.5
75/90 M75 x1.5 M90 x 2.0 61.1 68.0 66.6 79.4 76.2 90.4
90 M90 x 2.0 M100 x 2.0 66.6 80.0 66.6 79.4 76.2 90.4
90/100 M90 x 2.0 M100 x 2.0 66.6 80.0 76.0 91.0 86.1 101.5
100 M100 x 2.0 M115 x 2.0 76.0 91.0 76.0 91.0 86.1 101.5
100/115 M100 x 2.0 M115 x 2.0 76.0 91.0 86.0 98.0 101.5 110.3
115 M115 x 2.0 M130 x 2.0 86.0 98.0 86.0 98.0 101.5 110.3
115/130 M115 x 2.0 M130 x 2.0 86.0 98.0 97.0 115.0 114.2 123.3
130 M130 x 2.0 Not available 97.0 115.0 97.0 115.0 114.2 123.3

Fax: +44 (0) 1244 681330
Form 9400 Issue 0
CERTIFICATION
SCHEDULE

Issue 13
ii) C**Type ranges of cable glands
Coded: II 2GD
Ex e II
Ex tD A21 IP66
The C** series Type ranges of cable glands consist of a male-threaded front entry component,
which is intended to screw into an entry point of its associated enclosure in accordance with
relevant codes of practice. The front entry component to main body mating thread may be fitted
with an optional ‘O’ ring seal to provide increased ingress protection. Clamping of the armour or
braid is effected by a combination of the front entry component, main body and the different
optional armour cone and armour sleeve combinations being fastened together. An outer seal nut,
containing an elastomeric sealing ring and a Nylon 6 ferrule, threads onto the main body and
effects environmental sealing onto the cable outer sheath.
• The use of alternative armour clamping components. The various arrangements vary the
cable gland suitability for differing armour or braided type cables.
• The use of a component having an alternative profile allowing an integral earthing
facility. The type designation identifying the cable gland being fitted with this option.
• Alternative material of manufacture of the ferrule or skid washer to be the same as the
gland material.
Gland size Entry Entry thread Cable inner SWA SWA, STA, strip armour, Outer seal sheath
thread ‘B’ version sheath Ø (mm) pliable wire armour* & wire range Ø
(mm) braid (mm) (mm)
Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max .
16 M16 x 1.5 - 8.7 0.9 1.00 0 1.0 6.1 11.5
20s/16 M20 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 8.7 0.9 1.00 0 1.0 6.1 11.5
20s M20 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 11.7 0.9 1.25 0 1.0 9.5 15.9
20 M20 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 14.0 0.9 1.25 0 1.0 12.5 20.9
25s M25 x 1.5 M32 x 1.5 20.0 1.25 1.6 0 1.0 14.0 22.0
25 M25 x 1.5 M32 x 1.5 20.0 1.25 1.6 0 1.0 18.2 26.2
32 M32 x 1.5 M40 x 1.5 26.3 1.6 2.0 0 1.0 23.7 33.9
40 M40 x 1.5 M50 x 1.5 32.2 1.6 2.0 0 1.0 27.9 40.4
50s M50 x 1.5 M63 x 1.5 38.2 2.0 2.5 0 1.0 35.2 46.7
50 M50 x 1.5 M63 x 1.5 44.1 2.0 2.5 0 1.0 40.4 53.1
63s M63 x 1.5 M75 x 1.5 50.0 2.0 2.5 0 1.0 45.6 59.4
63 M63 x 1.5 M75 x 1.5 56.0 2.0 2.5 0 1.0 54.6 65.9
75s M75 x 1.5 M90 x 2.0 62.0 2.0 2.5 0 1.0 59.0 72.1
75 M75 x 1.5 M90 x 2.0 68.0 2.5 3.0 0 1.0 66.7 78.5
90 M90 x 2.0 M100 x 2.0 80.0 3.0 3. 5 0 1.6 76.2 90.4
100 M100 x 2.0 M115 x 2.0 91.0 3.15 4.0 0 1.6 86.1 101.5
115 M115 x 2.0 M130 x 2.0 98.0 3.15 4.0 0 1.6 101.5 110.3
130 M130 x 2.0 N/A 115.0 3.15 4.0 0 1.6 114.2 123.3
* - ‘Xe’ and ‘2K versions only Sira Certification Service
Fax: +44 (0) 1244 681330
Form 9400 Issue 0
CERTIFICATION
SCHEDULE

Issue 13
Type designation code
C /
C = Fitted with the alternative cast integral earth lug entry component.
We = Fitted with single plain armour cone & reversible armour sleeve
to suit SWA cables.
Xe = Fitted with single grooved armour cone & reversible armour
sleeve to suit SWA, STA, strip armoured, braided & pliable wire
armoured cables.
2K = Fitted with reversible armour cone & reversible armour sleeve to
suit SWA, STA, strip armoured, braided and pliable wire
armoured cables.
C type glands may be fitted with armour cones with alternative diameters to allow the
clamping of smaller or larger armour wires.
iii) E** series Type ranges of cable glands
Ex d IIC Ex d I
Ex e II Ex e I
Ex tD A21 IP66
The E** series Type ranges of cable glands consist of a male-threaded front entry component
containing an elastomeric sealing ring and a Nylon 6 skid washer which effect flameproof
sealing onto the cable inner sheath and is intended to screw into an entry point of its
associated enclosure in accordance with relevant codes of practice. The flameproof seal is
actuated by an adjoining coupling component. The coupling component is attached to a main
body. Their mating thread may be fitted with an optional ‘O’ ring seal to provide increased
ingress protection. Clamping of the armoured or braided cable is effected by a combination of
the coupling component, main body and the different optional armour cone and armour
sleeve combinations being fastened together. An outer seal nut, containing an elastomeric
sealing ring and a Nylon 6 ferrule, threads onto the main body and effects environmental
sealing onto the cable outer sheath.
• The use of a component having an alternative profile allowing an integral earthing
facility. The type designation identifying the cable gland being fitted with this option.
• The use of metallic continuity diaphragm component specified by the cable gland type
designation for use when terminating lead sheathed cables.
• Alternative material of manufacture of the ferrule or skid washer to be the same as the
gland material. Sira Certification Service
Fax: +44 (0) 1244 681330
Form 9400 Issue 0
CERTIFICATION
SCHEDULE

Issue 13
• Glands may be fitted with armour cones with alternative diameters to allow the clamping
of smaller or larger armour wires.
Gland Entry Entry thread Inner seal sheath SWA SWA, STA, strip Outer seal sheath
size thread ‘B’ version range Ø (mm) (mm) armour, pliable range Ø (mm)
wire armour* &
wire braid (mm)
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max
16 M16 x 1.5 - 3.1 8.6 0.9 1.00 0 1.0 6.1 11.5
20s/16 M20 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 3.1 8.6 0.9 1.00 0 1.0 6.1 11.5
20s16/20s M20 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 3.1 8.6 0.9 1.25 0 1.0 9.5 15.9
20s M20 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 6.1 11.6 0.9 1.25 0 1.0 9.5 15.9
20s/20 M20 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 6.1 11.6 0.9 1.25 0 1.0 12.5 20.9
20 M20 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 6.5 13.9 0.9 1.25 0 1.0 12.5 20.9
20/25S M20 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 6.5 13.9 1.25 1.6 0 1.0 14.0 22.0
20/25 M20 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 6.5 13.9 1.25 1.6 0 1.0 18.2 26.2
25s M25 x 1.5 M32 x 1.5 11.1 19.9 1.25 1.6 0 1.0 14.0 22.0
25 M25 x 1.5 M32 x 1.5 11.1 19.9 1.25 1.6 0 1.0 18.2 26.2
25/32 M25 x 1.5 M32 x 1.5 11.1 19.9 1.6 2.0 0 1.0 23.7 33.9
32 M32 x 1.5 M40 x 1.5 17.0 26.2 1.6 2.0 0 1.0 23.7 33.9
32/40 M32 x 1.5 M40 x 1.5 17.0 26.2 1.6 2.0 0 1.0 27.9 40.4
40 M40 x 1.5 M50 x 1.5 22.0 32.1 1.6 2.0 0 1.0 27.9 40.4
40/50s M40 x 1.5 M50 x 1.5 22.0 32.1 2.0 2.5 0 1.0 35.2 46.7
50s M50 x 1.5 M63 x 1.5 29.5 38.1 2.0 2.5 0 1.0 35.2 46.7
50s/50 M50 x 1.5 M63 x 1.5 29.5 38.1 2.0 2.5 0 1.0 40.4 53.1
50 M50 x 1.5 M63 x 1.5 35.6 44.0 2.0 2.5 0 1.0 40.4 53.1
50/63s M50 x 1.5 M63 x 1.5 35.6 44.0 2.0 2.5 0 1.0 45.6 59.4
63s M63 x 1.5 M75 x 1.5 40.1 49.9 2.0 2.5 0 1.0 45.6 59.4
63s/63 M63 x 1.5 M75 x 1.5 40.1 49.9 2.0 2.5 0 1.0 54.6 65.9
63 M63 x 1.5 M75 x 1.5 47.2 55.9 2.0 2.5 0 1.0 54.6 65.9
63/75s M63 x 1.5 M75 x 1.5 47.2 55.9 2.0 2.5 0 1.0 59.0 72.1
75s M75 x 1.5 M90 x 2.0 52.8 61.9 2.0 2.5 0 1.0 59.0 72.1
75s/75 M75 x 1.5 M90 x 2.0 52.8 61.9 2.5 3.0 0 1.0 66.7 78.5
75 M75 x 1.5 M90 x 2.0 59.1 67.9 2.5 3.0 0 1.0 66.7 78.5
75/90 M75 x 1.5 M90 x 2.0 59.1 67.9 3.0 3. 5 0 1.6 76.2 90.4
90 M90 x 2.0 M100 x 2.0 66.6 79.9 3.0 3. 5 0 1.6 76.2 90.4
90/100 M90 x 2.0 M100 x 2.0 66.6 79.9 3.15 4.0 0 1.6 86.1 101.5
100 M100 x 2.0 M115 x 2.0 76.0 90.9 3.15 4.0 0 1.6 86.1 101.5
100/115 M100 x 2.0 M115 x 2.0 76.0 90.9 3.15 4.0 0 1.6 101.5 110.3
115 M115 x 2.0 M130 x 2.0 86.0 97.9 3.15 4.0 0 1.6 101.5 110.3
115/130 M115 x 2.0 M130 x 2.0 86.0 97.9 3.15 4.0 0 1.6 114.2 123.3
130 M130 x 2.0 N/A 97.0 114.9 3.15 4.0 0 1.6 114.2 123.3
* - ‘X’ and ‘U’ variants; see below

Fax: +44 (0) 1244 681330
Form 9400 Issue 0
CERTIFICATION
SCHEDULE

Issue 13
E F /
C = Fitted with the alternative cast integral earth lug entry

component.
W = Fitted with single plain armour cone & reversible armour sleeve
to suit SWA cables.
X = Fitted with single grooved armour cone & reversible armour
sleeve to suit SWA, STA, strip armoured, pliable wire armoured
and braided cables.
U = Fitted with reversible armour cone & reversible armour sleeve to
suit SWA, STA, strip armoured, pliable wire armoured and
braided cables.
1 = Standard circular armoured and braided cables.

2 = Inner seal fitted with additional metallic continuity diaphragm
for the use with inner lead sheathed SWA, strip armoured and
braided cables.
iv) PX** series-Type ranges of compound filled barrier cable glands
Coded: II 2 GD and/or I M2
Ex d IIC Ex d I
Ex e II Ex e I
Ex tD A21 IP66 Note: Not PXRC
The PX** series Type ranges of barrier cable glands consist of a male-threaded front entry
component, fitted with a compound tube such that a spigot/combination joint is formed, which is
intended to screw into an entry point of its associated enclosure in accordance with relevant codes
of practice. The compound tube is filled with a sealing compound that effects a flameproof seal
around the cable cores passing through it and is mechanically retained. The sealing compound can
be either the EP2122 sealing material or the ‘RapidEx’ resin system (PX** cable glands that use the
RapidEx resin system have “-REX” added to their type name). The front entry component to main
body mating thread may be fitted with an optional ‘O’ ring seal to provide increased ingress
protection. Clamping of the armour or braid is effected by a combination of the front entry
component assembly and the different optional armour cone and reversible sleeve combinations
within the main body being fastened together. An outer seal nut, containing an elastomeric
displacement sealing ring and a Nylon 6 ferrule, threads onto the main body and effects
environmental sealing onto the cable outer sheath.

Fax: +44 (0) 1244 681330
Form 9400 Issue 0
CERTIFICATION
SCHEDULE

Issue 13

• Alternative material of manufacture of the ferrule to be the same as the gland material.
• The removal of the ATEX outer seal, nut and ferrule, along with the body component
manufactured without the external mating thread. The cable gland being suitable for
S.W.A armoured cables and is identified within type designation coding.
• The use of the compound tube and spacer along with the manufacture of the front entry
component with a female mating thread, to couple to an alternative main body, skid
washer, seal and nut. The latter replacing other component parts. This variant being
identified within type designation coding.
• PXSS2K range can be fitted with the outer seal nut from the PX** range as an
alternative.
• PX type glands may be fitted with armour cones with alternative diameters to allow the
clamping of smaller or larger armour wires.
• PX2K** range can be fitted with the outer seal nut assembly from the PKSS2K range as
an alternative.
The gland and seal sizes are determined by the entry thread and cable range take sizes. In
addition note that not all the information detailed in the table is applicable to all gland types.
See individual approval drawings.
Gland Entry Entry Max. Max. Ø SWA SWA, STA, PXSS2K2, 3 outer PX**3 outer
size thread thread ‘B’ no. of over (mm) strip armour, seal sheath seal sheath
version cores cores pliable wire range Ø (mm) range Ø (mm)
(mm) armour1 &
wire braid
(mm)
20s/16 M20 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 34 12.6 0.9 1.00 0 1.0 3.1 8.7 6.1 11.5
20s M20 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 34 12.6 0.9 1.25 0 1.0 6.1 11.7 9.5 15.9
20 M20 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 34 12.6 0.9 1.25 0 1.0 6.5 14.0 12.5 20.9
20L M20 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 34 12.6 0.9 1.25 0 1.0 10.0 15.9 N/A N/A
25s M25 x 1.5 M32 x 1.5 80 17.5 1.25 1.6 0 1.0 11.1 20.0 14.0 22.0
25 M25 x 1.5 M32 x 1.5 80 17.5 1.25 1.6 0 1.0 11.1 20.0 18.2 26.2
32 M32 x 1.5 M40 x 1.5 115 23.6 1.6 2.0 0 1.0 17.0 26.3 23.7 33.9
32L M32 x 1.5 M40 x 1.5 115 23.6 1.6 2.0 0 1.0 20.0 27.4 N/A N/A
40 M40 x 1.5 M50 x 1.5 185 30.0 1.6 2.0 0 1.0 22.0 32.1 27.9 40.4
50s M50 x 1.5 M63 x 1.5 274 36.6 2.0 2.5 0 1.0 29.5 38.2 35.2 46.7
50 M50 x 1.5 M63 x 1.5 343 41.0 2.0 2.5 0 1.0 35.6 44.1 40.4 53.1
63s M63 x 1.5 M75 x 1.5 466 47.9 2.0 2.5 0 1.0 40.1 50.1 45.6 59.4
63 M63 x 1.5 M75 x 1.5 585 53.7 2.0 2.5 0 1.0 47.2 56.0 54.6 65.9
75s M75 x 1.5 M90 x 2.0 727 59.9 2.0 2.5 0 1.0 52.8 62.0 59.0 72.1
75 M75 x 1.5 M90 x 2.0 837 64.3 2.5 3.0 0 1.0 59.1 68.0 66.7 78.5
90 M90 x 2.0 M100 x 2.0 1146 75.3 3.0 3. 5 0 1.6 66.6 79.4 76.2 90.4
100 M100 x 2.0 M115 x 2.0 1480 85.6 3.15 4.0 0 1.6 80.0 90.9 86.1 101.5
1
‘2KX’ and ‘2K’ variants; see below.
2
including PX** fitted with alternative outer nut as drawing GA273.
3
Not PXRC variant. Sira Certification Service
Fax: +44 (0) 1244 681330
Form 9400 Issue 0
CERTIFICATION
SCHEDULE

Issue 13

PX
2KW = Fitted with single plain armour cone & reversible armour sleeve
to suit SWA cables.
2KX = Fitted with single grooved armour cone & reversible armour
sleeve to suit SWA, STA, strip armoured, pliable wire armoured
and braided cables.
2K = Gland kit provided with 2 single armour cones (From the 2KW
& 2KX) and reversible armour sleeve to suit SWA, STA, strip
armoured, pliable wire armoured and braided cables.
B2KW = Fitted with single plain armour cone & reversible armour
sleeve, but has no outer seal, nut or ferrule. The body is also
manufactured without the external mating thread. The cable
gland is suitable for SWA cables.
SS2K = Alternative manufactured front entry component coupled to an
alternative main body, skid washer, seal and nut for use with
unarmoured cables.
RC = Alternative manufactured front entry component attached to a
running coupler (of the same construction as the A2FRC
running coupler) and skid washer. Used with unarmoured
cables in rigid conduit.
/PB = Alternative two part cone assembly incorporating an additional
metallic continuity diaphragm for the use with inner lead
sheathed SWA and braided cables.
-REX = Glands using the RapidEx resin system.

Fax: +44 (0) 1244 681330
Form 9400 Issue 0
CERTIFICATION
SCHEDULE

Issue 13
Variation 1 - This variation introduced the following change:

i. The recognition of an alternative, outer sealing arrangement for the C**, E** and PX**
Ranges of Cable Glands; the compression nut length and consequently body length were
reduced, in addition, the internal, tapered ferrule was replaced by a flat ferrule.
i. The brass, mild steel and stainless steel SS2K and SS2KPB glands can be used for Group
I applications.
ii. The introduction of the SS2KTA range of cable glands for use with tape armour.
iii. The recognition of alternative armour cone diameters for the ‘C**’, ‘E**’ and PX types.
iv. The removal of the manufacturer’s address from the product marking.
v. The use of the ‘E**’, ‘C**’ and ‘PX’ ranges with pliable wire armour cables.
vi. The marking of the ranges for dust applications to EN 61241-1:2004.
i. To permit the Type PX2KW, PX2KX, PXB2KW glands for Group I use.
i. To permit use of an alternative setting compound the Type PX2KW, PX2KX, PXB2KW
glands for Group I use.
Variation 5 - This variation introduced the following changes
i. The option for the glands to be manufactured with an entry thread that is one size up
from the nominal gland size.
ii. Typographical errors were corrected.
iii. An additional M100 size was included in the PX range of cable glands.
i. A 20s16/20s combination gland for SS2K and E type glands.
ii. A 20/25s combination for E type glands.
iii. The use of an alternative outer seal nut on SS2K and PXSS2K type glands.
iv. The addition of the A2F-FC glandsThe addition of the PXRC glands.
iv. Recognition of the alternative A2F designation ‘A2E’.
i. To permit the introduction of the A4ERC range of cable glands.
Variation 8 – This variation introduced the following changes:
i. The addition of the size 16 gland to the A2F, A2E, A2FRC, A4ERC, A2F-FC, SS2K,
SS2KPB, C** and E** ranges.
ii. The recognition of an alternative outer seal arrangement to allow the fitting of the SS2K,
SS2KPB, C**, E** and PX** glands to flexible conduit , including a new Special Condition
For Safe use.
iii. The inclusion of an alternative sealing material for the PX** range of glands.
iv. The introduction of an alternative skid washer to all glands covered by this certificate.

Fax: +44 (0) 1244 681330
Form 9400 Issue 0
CERTIFICATION
SCHEDULE

Issue 13
Variation 9 – This variation introduced the following change:

i. To permit an alternative rear nut arrangement on the PX** range. The existing PXSS2K
nut being fitted to the PX** range. The table in section iv) PX** series-Type ranges of
Compound filled barrier cable glands, has been modified to reflect the changes by
including Note 2.
Variation 10: This variation introduced the following changes:
i. The use of CMP, fast curing resin, trade name ‘RapidEx’, was recognised as a sealing
compound employed in the construction of the compound filled barrier cable glands,
products that use the RapidEx resin system have “-REX” added to their type name; the
Description of Equipment was modified to recognise this change, in addition, the special
condition for safe use detailing the applicable temperature ranges was amended to
clarify the compound and resin types.
ii. The special condition for safe use that imposed tightening restriction to the C**- Type
and E**-Type Ranges to achieve IP 66 was proven to be unnecessary and was removed.
iii. Minor typographical errors were corrected.
Variation 11: This variation introduced the following changes:
i. Following appropriate re-assessment to demonstrate compliance with the requirements
of the latest EN 60079 series of standards, the documents originally listed in section 9,
EN 60079-0:2004, EN 60079-1:2004 and EN 60079-7-1:2003, were replaced by those
currently listed, the markings in section 12 were updated accordingly.
14.1 Drawings
0 7 September 2006 R51A14508A The release of the prime certificate.
1 23 January 2007 R51M15819A The introduction of Variation 1.
2 22 June 2007 R51A14508C This Issue covers the following changes:
R51M16086A • All previously issued certification was rationalised
R51M16082A into a single certificate Issue 2, Issues 0 and 1
R51M14895A referenced above are only intended to reflect the
R51M16257A history of the previous certification and have not
R51A14508B been issued as actual documents.
• Report number R51A14508A was replaced by
Report number R51A14508C, the product
description was amended accordingly.
• The introduction of Variation 2.
3 30 August 2007 R51A14508D The description of the E** Range of Cable Glands was
amended to include the 25/32 size originally omitted
and the correction of the Ex tD marking.
4 12 November 2007 R59M17052B The introduction of Variation 3, note that report
R51M14895A is no longer required.
5 18 December 2007 - Removal of Category 3 marking.
Fax: +44 (0) 1244 681330
Form 9400 Issue 0
CERTIFICATION
SCHEDULE

Issue 13

6 10 March 2008 R59M16744A This Issue covers the following changes:
• The introduction of Variation 4.
• The correction of the certificate history.
7 29 April 2008 R51A18210A The introduction of Variation 5.
R59M17351A
8 20 November 2008 R59M18794A The introduction of Variation 6.
9 12 January 2009 R59M19183A The introduction of Variation 7.
10 19 November 2009 R20049A The introduction of Variation 8.
11 28 April 2010 R22120A/00 The introduction of Variation 9.
12 14 October2010 R23313A/00 The introduction of Variation 10.
13 28 January 2011 R23739A/00 The introduction of Variation 11.
In addition, the report reference at Issues 3 and 4
were corrected.
15.1 The E**-Type Ranges of cable glands shall not be used to terminate on braided cables in
group I applications.
15.2 The cable gland ranges shall only be used where the temperature, at the point of entry, is in
the following ranges:
Type A2F, A2E ranges of cable glands: -60°C to +130°C
Type A2FRC ranges of cable glands: -60°C to +130°C
Type A2F-FC ranges of cable glands: -60°C to +130°C
Type SS2K ranges of cable glands: -60°C to +130°C
Type SS2KPB ranges of cable glands: -60°C to +130°C
Type C** range of cable glands: -60°C to +130°C
Type E** ranges of cable glands: -60°C to +130°C
Type PX** ranges of cable glands: -60°C to +100°C EP2122 compound filled
Type PX** ranges of cable glands: -60°C to +85°C ‘RapidEx’ resin filled
Type A4ERC range of cable glands:- 60°C to +130°C
15.3 All ranges of cable glands fitted with flameproof elastomeric seals are certified with one
specific size of FLP sealing ring per gland size as supplied.
15.4 The C**-Type and E**- Type and PX**- Type Ranges used for terminating braided cables are
only suitable for fixed installations. Cables must be effectively clamped to prevent pulling or
twisting.
15.5 The A2F, A2E, SS2K & SS2KPB size 20s/16 cable entries are only suitable for fixed
installations. Cables must be effectively clamped to prevent pulling or twisting.
15.6 The entry component threads may need additional sealing to maintain the ingress protection
rating as applicable to the associated equipment in which it will be attached.
15.7 The Type PXB2KW gland is to be protected from hydraulic fluids, oils, and greases when
applied for Group I use.
15.8 When the A2F, A2E, A2FRC, A2F-FC, SS2K, SS2KPB, Type C**, Type E** and Type PX** ranges
of cable glands are supplied with an entry thread that is one size up from the nominal gland
Fax: +44 (0) 1244 681330
Form 9400 Issue 0
CERTIFICATION
SCHEDULE

Issue 13
size, designated with the letter ‘B’ after the gland size, e.g. 32BE1FW1RA, they shall not be
used with any adaptor device.
15.9 When assembled for fitting to flexible conduit, the conduit shall be effectively clamped to
prevent twisting and pulling.
The relevant EHSRs that are not addressed by the standards listed in this certificate have
been identified and individually assessed in the reports listed in Section 14.2.
17.1 The use of this certificate is subject to the Regulations Applicable to Holders of Sira
Certificates.
17.3 When glands are manufactured with an entry thread that is one size up from nominal quoted
gland size, these thread entries shall not be any larger than the largest thread size within that
range.
17.4 When glands are manufactured with an entry thread that is one size up from nominal quoted
gland size, the thread entry size will be marked on the gland.

Fax: +44 (0) 1244 681330
Form 9400 Issue 0
Certificate Annexe
Certificate number: Sira 06ATEX1097X
Applicant: CMP Products Limited
Equipment: Ranges of Cable Glands Types A2F, A2E, A2FRC,
CERTIFICATION
A4ERC, A2F-FC, SS2K, C**, E** and PX**
Issue 0 and 1 - The drawings associated with this Issue were rationalised by those listed in Issue 2.
Issue 2
Drawing No. Sheets Rev. Date Description
GA169 1 of 1 03 18 Jun 07 CWe General arrangement & marking
GA170 1 of 1 03 18 Jun 07 CXe General arrangement & marking
GA171 1 of 1 03 18 Jun 07 E1FW & E2FW General arrangement & marking
GA174 1 of 1 03 18 Jun 07 C2K General arrangement & marking
GA175 1 of 1 02 18 Jun 07 PX2K General arrangement & marking
GA176 1 of 1 03 18 Jun 07 A2F General arrangement & marking
GA177 1 of 1 02 18 Jun 07 A2FRC General arrangement & marking MISSING
GA178 1 of 1 03 18 Jun 07 PX2KW General arrangement & marking
GA179 1 of 1 02 18 Jun 07 PX2KX General arrangement & marking
GA181 1 of 1 02 18 Jun 07 PXB2KW General arrangement & marking
GA183 1 of 1 04 18 Jun 07 PXSS2K General arrangement & marking
GA184 1 of 1 05 18 Jun 07 SS2K General arrangement
GA185 1 of 1 03 18 Jun 07 E1FX, E2FX & E1FT General arrangement & marking
GA186 1 of 1 02 18 Jun 07 E1FU & E2FU General arrangement & marking
MP888 1 of 1 05 06 Jun 07 Manufacturing tolerances for non specified dimensions
SCH0143 1 of 1 01 26 Jun 01 Optional O-ring face seal groove dimensions
SCH0208 1 of 1 01 29 Jan 03 PX PB armour cone dimensions
SCH0234 1 of 1 02 06 Jun 07 ATEX inner seal operational details
SCH0235 1 of 1 02 25 May 07 Modified armour clamp operational details
SCH0242 1 of 1 08 07 Mar 07 ATEX outer seal operational details
SCH0245 1 of 1 P6 02 Jun 06 PX & PXSS2K entry component assembly details
SCH0246 1 of 1 02 18 Jun 07 PXSS2K & SS2K main body and outer seal assembly details
SCH0247 1 of 1 P6 02 Jun 06 PX armour clamp details
SCH0250 1 of 1 P6 02 Jun 06 C** & E** optional CIEL entry body feature
Issue 3 - No new drawings were introduced.
Issue 4
Drawing No. Sheet Issue Date Description
GA178 1 of 1 05 18 Oct 07 General Arrangement – PX2KW Gland
GA179 1 of 1 04 18 Oct 07 General Arrangement – PX2KX Gland
GA181 1 of 1 04 18 Oct 07 General Arrangement – PXB2KW Gland
Issue 5 - No new drawings were introduced.
Issue 6
Drawing No. Sheet Issue Date Description
GA175 1 of 1 03 26 Oct 07 General Arrangement – PX2K Gland

Tel: +44 (0) 1244 670900
Page 1 of 3
Fax: +44 (0) 1244 681330
Form 9400 Issue 0
Certificate Annexe
CERTIFICATION
Issue 7
Drawing No. Sheets Rev. Date (Sira stamp) Description
GA169 1 of 1 04 30 Apr 08 CWe General arrangement & marking
GA170 1 of 1 04 30 Apr 08 CXe General arrangement & marking
GA171 1 of 1 04 30 Apr 08 E1FW & E2FW General arrangement & marking
GA174 1 of 1 04 30 Apr 08 C2K General arrangement & marking
GA175 1 of 1 06 30 Apr 08 PX2K General arrangement & marking
GA176 1 of 1 04 30 Apr 08 A2F General arrangement & marking
GA177 1 of 1 03 30 Apr 08 A2FRC General arrangement & marking
GA178 1 of 1 07 30 Apr 08 PX2KW General arrangement & marking
GA179 1 of 1 06 30 Apr 08 PX2KX General arrangement & marking
GA181 1 of 1 06 30 Apr 08 PXB2KW General arrangement & marking
GA183 1 of 1 06 30 Apr 08 PXSS2K General arrangement & marking
GA184 1 of 1 06 30 Apr 08 SS2K General arrangement
GA185 1 of 1 04 30 Apr 08 E1FX, E2FX & E1FT General arrangement & marking
GA186 1 of 1 03 30 Apr 08 E1FU & E2FU General arrangement & marking
SCH0247 1 of 1 00 30 Apr 08 PX Armour clamping details
SCH0246 1 of 1 03 30 Apr 08 PXSS2K & SS2K Outer seal details
SCH0245 1 of 1 00 30 Apr 08 PX & PXSS2K Entry item details
SCH0208 1 of 1 02 30 Apr 08 PX PB Armour cone
Issue 8
GA171 1 of 1 05 23 Jul 08 E1FW & E2FW General arrangement & marking
GA174 1 of 1 05 23 Jul 08 C2K General arrangement & marking
GA175 1 of 1 09 17 Sep 08 PX2K General arrangement & marking
GA178 1 of 1 09 17 Sep 08 PX2KW General arrangement & marking
GA179 1 of 1 08 17 Sep 08 PX2KX General arrangement & marking
GA181 1 of 1 08 17 Sep 08 PXB2KW General arrangement & marking
GA183 1 of 1 08 17 Sep 08 PXSS2K General arrangement & marking
GA184 1 of 1 07 23 Jul 08 SS2K General arrangement
GA185 1 of 1 05 23 Jul 08 E1FX, E2FX & E1FT General arrangement & marking
GA186 1 of 1 04 23 Jul 08 E1FU & E2FU General arrangement & marking
SCH0247 1 of 1 01 22 Jul 08 PX Armour clamping details
GA0203 1 of 1 03 17 Sep 08 PXRC General arrangement & marking
GA0208 1 of 1 00 29 Sep 08 A2F-FC General arrangement & marking
GA215 1 of 1 00 18 Nov 08 A2E General Arrangement
Issue 9
GA0121 1 of 1 01 20 Nov 08 A4ERC general arrangement and marking.

Tel: +44 (0) 1244 670900
Page 2 of 3
Fax: +44 (0) 1244 681330
Form 9400 Issue 0
Certificate Annexe
CERTIFICATION
Issue 10
GA169 1 of 1 05 10 Nov 09 CWe General arrangement and marking
GA170 1 of 1 05 10 Nov 09 CXe General arrangement and marking
GA171 1 of 1 06 10 Nov 09 E1FW & E2FW General arrangement and marking
GA174 1 of 1 06 10 Nov 09 C2K General arrangement and marking
GA175 1 of 1 10 10 Nov 09 PX2K General arrangement & marking
GA176 1 of 1 05 10 Nov 09 A2F General arrangement and marking
GA177 1 of 1 04 10 Nov 09 A2FRC General arrangement and marking
GA178 1 of 1 10 10 Nov 09 PX2KW General arrangement & marking
GA179 1 of 1 09 10 Nov 09 PX2KX General arrangement & marking
GA181 1 of 1 09 10 Nov 09 PXB2KW General arrangement & marking
GA183 1 of 1 09 10 Nov 09 PXSS2K General arrangement & marking
GA184 1 of 1 08 10 Nov 09 SS2K General arrangement and marking
GA185 1 of 1 06 10 Nov 09 E1FX, E2FX & E1FT General arrangement and marking
GA186 1 of 1 05 10 Nov 09 E1FU & E2FU General arrangement and marking
GA0208 1 of 1 01 10 Nov 09 A2-FC General arrangement and marking
GA212 1 of 1 02 10 Nov 09 A4ERC General arrangement and marking
GA215 1 of 1 01 10 Nov 09 A2E range of cable glands
SCH0235 1 of 1 04 10 Nov 09 Modified armour clamp
SCH0242 1 of 1 09 10 Nov 09 Outer seal arrangement
GA256 1 of 1 00 10 Nov 09 Outer seal nut adaptor details
SCH0250 1 of 1 01 11 Nov 09 C** & E** optional CIEL entry body feature
Issue 11
GA273 1 of 1 00 10 Apr 10 PX** with PXSS2K rear nut arrangement
Issue 12
GA175 1 of 1 11 21 Sep 10 PX2K General arrangement & marking
GA178 1 of 1 11 21 Sep 10 PX2KW General arrangement & marking
GA179 1 of 1 10 21 Sep 10 PX2KX General arrangement & marking
GA181 1 of 1 10 21 Sep 10 PXB2KW General arrangement & marking
GA183 1 of 1 10 21 Sep 10 PXSS2K General arrangement & marking

Tel: +44 (0) 1244 670900
Page 3 of 3
Fax: +44 (0) 1244 681330
Form 9400 Issue 0
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Certificate No.: IECEx SIR 06.0044X Issue No: 11 Certificate history:

Issue No. 11 (2011-10-05)
Issue No. 9 (2010-10-15)
Issue No. 7 (2009-11-25)
Applicant: CMP Products Limited Issue No. 6 (2008-12-01)
Glasshouse Street Issue No. 5 (2008-05-23)
St Peters, Newcastle-upon-Tyne Issue No. 4 (2008-03-13)
Tyne and Wear NE6 1BS Issue No. 3 (2007-11-13)
United Kingdom Issue No. 2 (2007-06-25)
Issue No. 1 (2007-01-23)
Electrical Apparatus: PX** Type Range of Compound Filled Barrier Cable Glands
Optional accessory:
Type of Protection: Flameproof, increased safety and dust
Marking: Ex d IIC/Ex e II /Ex nR II or Ex d IIC, Ex e II or

Ex tD A21 IP66
or
Ex d I/Ex e I or Ex d I or Ex e I (Not PXRC)
Approved for issue on behalf of the IECEx D R Stubbings BA MIET

Certification Body:
Signature:
Date:


SIRA Certification Service
Rake Lane
Eccleston
Chester
CH4 9JN
United Kingdom
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Manufacturer: CMP Products Limited

Glasshouse Street
St Peters
Newcastle-upon-Tyne
Tyne and Wear NE6 1BS
United Kingdom
location(s):
STANDARDS:
Edition:4.0
Edition:6
IEC 60079-15 : 2005-03 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres Part 15: Construction, test and Marking of Type of
Edition:3 Protection "n" electrical apparatus
Edition:4
Edition:1
Edition:1

Test Report:

GB/SIR/QAR06.0011/00 GB/SIR/QAR07.0009/00 GB/SIR/QAR07.0009/01

GB/SIR/QAR07.0009/02
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Schedule
EQUIPMENT:
The PX** series Type ranges of barrier cable glands consist of a male-threaded front entry component, fitted with a compound tube such
that a spigot/combination joint is formed, which is intended to screw into an entry point of its associated enclosure in accordance with
relevant codes of practice. The compound tube contains a setting compound that effects a flameproof seal around the cable cores
passing through it and is mechanically retained. the sealing compound can be either the EP2122 sealing material or the RapidEx resin
system (PX** cable glands that use the RapidEx resin system have "-REX" added to their type name. The front entry component to main
body mating thread may be fitted with an optional ‘O’ ring seal to provide increased ingress protection. Clamping of the armour or braid is
effected by a combination of the front entry component assembly and the different optional armour cone and reversible sleeve
combinations within the main body being fastened together. An outer seal nut, containing an elastomeric displacement sealing ring and a
Nylon 6 ferrule, threads onto the main body and effects environmental sealing onto the cable outer sheath. Cable clamping is achieved
with the outer seal arrangement.
Refer to Annex for more information.
1. The cable gland ranges shall only be used where the temperature, at the point of entry, is in the following ranges.
2. Type PX** ranges of cable glands: -60°C to +100°C EP2122 compound filled.
3. Type PX** ranges of cable glands: -60°C to +85°C RapidEx resin filled.
4. The PX** type cable glands used for terminating braided cables are only suitable for fixed installations. Cables must
be effectively clamped to prevent pulling or twisting.
5. The PX** type of cable gland entry component threads may need additional sealing to maintain the ingress
protection rating as applicable to the associated equipment in which it will be attached.
6. The Type PXB2KW gland is to be protected from hydraulic fluids, oils, and greases when applied for Group I use.
7. The PX range of cable glands with entry threads smaller than a M25 (or equivalent) size shall not be used for
Group I applications where there is a ‘high’ risk of mechanical damage.
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Issue 1 - this Issue introduced the following changes

1. The introduction of an alternative, outer sealing arrangement; the compression nut length
and consequently body length are reduced, in addition, the internal, tapered ferrule is
replaced by a flat ferrule.
1. The introduction of Ex nR II and Ex tD marking.
2. The recognition of alternative armour cone diameters.
3. The removal of the manufacturer's address from the product marking.
4. The use of the PX range of glands with pliable wire armour.
1. The full range of PX** series glands was allowed to be used in Group I.
2. The ‘PB’ designation was clarified.
1. An alternative setting compound was recognised.
1. An additional M100 size was included.
Issue 6 - this Issue introduced the following changes:
1. The introduction of the PXRC range of cable glands incorporating a seal actuation nut
and an outer, running coupling. The outer running coupling is retained in the seal
actuation nut using the carbon steel ‘C’ clip to allow free running thread connection to
conduit.
2. PXSS2K – alternative backnut & seal.
3. The use of alternative armour cones machined for varying armour wire diameters.
4. The inclusion of steel wire armour cable (s.w.a) in the armour cone description.
5. The Inclusion of ‘size-up’ threads
1 The inclusion of an alternative sealing material for the PX** range of glands
2. The recognition of an alternative outer seal arrangement to allow the fitting of the PX**
glands to flexible conduit , including a new Special Condition For Safe use
3. The introduction of an alternative ferrule, to all glands covered by this certificate, made in
the same material as the glands.
1. To permit an alternative rear nut arrangement on the PX** range. The existing PXSS2K
nut being fitted to the PX** range.
See additional information for more changes.
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity

1. The use of CMP, fast curing resin, trade name ‘RapidEx’, was recognised as a
sealing compound employed in the construction of the compound filled barrier
cable glands, products that use the RapidEx resin system have “-REX” added to
their type name; the Description of Equipment was modified to recognise this
change, in addition, the special condition for safe use detailing the applicable
temperature ranges was amended to clarify the compound and resin types.
1. Following appropriate re-assessment to demonstrate compliance, the originally
listed standards IEC 60079-1:2003 and IEC 60079-7:2001 were replaced by
IEC 60079—1:2007 and IEC 60079-7:2006 respectively.
1. The introduction of the PXSS2K-HC range of cable glands
2. An alternative cone arrangement, incorporating a metallic continuity device for
variable speed drive cables, designated /VAR.
3 To correct typographical errors and to include additional description comments
for clarity.
4 The introduction of a condition of certification to clarify the group I application for
the PX series glands.
Annex:
IECEx SIR 06.0044X Iss 11 Annex.pdf

Annexe to: IECEx SIR 06.0044X Issue 11
Apparatus: PX** Type Range of Cable Glands

CERTIFICATION
Design options
• The front entry component may be manufactured with a profiled groove to captivate an ‘O’ ring seal which
locates on the mating face with the associated enclosure. This option having the gland type designation
prefixed with the letter R, e.g. 25RPX**.
• Alternative materials of manufacture:
Brass to BS2874:1986 Grade CuZn39Pb (CW614N)

Mild steel to BS970 Pt1:1991 Grade 220M07Pb
Stainless steel to BS970 Pt1:1991 Grades 316S11, 316S13, 316S31 or 316S33
Aluminium alloy to BS1474:1987 Grade 6082 or BS1490 Grade LM25 TF (Not Group I)
• Alternative entry component thread forms:
Metric ISO 965-1, ISO965-3 medium fit (6g) for external threads
ET(Conduit) BS 31:1940 (1979), Table A
PG DIN 40430:1971
BSPP BS 2779:1973 class A full form for external threads
BSPTBS 21:1985 standard threads only as clause 5.4, gauging to clause 5.2 system A
ISO ISO 7/1:1982, gauging to ISO 7/2 clause 6.3 for external threads
NPT ANSI/ASME B1.20.1-1983 gauging to clause 8.1 for external threads
NPSMANSI/ASME B1.20.1-1983 gauging to clause 9 for external threads
• The use of alternative armour clamping components. The various arrangements vary the cable gland
suitability for differing armour or braided type cables.
• Alternative material of manufacture of the ferrule to be the same as the gland material.
• The removal of the ATEX outer seal, nut and ferrule, along with the body component manufactured
without the external mating thread. The cable gland being suitable for S.W.A armoured cables and is
identified within type designation coding.
• The use of the compound tube and spacer along with the manufacture of the front entry component with
a female mating thread, to couple to an alternative main body, skid washer, seal and nut. The latter
replacing other component parts. This variant being identified within type designation coding.
• PXSS2K range can be fitted with the outer seal nut from the PX** range as an alternative.
• PX type glands may be fitted with armour cones with alternative diameters to allow the clamping of
smaller or larger armour wires.
• Alternative resin based sealing compound.
• An alternative outer seal arrangement to allow the fitting of the PX** glands to flexible conduit , including
a new Special Condition For Safe use.
• The introduction of an alternative skid washer to all glands covered by this certificate, made from the
same material as the glands.
• PX2K** range can be fitted with the outer seal nut assembly from the PKSS2K range as an alternative.

Date: 04 October 2011 Page 1 of 3 Rake Lane, Eccleston, Chester, CH4 9JN, England
Tel: +44 (0) 1244 670900
Fax: +44 (0) 1244 681330
Form 9530 Issue 1

CERTIFICATION
Gland Entry Entry Max. Max. SWA SWA, STA, strip PXSS2K2 PX** outer
size thread thread ‘B’ no. of Ø over (mm) armour, pliable outer seal seal sheath
version cores cores wire armour1 & sheath range range Ø
(mm) wire braid (mm) Ø (mm) (mm)
20s/16 M20 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 34 12.6 0.9 1.00 0 1.0 3.1 8.7 6.1 13.2
20s M20 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 34 12.6 0.9 1.25 0 1.0 6.1 11.7 9.5 15.9
20 M20 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 34 12.6 0.9 1.25 0 1.0 6.5 14.0 12.5 20.9
20L M20 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 34 12.6 0.9 1.25 0 1.0 10.0 15.9 N/A N/A
25s M25 x 1.5 M32 x 1.5 80 17.5 1.25 1.6 0 1.0 11.1 20.0 14.0 22.0
25 M25 x 1.5 M32 x 1.5 80 17.5 1.25 1.6 0 1.0 11.1 20.0 18.2 26.2
32 M32 x 1.5 M40 x 1.5 115 23.6 1.6 2.0 0 1.0 17.0 26.3 23.7 33.9
32L M32 x 1.5 M40 x 1.5 115 23.6 1.6 2.0 0 1.0 20.0 27.4 N/A N/A
40 M40 x 1.5 M50 x 1.5 185 30.0 1.6 2.0 0 1.0 22.0 32.1 27.9 40.4
50s M50 x 1.5 M63 x 1.5 274 36.6 2.0 2.5 0 1.0 29.5 38.2 35.2 46.7
50 M50 x 1.5 M63 x 1.5 343 41.0 2.0 2.5 0 1.0 35.6 44.1 40.4 53.1
63s M63 x 1.5 M75 x 1.5 466 47.9 2.0 2.5 0 1.0 40.1 50.1 45.6 59.4
63 M63 x 1.5 M75 x 1.5 585 53.7 2.0 2.5 0 1.0 47.2 56.0 54.6 65.9
75s M75 x 1.5 M90 x 2.0 727 59.9 2.0 2.5 0 1.0 52.8 62.0 59.0 72.1
75 M75 x 1.5 M90 x 2.0 837 64.3 2.5 3.0 0 1.0 59.1 68.0 66.7 78.5
90 M90 x 2.0 M100 x 2.0 1146 75.3 3.0 3. 5 0 1.6 66.6 79.4 76.2 90.4
100 M100 x 2.0 M115 x 2.0 1480 85.6 3.15 4.0 0 1.6 80.0 90.9 86.1 101.5
1
‘2KX’ and ‘2K’ variants; see below.
2
including PX** fitted with alternative outer nut as shown on drawing GA273

Tel: +44 (0) 1244 670900
Fax: +44 (0) 1244 681330
Form 9530 Issue 1

CERTIFICATION

PX
2KW Fitted with single plain armour cone & reversible armour sleeve
to suit SWA cables.
2KX Fitted with single grooved armour cone & reversible armour
sleeve to suit STA, strip armoured, pliable wire armoured and
braided cables.
2K Gland kit provided with 2 single armour cones (From the 2KW
& 2KX) and reversible armour sleeve to suit SWA, STA, strip
armoured, pliable wire armoured and braided cables.
B2KW Fitted with single plain armour cone & reversible armour
sleeve, but has no outer seal, nut or ferrule. The body is also
manufactured without the external mating thread. The cable
gland is suitable for SWA cables.
SS2K Alternative manufactured front entry component coupled to an
alternative main body, skid washer, seal and nut for use with
unarmoured cables.
SS2K-HC Same as SS2K but with alternative manufactured seal nut that
incorporates a hose connection.
RC Alternative manufactured front entry component attached to a
running coupler (of the same construction as the A2FRC
running coupler) and skid washer. Used with unarmoured
cables in rigid conduit.
2KPB Alternative two part cone assembly incorporating an additional
metallic continuity diaphragm for the use with inner lead
sheathed SWA, STA and braided cables.
/PB Alternative cone assembly incorporating an additional metallic
continuity diaphragm for use with inner lead sheathed SWA
and braided cables.
/VAR Optional metallic continuity device for use with variable speed
drive (VSD)/ variable frequency drive (VFD) cables.

Tel: +44 (0) 1244 670900
Fax: +44 (0) 1244 681330
Form 9530 Issue 1
5. LIFTING SLING CERTIFICATE
7
6. OPERATION MANUAL & HOOK UP
8
OPERATION MANUAL
Pressurized Service Module
P2005-TE-MA-0101
VER. 1.0
2016-04-11
Type No. P2005
Type Name Office Module
Modex Energy Shiliang. Xu Chunlei Steve
1.0 2016-04-11 INITIAL ISSUE Shiliang Chunlei Steve

VER DATE DESCRIPTION PRPD CHKD APRD
Title Operation Manual
Code P2005-TE-MA-0101 Ver. 1.0
Date 2016-04-11 Page 2/31
Table of Content
1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 3
2 Power & Signal Hook Up ............................................................................................................... 4
3 CPFG Panel .................................................................................................................................. 6
3.1 Standard Unit 3+1 Type............................................................................................................... 6
4 Power On & Power Off .................................................................................................................. 7
4.1 Power On ................................................................................................................................... 7
4.2 To resume system from shutdown ................................................................................................ 8
4.3 Power Off ................................................................................................................................... 8
5 Operation Instruction of the gas panel (CPFG) .............................................................................. 9
6 Normal Operation .......................................................................................................................17
6.1 Network Control ........................................................................................................................ 17
6.2 Lighting .................................................................................................................................... 17
6.3 Cooling & Heating ..................................................................................................................... 17
6.4 Thermostats ............................................................................................................................. 17
7 Emergency Events .....................................................................................................................19
8 By-Pass Modes ..........................................................................................................................20
9 Troubleshooting .........................................................................................................................21
10 Conditions of Certificate .............................................................................................................22
11 Periodically Check & Maintenance Procedure .............................................................................23
11.1 Maintenance of CPFG Enclosure ............................................................................................... 23
11.2 Functional Test of CPFG ........................................................................................................... 24
11.3 Calibration of Gas Detectors ...................................................................................................... 24
11.4 Sealing Rubber Strip of Doors.................................................................................................... 29
12 Door Entries ...............................................................................................................................30
13 ANNEX A. CPFG Battery Charging Instruction .............................................................................31

1. INTRODUCTION
Date 2016-04-11 Page 3/31
1 Introduction
Modex pressurized cabin module is designed for hazardous area rated Zone 1, which is exposed to explosive
/ ignitable gases such as CH4 and H2S. The cabin is equipped with pressurization & ventilation system and a
fire and gas system to survey pressure, fire and dangerous gas contaminations. The fire and gas system
works independent from the rig fire and gas system and comprises of a gas panel with the relevant sensors
and required backup systems to allow stable operation in case of loss of power from rig side. The
pressurization system provides a pressurized inner environment where non intrinsic safe equipment is allowed
to be operated. The fire and gas system can detect emergency situations and shut down the system
according to approved control logic in case of emergency of any kind in the operation range as mentioned
above.
The cabin module's main characteristics are as follows:
• Offshore container certified with DNV 2.7-1& DNV 2.7-2, with dimension and weight below:
Dimension Weight
Length 6,058 mm Tare Weight 8700kg
Width 2,438 mm Payload 1300kg
Height 2,896 mm Max Gross Weight 10000kg
• Lifting set complied with DNV 2.7-1.
• A60 fire integrity, complied with IMO requirements.
• ATEX/IECEX electrical equipment.
• 3 x CH4 detectors, 1 x H2S detector, 2 x Smoke detectors.
• CH4 gas detectors in air inlet and main room, alarm at 20%LEL、shutdown at 40%LEL.
• CH4 gas detector in air lock, alarm at 15% LEL、 shutdown at 25% LEL.
• Customized internal layout and configuration, suit for all kinds of offshore applications.
• Designed ambient temperature: -20~+40℃, minimum temperature class: T3

2. POWER & SIGNAL HOOK UP
4
Date 2016-04-11 Page 4/31
2 Power & Signal Hook Up
To power up the cabin module and connect all the interface cables please refer to the below instruction.
Refer to following utility schedule to connect utilities / services to the unit:
No. Description Tag Size & Type Rating Required

Main power supply: 3Px10mm²+E
(AWG.7),380-690V,Max.32A,50/60Hz;
Ex junction box with 1 x
Power F&G Power supply: 110-230V, Max.
P1 92-EJ-001 M25, 6 x M20 cable Essential
Junction Box 5A,2x2.5mm²+E(AWG.13),50/60Hz;
glands available.
Emergency Stop Power supply:
230V,2x2.5mm²+E(AWG.13),50/60Hz;
Ex junction box with 1 x
Data/PA
P3 92-TJ-001 M25, 3 x M20 cable For Network and Loudspeaker. Essential
Junction Box
glands available.
Ex junction box with 10x
Alarm Voltage-free contacts, connected to rig
P2 92-CJ-001 M20 cable glands Essential
Junction Box system.
available.
16 mm2 earth wire, connected to rig
P4 Earth NA M12 bolts x 2 Essential
system.
The Main Power Supply shall be connected to operate the internal non intrinsic safe equipment and the
pressurization fan for the fire and gas system.
The Emergency Power (F&G Power) Supply shall be connected to ensure safe and stable power supply or
the gas control system and allow surveillance even under loss of main power. On 2.7-2 approved modules
as well a backup battery will be installed to ensure additional safety in case the emergency power supply
would be lost.
The Emergency Stop Power is to be connected for Norsok compliant operation on installations where such
interface and power supply signal is available. If it is not available, then it is possible to bridge this contact
inside the JB and loop it with the Emergency Power Supply.

Date 2016-04-11 Page 5/31
P1. Power JB
92-EJ-001
POWER JUNCTION BOX
Main Power Switch
92-ECS-001
EX SAFETY SWITCH 1
F&G Power Switch
92-ECS-002
EX SAFETY SWITCH 2
P2. Alarm JB
92-CJ-001 Alarm
JUNCTION BOX
P3. Data/PA JB P4. Earth Boss

92-TJ-001 Data
JUNCTION BOX
Note: To bypass the Emergency Stop Power (230V single phase) loop the terminals “8” and “9” (“NO”
contact of 230V Ex relay) in power junction box (92-EJ-001). This will disable at the operators risks the 230V
remote emergency stop function.
Please allow for the following additional caution steps prior to power up:
1. Please verify the cable gland integrity for all new installed parts and cables.
2. Please verify that all Exe and Exd enclosures are properly closed and torqued.
3. Please ensure proper grounding connection to the installation via the earth bosses.
3. CPFG PANEL
Date 2016-04-11 Page 6/31
3 CPFG Panel
3.1 Standard Unit 3+1 Type

1. Gas Level Indicator
2. LED Panel
3. Reset/ Power On
4. PURGE BY-PASS Switch
5. Fan Control Switch
6. PLC Power Switch
7. POWER BY-PASS Switch (Default: 0)
Note：
1. The gas level indication of No.3 HC gas detector
(in air lock) is displayed on the screen of No.3 HC
gas detector, not on CPFG panel.
2. The HC gas detector fitted in air lock should
comply with IEC60079-29, which is the
requirement of IECEX.
Figure 1. CPFG Panel Layout
MAIN INLET OUTLET SAFE FIRE/SMOK HC GAS HC GAS

LIGHT STATUS AIR FLOW FAN H2S GAS
POWER DAMPER DAMPER POWER E No.1 No.2
OPERATION
ON STEADY AVAILABLE OPEN OPEN FAN RUN AVAILABLE ALARM LOW % LEL LOW % LEL LOW PPM
AL
PRESSURE
SLOW FLASH BY-PASSED FAULT LOW CAL LOW CAL LOW CAL
FAIL
Overpressur OPEN OPEN OPEN

FAST FLASH
e CIRCUIT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT
         
         
EMERGENC Air INLET OUTLET PURGE COMMON HC GAS HC GAS
LIGHT STATUS
Y POWER DAMPER DAMPER
FAN TIMING ALARM No.1 No.2
H2S GAS
Pressure
OPERATION FAN
ON STEADY AVAILABLE
AL
CLOSE CLOSE PURGED FAULT HI % LEL HI % LEL HIGH PPM
STOP
SLOW FLASH O/L FAIL PURGING
OPEN OPEN OPEN
FAST FLASH
CIRCUIT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT
4. POWER ON & POWER OFF
Date 2016-04-11 Page 7/31
4 Power On & Power Off
4.1 Power On
The module is built to be able to manage several different power supply voltages. The adjustment of the
relevant power supply is to be made manually via two voltage selector switches. One is located in the CPFG
and the other one in the distribution box (92-EL-001). These two select switches shall be set to correct
position according to incoming main power supply.
Failure to correctly set these switches will result in serious damage to internal components of the
CPFG panel and loads on main transformer.
Follow the details steps to correctly select the power voltage setup:
1. Open the fire & gas panel CPFG, switch “VOLTAGE SELECTOR” to corresponding Position –
Voltage (690V, 600V, 480V, 415V, 380, 440V) according to connected main power supply.
2. Switch the “VOLTAGE SWITCH” in the distribution box (92-EL-001) to the corresponding Position-
Voltage, (380V, 415V, 440V, 480V, 600V, 690V)
NOTE: If 460V power input, the voltage switch shall be selected to 440V.
3. Switch on main power via Safety Switch 1 (92-ECS-001).
NOTE that Emergency Stop Power (230V single phase) must be supplied, or short cut terminal 8
and 9 in power junction box(92-EJ-001) to disable the remote emergency stop function.
4. Switch on the emergency power (110-230V) for CPFG by Safety Switch 2 (92-ECS-002)
NOTE: This power SHALL BE connected otherwise the system won’t be operational, only F&G is
available.
5. Switch “POWER BY-PASS” to “OFF”: The CPFG will then be operable.
6. Switch “PURGE BY-PASS” to “0”: The system is set on normal operational mode.
7. Switch “PLC POWER” to “ON”: PLC starts to initialize. After PLC initialization, Gas Indicator will
turn on.
Date 2016-04-11 Page 8/31
8. Switch “RESET” to clear up an eventual the common alarm and then rotate “FAN SWITCH” to
“RUN”: Fire dampers will start to open. After dampers have opened the pressurization fan will
startup automatically. Once the dampers are open, the LEDs for "Fan Run" & "Air Flow" & "Air
Pressure" will be enabled. Once in and during the purging progress, the LED "Purging" will blink on
the gas panel. After purging cycle has been finished, the Purging LED keep steady on.
9. Switch “RESET/0/POWER” to “START”: The safe power will be enable to energize the transformer
to supply the system.
10. Close all Exd enclosures and ensure integrity and correct torques for all bolts.
4.2 To resume system from shutdown
1. Clear / rectify any hazardous factors before resuming the system.
2. On the CPFG panel, switch “RESET-0-POWER” to “RESET”.
3. Switch “Fan control” to “RUN”
4. Switch “RESET-0-POWER” to “START”.
4.3 Power Off
1. Switch “PLC POWER” to “0”.
2. For long-term power off, or the cabin is to be moved, following steps shall be carried out.
3. Switch the two Safety Switches（92-ECS-001 and 92-ECS-002）to “OFF”.
4. Disconnect power supply from Safety Switches.

5. OPERATION INSTRUCTION OF CPFG
Date 2016-04-11 Page 9/31
5 Operation Instruction of the gas panel (CPFG)
The gas control panel has been designed to operate as a stand-alone system to allow independent operation
from other safety systems on the relevant installation.
The system consists of an Exd enclosure containing a PLC configured with the relevant software to carry out
the control functions and the following equipment:
1. Main Incoming Terminals Rated 750V 85A 3 Phase
2. 1 x 380/415/440/480/600/690Vac to 440Vac 3Ph 2KVA Transformer
3. 1 x 10A MPCB for Transformer Protection
4. 1 x Voltage Selector Switch for Transformer Input Voltage
5. Purge Fan Contactor and Overload Relay and MCB
6. Main Power Contactor
7. 280-480Vac/24Vdc Power Supply Unit and MCB
8. 110-240Vac/24Vdc Power Supply Unit and Fuse Terminal
9. Diode De-Coupler for Combining Power Supply 24Vdc
10. Fire and Gas Interfaces
11. Air Pressure Switch Interfaces
12. Remote Alarm Interfaces
13. Alarm and Operational Status Indication Lights
14. Field Terminals and fuse terminals
15. Mounted on the face of the enclosure, 3 Position Rotary Selector Switch
The CPFG is supplied with two separate power supplies and both supplies must be isolated from the source
elsewhere before opening the CPFG Panel. As an added safety factor all control voltages are 24Vdc and are
either Exd or Exi systems interfaced via galvanic isolated safety barriers. The control voltage 24Vdc can be
isolated by locking off the Switch located RH side Top Row front side of Exd enclosure.
The control pushbuttons operate as follows:
a) Power By-Pass Switch Directs Power Out without the CPFG PLC being in Control
b) PLC Power Switch turns off the PLC 24Vdc Control Power
Date 2016-04-11 Page 10/31
c) Fan Stop/0/Run switch Stops and Starts the Fan
d) Purge By-Pass 1/0/2 Switch is for Operating under certain circumstances Under Hot Work Permit
e) Reset/0/Power Switch is used to Start Safe Power and Reset system after an Alarm Has
Occurred.
The PLC can be reset by switching off the control power rotary switch and switching back on again. Refer to
manual for instructions on error codes.
The CPFG is fitted with a Low Temperature Thermostat that is design to prevent the PLC Operating below -
5degC Temperature a relay will latch as the temperature rises above this temperature set point and the
Relay will latch on the Low Temperature has no Executive Action as it is assumed that once operational the
temperature will not fall below the -5degC.
The system will function by operating the fan start switch, the pressurization fan will run creating an air flow
which will in turn cause the cabin to become pressurized.
Once airflow has been detected, the Purge Timing period will commence, if there has not been a loss of Air
Pressure during the purge period. The system will proceed to ready to switch on safe power to safe area
equipment.
Pressing the Safe Power push button will energize the main contactor C1 after completion of the air purge
cycle. This will provide power at mains voltage and frequency to power transformer, located in the cabin.
The system will operate in a watching mode monitoring the Air Pressure, Fire and Gas Detection.
Should an alarm situation arise of either Loss of Air Pressure Loss, Fire, Smoke, Gas at Low LEL or High
LEL the PLC will carry out the correct procedure in either alarming and or shutting down the system.
The system incorporates a number of visual indication lights which are used for monitoring status or defining
various faults. These lights also are capable of flashing at different flash rates (Slow or Fast) refer table
below:
Date 2016-04-11 Page 11/31
# Light Colour Status Function

CPFG Main Power On Steady Operational
1 Green
Supply Flashing Failed
Emergency Power On Steady Operational
2 Green
Supply Flashing Failed
3 Air Flow Amber On Steady Operational
4 Air Pressure Amber On Steady Operational
5 Inlet Damper Open Green On Steady Open
6 Inlet Damper Closed Red On Steady Closed
7 Outlet Damper Open Green On Steady Open
8 Outlet Damper Closed Red On Steady Closed
On Steady Fan Running
9 Fan Run Green Slow Flash Air Pressure Failed
Fast Flash Pressure >170PA
On Steady Fan Stopped
10 Fan Stopped Red
Slow Flash Overload Relay Tripped
On Steady Main Power Available
11 Main Power Green
Slow Flash By-Pass in Operation
Red On Steady Purge Timing Complete
12 Purge Timing
Slow Flash Purging
On Steady Alarm
13 Fire / Smoke Amber
Slow Flash Open Circuit
On Steady Common Fault
14 Common Alarm Red
Slow Flash Incorrect Polarity
On Steady Low% LEL Detected
CH4 Gas #1 (Low
15 Amber Slow Flash Low Calibration
LEL %)
CH4 Gas #1 (High On Steady High% LEL Detected
16 Amber
LEL %) Fast Flash Short Circuit
On Steady Low% LEL Detected
CH4 Gas #2 (Low
17 Amber Slow Flash Low Calibration
LEL %)
CH4 Gas #2 (High On Steady High% LEL Detected
18 Amber
LEL %) Fast Flash Short Circuit
On Steady Low PPM Detected
19 H2S Gas #3 (Low PPM) Amber Slow Flash Low Calibration
On Steady High PPM Detected
20 H2S Gas #3 (High PPM) Amber
Fast Flash Short Circuit
Date 2016-04-11 Page 12/31
Also viewable is the PLC Data Access Transfer Display. This item is used to display the PLC Operational
Status items such as Gas Channels as a Percentage of CH4 Gas, or when fitted PPM of H2S Gas, this is
mode suitable for calibration or testing a Detector.
The DAT also can be used to input the timing range for both the Purge Time and Purge Loss Time before
shutdown, for setting High and Low Gas LEL Set Points and for Changing the Interface Relay Philosophy.
Normal Relay Philosophy is Fail Safe, so that an Alarm condition will de-energize the relevant interface relay.
The Data Access Transfer Display can also be used to see any fault error codes that are generated by the
PLC and can be used to take preventative actions if applicable.
To monitor or edit the DAT：
1. Press the INT key or BIT to enter the desired mode. The element number flashes (if not protected)
Channel 0,1 and 3 are protected as Gas #1, #2 and Gas #3 percentage Gas and Channel 2 is protected
as Fire Smoke indication.
2. Use the up/down key to scroll through the list of elements.
3. Press ENTER to select the element you want to edit. The element number becomes steady and the
data flashes if it is not protected (Channels 3 and 4) Purge time and purge delay time. (Note if the
element is protected the enter key is ignored).
4. Use the up/down key to change the data. Bit values toggle between ‘ON’ and ‘Off’. Integer values
increment or decrement. Holding down the up/down key causes the integer value to increment or
decrement quickly. (Note if the data is protected or undefined pressing the up/down key scrolls to the
next element in the list.)
5. Press ENTER to accept new data. Press ESC or INT/BIT to discard the new data.
6. The function keys F1 and F2 correspond to bits and can be used throughout the control program as
desired. They have no effect on Bit or Integer monitoring.
The DAT receives power when it is plugged into the controller, pre-installed. Upon power up, the DAT
performs a self-test. If the test fails, the DAT displays an error code. All indication lights are deactivated and
the DAT does not respond to any essential presses. After a successful, self-test the DAT reads the DAT
Date 2016-04-11 Page 13/31
function file to determine its configuration. Following a successful power up sequence, the DAT enters the
monitoring mode.
The modifications are performed using the DAT (Data Access Terminal) mounted on the front of the PLC
Module. Using the Front Keys (Esc) and (Ok) the various Channels can be accessed, use the (Scroll Key) to
advance or detract numbers.
The following Table is to assist in altering the Accessible Parameters：
Channel Description and Function
0 Gas Channel No 1 (CH4 Read Only) Gas Percentage
1 Gas Channel No 2 (CH4 Read Only) Gas Percentage
2 Fire/Smoke Channel (Read Only)
3 Gas Channel No 3 (H2S Read Only) Gas PPM
4 Enter Purge Time Period (In Seconds)
5 Enter Air Failed Pre-Audible Alarm Time Period (In Seconds)
6 Enter Air Failed Delay Time Period (In Seconds)
7 Enter UPS Delay Time Period (In Seconds)
8 Set Gas Channel 1 Low LEL Set Point (5..40%)
9 Set Gas Channel 1 High LEL Set Point (10..60%)
10 Set Gas Channel 3 Low PPM Set Point (5..20PPM)
11 Set Gas Channel 3 High PPM Set Point (10..25PPM)
12 Not used
13 Audible Alarms Enter code 222 for LOP or 223 for No LOP Audible Alarm
14 Not Used
19 to47 Not Used

Date 2016-04-11 Page 14/31
Error Conditions:
The DAT checks for controller faults every 10 seconds. When the DAT detects a controller fault, the display
shows FL in the element number field and the value of the controller major fault word (S2:6) is displayed in
the value field.
When the DAT detects an error in its own operation, it displays the error screen this consists of Err 01 and a
two-digit code.
The DAT can experience two types of error internal errors and communication errors. Internal errors are non-
recoverable, when the DAT experiences an internal error it displays the error screen and the tool will not
respond to any key presses. Remove and re-install the DAT, if this does not clear the error the DAT must be
replaced. If the DAT experiences a communication error, the error message screen displays. During these
error conditions, the tool will respond to the up/down key the BIT and Integer key and the ESC key. Pressing
any of these keys clears the error message. Any on-going element modifications are discarded.
Error Code Description Caused By Recommended Action

00 Interface Time Out Communications traffic Add SVC instructions to ladder program.
Remove and re-insert DAT if failure
01-02 Power up test failure Internal failure
persists replace the unit.
03-07 Internal error Internal failure
Another device has Release file ownership by the other
08 Processor owned ownership of the device.
controller
Cannot access that file Release file ownership by the other
09 Access denied because another device device.
has ownership
31-34 Internal error Internal failure
Understanding the Controller LED status, the controller status LEDs provide a mechanism to determine the
current status of the controller if a program device is not present or available.
LED Color Indicates

Off No input Power
Power
Green Power On
Off Controller is not in the Run Mode or Rem Run
Run Green Controller is in Run mode or Rem Run
Green Flashing System is not in Run mode, Memory Module transfer in progress
Fault Off No fault detected
Date 2016-04-11 Page 15/31
Red Flashing Faulted user program

Red Processor hardware fault or critical fault
Off No forces installed
Force
Amber Forces installed
Battery Off Battery OK
Low Red Battery needs replacement
Off
COMM 0 Flashes when communications are active
Green
Off User configured communications Mode 15 active
DCOMM
Green Default communications Mode 15 active
Off Input is not energized
Inputs
Amber Input is energized (Logic Status)
Off Output is not energized
Outputs
Amber Output is energized (Logic Status)
When an Error exists in the PLC：
If the LEDs The following

Probable Cause Recommended Action
Indicate Error Exists
No Line power Verify proper line voltage and

Power supply overloaded connections to controller
No input power or
All LEDs off power supply This problem can occur
error intermittently if power supply is
Power supply overloaded
overloaded when output loading
and temperature varies.
Cycle power by reset
Processor hardware error switch; contact your local
Power and Fault PLC rep.
Hardware faulted
LEDs on solid
Verify connections to the
Loose wiring
controller
1 Monitor Status file word S:6 for

major error code, ref manual for
more info
2 Remove hardware、software
Power LED on
Hardware/software major condition causing fault
and
Application Fault
Fault LED fault detected 3 Clear major error halted
Flashing flag, BIT S2:1/13
4 Attempt a controller Run mode
entry if unsuccessful repeat
recommended action steps above
or contact PLC rep
Date 2016-04-11 Page 16/31
The Gas detection calibration contained within the PLC program should not require further calibration, as the
software is not subject to calibration drift. Check the signal by applying the following：
No Gas 25% Gas 50% Gas

DVM Reading 4.0mA 8mA 12mA
Gas Reading 0% 25% 50%
Any error will be detected in the calibration from the Gas detection head, apply calibration to Gas detection
head Zero and Span Adjustments.
The Fire and Smoke Detection requires no calibration except regular smoke tests and manual call point tests.
The airflow switch and air pressure switches are pre-set, external calibration against a Dead Weight tester is
recommended annually. The Fan contactor overload has been set in automatic mode and should not require
further maintenance.
6. NORMAL OPERATION
4
Date 2016-04-11 Page 17/31
6 Normal Operation
6.1 Network Control
The network will be isolated in case of emergency. The network wires are connected to the Ex relay installed
in the data junction box（92-TJ-001). The Ex relay is controlled by CPFG, and will be de-energized in case
of emergency.
6.2 Lighting
The roof lights are controlled by light switch (92-ELS-001) beside the B15 door.
The emergency lights (92-EXL-001/002) can support automatic lighting at least 60 minutes in emergency
events.
6.3 Cooling & Heating
The air conditioning temperature is controlled by the thermostat (92-ITS-001/002) beside the B15 door. The
adjustable range of the thermostat is 20~30degC, the air conditioner unit would not be started if the ambient
temperature is lower than 20degC in order to avoid freezing inside the AC evaporator.
Note that the AC thermostat has a simple three speed control switch and one speed must be selected to
enable the cooling function.
The Heating temperature is controlled by the thermostat (92-ITS-003) beside the B15 door. The adjustable
range of the thermostat is 0~30degC.The heater and pressurized fan are interlocked, the heater would not
be operated if the pressurized fan is not start.
Note: Air Conditioning unit and heater are interlocked and only either function can be operated at the same
time. For more information, please refer to HVAC operation manual.
6.4 Thermostats
The distribution box（92-EL-001）is fitted with two Temperature Thermostats (92-ITS-004 and 92-ITS-005) ,
to avoid some equipment operating in extreme environment for extending its service life.
92-ITS-004 (Operating temperature: -20 to 80 ℃) is design to prevent the heating thermostat(92-ITS-003

Date 2016-04-11 Page 18/31
operating temperature 0 to 50 ℃) switching to operate below 0 ℃. If the room temperature is below 0 ℃, the
heater can automatically heat the room by 92-ITS-004, and only when the room temperature arises above 0 ℃
then the heating thermostat can be operated.
92-ITS-005 is design to prevent the lights、sockets and CPFG battery charger operating below 0 ℃ or
above 35 ℃,only the room temperature in the range of 0 to 35 ℃, these components can be operated.
7. EMERGENCY EVENTS
Date 2016-04-11 Page 19/31
7 Emergency Events
In any of following events, the safe power will automatically shut down, in order to prevent non-ex equipment
running in following hazardous situations:
• Loss of pressure (Indoor pressure – outdoor pressure < 50 Pa for more than 30s)
• Over pressure (Indoor pressure – outdoor pressure >170 Pa)
• Smoke detected
• MCP manually activated
• High LEL% CH4 detected
• High LEL% H2S detected
• ESD manually activated
Meanwhile the audible & visual alarm will be activated and corresponding signal will be sent to user’s system
through the external signal junction box.1
Table 1 Emergency Events
Event Alarm Level Shutdown Level
Loss of Pressure Pin - Pout < 50 Pa, duration > 10s Pin - Pout < 50 Pa, duration > 30s
Over Pressure Pin - Pout > 170 Pa, duration 0s Fan Stop Pin - Pout >170 Pa, Shutdown due to LOP
Smoke detected Smoke detected Smoke detected
MCP manually activated MCP manually activated MCP manually activated

CH4 detected in air inlet
CH4 level > 20% LEL CH4 level > 40% LEL
and main room
CH4 detected in air lock CH4 level > 15% LEL CH4 level > 25% LEL
H2S detected H2S level >10PPM H2S level >20PPM
ESD pressed NA ESD pressed
To restart the system from above events, following procedure SHALL be followed:
1. Clear/rectify the hazardous factors before resuming the system.
2. On CPFG panel, switch “RESET-Power on” to “R”.
3. Switch “Fan control” to Start
4. Switch “Reset-Power on” to Power on.
1 The audible alarm can be muted manually, while the visual alarm will be still on until the danger has been eliminated.
8. BY-PASS MODES
Date 2016-04-11 Page 20/31
8 By-Pass Modes
By-Pass Mode vs Functionality
Mode \ Function Purging LOP Fire & Gas ESD

Purge By-Pass 1 Disabled Disabled Operational Operational
Purge By-Pass 2 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
Power By-Pass Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
1. Purge By-Pass Mode 1: Switch “PURGE BY-PASS” to “1”. In this mode, the purging step is skipped.
The Fire & Gas detection is operational. The alarms will be activated when fire & gas detected and
the safe power will be shutdown.
2. Purge By-Pass Mode 2: Switch “PURGE BY-PASS” to “2”. In this mode, the purging step is skipped.
The Fire & Gas detection is disabled. The system will close the fire damper and ventilation fan but
will not shut down the safe power when fire & gas detected.
3. Power By-Pass Mode: Switch “POWER BY-PASS” to “1”. In this mode, the CPFG is not operational.
Power is distributed directly to the end electrical components. The system will not react to any
emergency situation.
NOTE: The By-Pass modes should only be used for testing purpose.
In normal working mode, the system shall be set with no by-pass function
(ie. PURGE BY-PASS at position 0, POWER BY-PASS at position 0).

9. TROUBLESHOOTING
Date 2016-04-11 Page 21/31
9 Troubleshooting
N
Issue Suggestion
o
1. Check if the doors, hatch are well closed and sealed. Especially pay
The fan is blowing, but the attention to the sealing rubber strips of the doors, it may loss the
1 cabin can‘t get sealing function.
pressurized. 2. Check if the air-in flow rate meets the specification.
3. The fan may running reversely.
The fan is running

2 reversely. 1. Change the phase sequence of main power supply.
1. Make sure all the hazardous factors are eliminated.

After power off, the system 2. In normal working mode, the system needs to purge before startup.
3 can’t start up. 3. When the CPFG power on, the system needs about 2 mins for
initialization. During self-examination, the system can’t start up and it
may activate alarm due to low pressure.
1. Check if any alarms appear on the CPFG panel and try to remove and
The pressurized fan can’t reset the alarms.
start or the fan automatic 2. Check if the over pressure alarm has been activated (Over pressure
4 stop after starting for a alarm -Fan run green led with fast flash) and check if the over pressure
while alarm is caused by damaged air flow switch.
3. Check if any wires of pressurized fan circuit are loose.
1. Check if this alarm can be reset

Appear common alarm on 2. Check if the emergency stop buttons (internal and external) are
5 CPFG panel and without pressed
any other alarms 3. Check if the emergency power is not supplied.
4. Check if No.3 CH4 detector appear alarm on its screen.
10. CONDITIONS OF CERTIFICATION
Date 2016-04-11 Page 22/31
10 Conditions of Certificate
1. The air used to purge the cabin shall be taken from a non-hazardous area.
2. A function check on the safety function of the fire and gas system, pressure switches and calibration
of gas detectors shall be carried out periodically.
3. When installing the sink, please ensure that escape exit shall be easily access and water pipes transit the
MCT shall be insulated to compliance with A60 insulation integrity.

11. PERIODICALLY CHECK & MAINTENANCE
PROCEDURE
Date 2016-04-11 Page 23/31
11 Periodically Check & Maintenance Procedure
11.1 Maintenance of CPFG Enclosure
The enclosure shall be maintained at regular intervals in accordance with the national regulations. It is
recommended to establish an inspection plan in accordance with IEC60079-17.
During inspection the parts of protection mode must be inspected with special attention.
1. Do the body, covers and windows have cracks or damages?
2. The flange flameproof joint is clean, greased and without damage or corrosion? And are there all closing
elements of the enclosure?
3. Is there any corrosion on the threads in the cable entries?
4. Are the cable entries, blanking plugs and terminals well tightened?
5. Flameproof joints have to be permanently greased in order to ensure their protection against corrosion,
water tightness and blocking problems.
6. To clean remains of grease and corrosion without using sharp metallic tools (these can damage the joint
surface) and to grease with greases thermically and chemically stable with drop point >200 Deg C. I.e.
MOLYKOTE BR2 Plus by Dow Corning.
7. If interstice of flange flameproof joint is higher the 0,2mm the equipment has to be sent to the factory for
repairing.
8. The reparation of the glass seal has to be done by manufacturer. User is unauthorized for replacing this
kind of glass-seal.
9. When enclosure requires repainting, you will have to be careful to ensure that the flameproof joints are
completely free from paint.

Date 2016-04-11 Page 24/31
11.2 Functional Test of CPFG
1. Loss of Pressure (LOP):
Open the door for greater than 10s, alarm will be given;
Open the door for greater than 30s, the safe power will be shutdown. After internal pressure recovers,
the purging cycle will be restarted.
2. Fire Alarm:
Simulate fire alarm by active the smoke detectors or Manual Call Point, A&V alarm will arise, the safe
power will be shutdown, inlet & outlet fire dampers closed and ventilation fan stopped.
3. Gas Detection:
Simulate gas detection with sample gas to active the gas detection alarm, A&V alarm will arise, the safe
power will be shutdown, inlet & outlet fire dampers closed and ventilation fan stopped.
4. ESD
Press the ESD button from internal or external, A&V alarm will arise, the safe power will be shutdown,
inlet & outlet fire dampers closed and ventilation fan stopped.
11.3 Calibration of Gas Detectors
WARNING：Sensor replacement/servicing of detectors should be carried out by makers or an

approved service center unless suitable training has been received. The X-Gard gas detectors
should be calibrated every three months to ensure accuracy.
11.3.1 CH4 detectors in air inlet and main room (X-Gard - CROWCON)
1. Open the junction box of the detector by unscrewing the lid in an anticlockwise direction (having
loosened the retaining grub-screw first).
2. Check that all electrical connections have been made and are correct.
Date 2016-04-11 Page 25/31
3. Measure the voltage across the ‘+’ and ‘-’ terminals and check a minimum supply of 10VDC is
present.
4. Leave the detector to stabilize for at least 1 hour.
5. To zero the detector, connect the DVM to the test points marked ‘TP1’ and ‘TP2’ on the amplifier PCB.
Note: At the test points, zero will read 40 mV = 4 mA. Full scale deflection (CH4-100% LEL) will read
200 mV = 20 mA. There is a current clamp of 25mA on the 4-20mA output.
Zeroing the detector:
6. Ensure you are clean air. Adjust the ‘ZERO’ pot on the amplifier (which is accessible via a hole in the
PCB cover) until the DVM reads 40 mV. Check that the control equipment display reads zero.
Calibrating the detector:
7. Apply calibration gas concentration (concentration should be at least 50% LEL) to the detector at a
flow rate of 0.6 liter/minute via a flow adaptor.
8. Allow the gas reading to stabilize (usually 30 to 60 seconds) and adjust the ‘CAL’ pot until the DVM
reads the appropriate reading (ie120mV = 12mA = 50% LEL). If the concentration of the calibration
gas used is not 50% LEL, the following formula can be used to calculate the reading:
(160 / Range x Gas) + 40 = mV setting
Example: Apply 80% LEL calibration gas to the CH4 detector.
(160 /100 x 80) + 40 = 168 mV
9. Remove the gas and allow the sensor to completely settle before rechecking the zero setting.
10. Close the junction box of the detector ensuring that the lid is securely tightened, and the grub-screw
is secured.
11. The detector is now operational.
11.3.2 H2S detector (X-Gard - CROWCON)
Note: The X-Gard gas detectors should be calibrated every three months to ensure accuracy.
1. Open the junction box of the detector by unscrewing the lid in an anticlockwise direction (having
loosened the retaining grub-screw first).

Date 2016-04-11 Page 26/31
2. Check that all electrical connections have been made and are correct.
3. Apply power to the detector and ensure the minimum supply voltage of 10 VDC is present at the ‘+’
and ‘_’ terminals of the detector.
4. Leave the detector to stabilize for at least 1 hour.
5. Connect a digital volt meter (DVM) to the test points on the amplifier PCB. Note: At the test points,
zero will read 40 mV = 4 mA. Full scale deflection (H2S-25PPM) will read 200 mV = 20 mA.
Zeroing the detector：
6. Ensure you are in clean air. Adjust the ‘ZERO’ pot on the amplifier (which is accessible via a hole
in the PCB cover) until the DVM reads 40 mV. Check that the control equipment display reads zero.
Calibrating the detector：
7. Apply calibration gas (concentration should be at least 50% of 25PPM) to the detector at a flow rate
of 0.6 liter/minute via a flow adaptor.
8. Allow the gas reading to stabilize (usually 30 to 60 seconds) and adjust the ‘CAL’ pot until the
DVM reads the appropriate reading. To calculate the reading use the formula and example below:
(160/Range x Gas) + 40 = mV setting
Example: Apply 20PPM calibration gas to the H2S detector.
(160/25 x 20) + 40 = 168mV
9. Remove the gas and allow the sensor to completely settle before rechecking the zero setting.
10. Close the junction box of the detector ensuring that the lid is securely tightened, and the grub-screw
is secured.
11. The detector is now operational.
11.3.3 CH4 detector in air lock (Ultima XE - MSA)
INITIAL Calibration：
When a new sensor module is placed in the unit, an INITIAL Calibration is recommended. This procedure
enables the unit to gather data about the sensor to make accurate decisions for the CHANGE SENSOR
function and the CAL FAULT function to work properly. During normal use, INITIAL calibration should
Date 2016-04-11 Page 27/31
only be used when a standard calibration will not clear a fault condition due to use of incorrect calibration
gas or another similar situation.
The INITIAL calibration is accomplished by: simultaneously pressing the ZERO and CALIBRATE buttons
of the Ultima Calibrator. (To calibrate the unit, a calibrator is necessary, please ask supplier for
purchasing: Ultima Calibrator P/N 809997.)
After starting the INITIAL calibration:
• The display should show "APPLY ZERO GAS"
• The word "ICAL" on the display distinguishes an INITIAL Calibration from a regular calibration. If "ICAL"
does not appear, abort the calibration; then, retry the above procedure.
Note: The zero or calibration process can be aborted at any time simply by pressing any button during the
30 second countdown on the Calibrator while aiming at the unit.
• The remainder of the procedure is now the same as that for a regular calibration, as described in the
following procedure.
Standard Calibration:
While the Ultima X Series Gas Monitor is factory-calibrated, it is good practice to calibrate the unit once it
is installed in its final environmental destination.
A standard calibration includes a "zero" and "span" procedure as described in the following procedures.
Zeroing:
1. Ensure you are in clean air, press the ZERO button on the Calibrator.
2. Point the Calibrator at the Ultima X Series Monitor display, press the CALIBRATE button, the display
will show a countdown from 30 to 0 seconds, after the 30 second countdown, the display alternates
between "CAL" and a value. This value is the actual reading of the gas concentration the sensor is
detecting.
• Once the gas value on the display is stable, the alternating display stops. If the calibration is
successful, the display will show END
• If CAL FAULT appears on the display, this indicates: An unsuccessful attempt to zero or calibrate
Date 2016-04-11 Page 28/31
the Ultima X Series Monitor. To extinguish the CAL FAULT, a complete, successful calibration
procedure must be performed.
3. If only a ZERO was performed, the procedure is complete and the user should return the calibration
equipment to the cal kit. If a CAL was performed, the gas monitor will continue to the "span" sequence
as described in the following section.
Spanning:
1. During a regular calibration, the Ultima X Series Gas Monitor automatically begins the span countdown
after a successful zeroing of the unit. The span countdown is 30 seconds.
2. Locate the span gas cylinder and the Calibration Kit Flow Controller.
3. Screw the Flow Controller onto the top of the span gas cylinder.
4. Push the smaller end of the Tube Assembly over the gas outlet of the Flow Controller and ensure that
the tubing completely covers the gas outlet.
5. Connect the other end of the tubing over the sensor inlet and push the calibration cap over the entire
sensor inlet.
6. Turn ON the gas flow by turning the flow controller knob.
• It is good practice to have all calibration components previously assembled.
• Ensure that any calibration gases are applied during the 30-second count down period.
• If a CAL FAULT indication is on the Ultima X Series Gas Monitor display before the user is able to
apply the gas, a steady state gas condition was reached, causing the unit to use a wrong reading
as a span indication.
• It is necessary to restart the calibration process to clear this condition.
7. After the 30 second countdown:
• The display alternates between "CAL" and a value. This value is the actual reading of the gas
concentration the sensor is detecting.
• Once the gas value on the display is stable, the alternating display stops. If the calibration is
successful, the display will show END for approximately two seconds.
Date 2016-04-11 Page 29/31
• No user adjustments are necessary.
• The display will show the span gas value while the span gas is flowing to the unit.
8. Turn OFF the gas flow by turning the knob on the flow controller.
• If the calibration output signal is enabled during calibration, it will be held at the lockout value for two
additional minutes after END is displayed.
• When the span gas is removed from the sensor, the sensor reading should change to show an
ambient condition.
• If a CAL FAULT appears on display, this indicates: An unsuccessful attempt to calibrate the Ultima X
Series Gas Monitor. To extinguish the CAL FAULT flag, a complete calibration procedure must be
performed.
• The Ultima X Series Gas Monitor allows automatic zero and span adjustments within a pre-defined
range. It cannot make corrections outside this range, such as when an empty or wrong cylinder of
gas is applied or failure to begin gas flow within the allotted 30-second countdown occurs.
9. After a successful calibration, remove the tubing from the Flow Controller and remove the Flow
Controller from the cylinder; return all items to their appropriate location in the Calibration Kit.
11.4 Sealing Rubber Strip of Doors
Periodically check the sealing function of the sealing rubber strips on doors and hatches. The sealing rubber
strip may loss its function and lead to the losses of air and increased leakage rates which will result into a
reduced operational pressure. It is better to replace the sealing rubber strips every other year.
12. DOOR ENTRIES
Date 2016-04-11 Page 30/31
12 Door Entries
The product is equipped with 1 external personal doors (A60), 1 internal personal doors (B15) and 1
emergency hatch.
The external personal doors are used for entry. It has a handle which allow to open from both sides.
The internal personal doors are separated main room from air airlock zone.
The emergency exit has a push-bar which allow to open from inside quickly.
Two padlock is just used to secure the door during transportation.
NOTE: Position of emergency hatch shall be easily accessible from inside and external escape ways
have to be planned and clearly marked.
13. ANNEX A.CPFG BATTERY CHARGING
INSTRUCTION
Date 2016-04-11 Page 31/31
13 ANNEX A. CPFG Battery Charging Instruction
The battery is designed to enable continued operation of the fire and gas system for a period at least 2 hours
in case of failure of power supply of main & emergency power supply. The battery charging circuit is
controlled by Circuit Breaker “Q10” in the Power Distribution Box (92-EL-001). Once switching on the Circuit
Breaker “Q10” in the Power Distribution Box, the battery will keep on charging. The acceptable operation
temperature range for the charge is 0~35℃. The cabin module must be in the temperature range of this
temperate to enable the charger. Please switch off the Circuit Breaker "Q10" when the battery is fully
charged. (LED green).
Features:
1. The charging will be disconnected by Ex isolation panel (92-IB-002) in emergency / hazardous event
depending on the cause & effect diagram.
2. Charge voltage absorb about 28.8V, and Max charge voltage floating about 27.6V.
3. Max charge current: 1.0A, rated fuse is 5A.
Notes:
1. The battery must be recharged immediately after discharges or partly discharges.
2. The normal charging interval for the battery is one month even when battery not discharged.
3. The battery shall not be overcharged.
4. It is not permissible to charge the battery above +50degC!
5. Switch off the Circuit Breaker”Q10“when charging is not required.
7. For more details please refer to the operation instructions of battery charger.
Functioning of LED on battery charger:
LED orange Charging commences.

Battery approx. 90% charged.
LED green/yellow
Battery current < 50% of nominal current. Equalizing voltage.
LED green Battery fully charged.
Battery is connected in reverse polarity or mains is not connected. Disconnect the
LED orange flashes
main supply immediately, change the battery connection and repeat the start.
procedure.
7. AC OPERATION MANUAL
9
AIR CON INSTALLATION
Air Conditioning System
AC0004-HV-MA-3102
VER. 1.0
2016-03-21

Modex Energy Ben Xue Kevin Liu Lars Jacobsen
1.0 2016-03-21 First Revision Ben Xue Kevin Liu GY

Title Air Con Installation
Code AC004-HV-MA-3102 Ver. 1.0
Date 2016-03-21
CONFIDENTIALITY STATEMENT
The information contained in this document and its attachments is confidential. Unless otherwise specified, no
part of this publication may be reproduced or utilized in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical,
including photocopying and microfilm, without permission in writing from the owner.
Table of Content
1 Technical Specification................................................................................................................. 4
2 Remarks for Operation ................................................................................................................. 5
3 Piping Scheme ...........................................................................................................................38
4 Ex Certificate ..............................................................................................................................40
Code AC0004 -HV-MA-3102 Ver. 1.0
Date 2016-03-21
Dear Customer,
We thank you for showing your trust in our products.
The Air Conditioning Unit was designed and constructed according to the latest technical
findings to guarantee a long and reliable use in offshore operation. Regular maintenance and
inspection is necessary for being able to fully profit from these advantages.
This allows:
to assure a reliable operation of the unit
to prolong the shelf-life
to plan the stoppage at the most convenient point of time
to avoid costs entailed by unscheduled repairs.
to Show maintenance schedule.
The present service record contains the maintenance instructions according to the service
intervals. Our authorised mechanics will fill in and sign the maintenance certificates during
their service and inspection as a proof for the work performed. Please be informed that Modex
Energy requires the maintenance certificates whenever you want to make a claim during the
warranty period.
We recommend binding a company authorised by Modex Energy by conclusion of a long-term
service contract to carry out the maintenance inspections. Our service department is at your
disposal.
Modex Energy Rentals Pte Ltd.

1. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
3
Date 2016-03-21
1 Technical Specification
This air conditioning system is design to be installed into Modex Workshop Modules ranging from
12ft to 24ft maximum length.
Cooling Capacity 2 x 7 kW
Heating Capacity (optional) 1 x 4 kW
Refrigerant R 134a
Main voltage on board 380 V - 3Ph. - 50Hz
440 V - 3Ph. - 60Hz
Control voltage on board 220 V - 1Ph. - 50Hz
230 V - 1Ph. - 60Hz
Classification DNV, ISO 15138, ISO 378
Provided 2 Compressors brand Copeland
Technical data
Capacity each compressor 7 kW
Evaporating temperature + 6°C
Condensing temperature + 50°C
Cooling air inlet temperature max + 50°C
Note: Heater and AC Unit are interlocked and will not run simultaneously!
2. REMARKS FOR OPERATION
4
Date 2016-03-21
2 Remarks for Operation
General system concept
The installed Air Conditioning System comprises of two independent cooling circuits and one optional one
stage heater built in form of a split air conditioning system. The cooling circuit is connected to a double
condenser located outside the cabin which is executed in stainless steel and with copper fins for a long
lifetime.
Part 1. System Control
The Air Condition Control is realized via thermostats that are mounted to the wall. Each cooling circuit and
the heating circuit has its own thermostat. The thermostats are pre-set to a temperature range of between
18C-30C for cooling and 0C-30C for heating. The control of the system is based on function without PLC
modules and is integrated to the power distribution box.
The intended usage of AC1 or AC2 or Heating is selected directly on the thermostats. For each system
indication for running status and failure lights for motors and system pressures are realized with lights on the
power distribution box. These indication lights provide information about the status of the system. An electric
switch plan for service and maintenance is located inside the power distribution box.
Date 2016-03-21
Part 2. Compressor Housing
The module is fitted with two independent AC systems for extreme high temperature conditions. They can be
started and stopped simply with the thermostat mounted on the wall to cool down the module. Each system is
pre-set to start with a three minutes’ time delay.
system 2
The compressor casing contains the compressors as well as the relevant pressure gauges, pressure switches,
filters and valves.
The pressure gauges provide information about the system status and give information for the next service
action needed on the system. As well for debugging purposes the gauge values shall be communicated to
the debugging personnel.
This section of the Air Conditioning unit shall only be opened by trained personnel. If in doubt, please contact
your local Modex service base.
Date 2016-03-21
The filter station as shown below contains the filter and sight glass that give indication about the system
charge. The sight glass shall be without bubbles in full operation and the humidity indication on the sight glass
shall indicate “dry”. Please ensure to close all valve fully if the filter shall be replaced.
Picture 2. Compressors and Valves
The pressure switches are pre-set and protect the system from unsafe operation. The condenser controllers
are pre-set with a wide operation range to stabilize high pressure operations. mounted to protect the system
from too low or too high system pressure.
In case of a system stop the switch box will indicate the type of alarm with indication lights on the power
distribution panel. Please communicate this type of alarm including the pressure gauge pressure values clear
to the support engineer. We can conclude from the alarm type how to take the next steps.
Date 2016-03-21
Stopping of Plant over a long period
1. Close liquid valves.
2. Keep compressor running until it will be switched off by means of the low pressure press stat.
3. Close all of the valves, lay main switch in position “0 ".
4. Switch of the thermostat or set the temperature to max degree 30C.
Starting of Plant after a long Standstill
1. Approx. 2 hours prior to starting the cooling plant switch on crank pit heating device.
2. Completely open pressure valve on compressor and liquid valves.
3. Slightly open suction valve on compressor.
4. Start compressor.
5. Slowly open suction valve on compressor (further).
6. Check oil level, oil pressure, suction pressure gauge as well as suction and pressure temperatures.
Date 2016-03-21
Refrigerant circuit
The compressor lowers the pressure in the evaporator until the boiling point of the refrigerant is reached at the
temperature in question. By taking up heat the liquid refrigerant evaporates and consequently cools the cold -
store.
The gas is sucked out by the compressor and compressed according to the pressure of the condenser. The
gases are led into the condenser where heat is taken off the cooling water or the air; the gases are liquefied
again afterwards. The liquid refrigerant stays at the bottom of the condenser or - if available - flows into the
collector.
As a result of different pressures between condenser and evaporator, stabilised by the compressor, the liquid
refrigerant flows to the expansion valve. It provides the evaporator with the same quantity of refrigerant that
the compressor sucks out as a gas.
The refrigerant circuit is closed.

Date 2016-03-21
General indications and remarks for the maintenance of the plant
A satisfactory operation of the Frigen refrigeration plant depends primarily on the fact that it is absolutely tight,
anhydrous and clean.
But of course the accessible parts of the plant must be kept in good order, too. Rusty pipes do not remain tight.
Switch devices do not work if they are not treated properly. The sensor lines of the thermo valves, thermostats,
temperature regulators etc. are particularly sensitive and must not be damaged or even torn off. The fully
automatic refrigeration plant should be treated and maintained carefully.
The closest control must be applied to the tightness of the whole plant. Big leakages can be made out by
sound locating on all connections and by brushing Neckal solvent on doubtful points, for the escaping
refrigerant will form bubbles. More exacting check-up will require special test lamps; the flames of it will
discolour if there are even the smallest leakages. There is another still more exact method for finding out the
smallest leakages without using special expedients. There will escape oil together with the refrigerant from the
plant and form stains. This method implies that all parts are always kept clean and barren of oil.
In winter the refrigeration plant often does not work for some time. This is especially the case with air
conditioning plants. In order to be sure that the refrigerant does not extricate the oil - film from the collecting
ring of the stuffing box untight, the plant should be operated for some minutes once a week (operating
instructions in checklist). Hereby the slip surfaces will again be provided with sufficient oil.
In case there is a danger of frost (water-cooled) condensers must be let off. This can be done by opening the
stopcocks of the water - receivers and by locking the valve in the cooling - water pipe.
It must not be forgotten to re-open the cooling-water valve before operating the plant!
A frequent revision of the filters which are mounted in front of the thermo valves and solenoid valves is of
special importance. The plant cannot work when it is blocked.
Date 2016-03-21
Replenishment of the plant with refrigerant and oil
This work should be done by technically trained staff only.
Generally there is a fill - up valve for the replenishment of the refrigerant installed in the liquid pipe. Before
connecting the refrigerant - flask it should be ascertained that it contains the right refrigerant. For
replenishment the flask is connected with the filling-up valve by a filling pipe. The air is blown out of the filling
pipe by shortly opening the flask valve before screwing on the nut of the cone. The filling pipe must be quite
tight to prevent any air from being sucked up. Now first the liquid valve of the receiver or condenser (if there is
no receiver) is blocked, the flask valve is opened up to the stop, and the fill-up valve is opened. Then the
liquid refrigerant is sucked up from the lying flask. During this operation the compressor is running.
After a short time the replenishment is interrupted, the filling-up valve is locked, the liquid valve is re-opened,
and the load is controlled when the plant is working regularly. This way of replenishing must be kept on until
the plant contains sufficient refrigerant.
Small cooling plants do not have any filling connection. In that case the refrigerant is sucked up gaseous
condition from a standing flask by means of the low pressure gauge. The connection of the flask is the same
as described in the above paragraph.
During the time of soaking all the valves remain unchanged, i.e. as they used to be under normal operating
conditions. Only the suction stop valve may be throttled as far as the oil in the crankcase does not foam. By
employing this method the filling can be accelerated.
When the replenishment with Frigen R134A and the regulation have been properly made the temperature of
the pressure tube between compressor and condenser in plants with air cooled condensers will range from
about 60 °C to 100 °C. The higher values are relevant for high temperature of the cooling air and vice versa.
Besides, there must not appear any bubbles in the inspection-glass of a regular dryer.
Before replenishing the refrigerant the plant must be searched all over for leakages and these must be
repaired. Frigen R134A is well suited for plants with deep evaporation temperature. Frigen R134A like all
Frigens emulsifies with the employed special lubricating oil.
For oil replenishment or change the suction stop valve is closed slowly in order to avoid any foaming of the oil
and this is done while the condenser is running. If the pressure in the crankcase has dropped until nearly 0 kp
/ cm gauge the compressor is put out of operation and simultaneously the suction stop valve is closed.
Hereon the pressure stop valve is turned off and the pressure is discharged from the condenser by slightly
unscrewing the oil filling screw (caution!). Then the change of replenishment of oil can be made.
Date 2016-03-21
Attention (RL 32 3MAF)
For refrigerating plants with screw compressors valid special determinations.
No other oil than prescribed by the producer of the compressor should be used. Only proper dry oil for
refrigerating machines in proper vessels and produced by competent oil companies should be employed.
We warn everyone concerned to mix different kinds of oil or to use inferior oil.
Grade of oil:
See tables of lubrication grease of compressor (oil code: Emkarete TL 32 3 MAF)!

Date 2016-03-21
Air Cooled Condenser
Modex Air cooled condensers are manufactured to resist the harsh offshore environment. Condensers for
offshore use are made of stainless steel and copper fins and tubes to increase the lifetime to the maximum.
The air cooled condensers comprise of finned cooling surface. By blowing a strong air stream through the
cooling surface the ventilators make the refrigerant condense inside the tubes and go into the collector.
The condensing pressure depends on the quantity of air and air temperature. The air cooled condenser is to
be installed in a way that the conveyed air can easily enter and leave cooling surface.
The surface of the air cooled condenser and - if possible - installed insect cover is to be kept clean. Deposits
of dirt obstruct ventilation. Higher condensing pressure and therefore reduction of capacity are the results.
According to the rate of depositions the cleaning process is to be carried out by means of compressed air,
water or soft brushes. Should the air temperature changed too, considerably measures are to be taken to
keep the condensing temperature on a constant level.
According to the rate of depositions the cleaning process is to be carried out by means of compressed air,
water or soft brushes. Should the air temperature changed too, considerably measures are to be taken to
keep the condensing temperature on a constant level.
Date 2016-03-21
Refrigerant sight glass
For observation of proper functioning of refrigerant circuit an indicator sight glass is installed behind the filter
drier.
On normal conditions the sight glass must be clear.
There are two reasons for permanent formation of bubbles:
1. The drier is obstructed or the plant does not contain enough refrigerant
2. Formation of bubbles for a short period does not necessarily indicate a failure within the plant.
The colour indicator shows the quantity of moisture in the refrigerant.
Indicator colour:
Blue= no moisture
Light violet = (critical) little moisture
Pink= (wet) plenty of moisture
The drier cores must be changed or the entire hermetically sealed direr exchanged if indicator colour turns
light violet.
Date 2016-03-21
Filter Drier
Filter drier with drier blocks hermetically cased filter drier
There must not be any moisture when the refrigerating plant is filled with refrigerant. Even drops of water
might bring about the freezing of the nozzles in the thermo valves.
The consequence would be an interruption of the refrigerant circuit and that the plant would no longer operate.
For this reason a refrigerant drier is mounted between condenser and thermo - valves in the line for liquefied
refrigerant of every Freon refrigerating plant. Such a drier consists of a cylindrical container which is provided
with a filter and drier blocks.
The drier blocks can be removed and easily exchanged when disconnecting the flange. There must not be
used any other drier blocks than the type delivered for the drier. The reserve has to be kept in carefully closed
containers in a dry place.
In case the drier is opened for exchanging the drier blocks, the valve at the drier inlet and outlet has to be
closed. After opening the drier must be ventilated. For this purpose the valve at the drier outlet has to be
closed, the ventilation valve to the opened and the refrigerant will be flow through the ventilation valve, this
must be closed. The valve at the outlet is reopened and the drier is again ready for operation after it was
ascertained that there are no leakages.
If a difference in temperature of inlet and outlet is noticed, there is dirt in the filter or the drier blocks and they
must be exchanged. This dirt causes a slight decrease of tension in the liquid refrigerant. Then the refrigerant
is cooling down while forming some vapour due to the decrease of tension.
For small refrigerating plants hermetically cased cooling driers are employed which can only be used once.
Date 2016-03-21
Solenoid valves type EVR 3 - 20 and EVR 25
The differential pressure between inlet and outlet of the valve makes the valve open and shut.
The current must connect up the coil (4), if the valve is to be shut. Then the armature (16) with the piloting
valve panel (18) is lifted.
This way the passage of the pilot nozzle (29) is unblocked and the pressure in the space above the
diaphragm resp. the servo piston lift and release the passage.
At closing procedure the current is to be disconnected from the coil and the pilot valve panel (18) stops the
passage of the pilot nozzle (29).
Date 2016-03-21
Oil - Separator
An oil separator must be used if the quantity of oil in the refrigerant circuit has to be kept on a constant level.
The oil separator prevents the lubricants from leaving the compressor and entering the cooling parts.
According to its size the oil separator comprises of filters, baffles and separating mechanisms. The drainage
of oil in the refrigerant vapour works by change of direction or speed.
The drained oil is collected at the bottom of the oil separator until the floater valve opens. The oil flows into the
compressor until the swimming valve, due to lower oil level, shuts again.
During work at the oil separator do not forget to provide it with new oil until the swimming valve opens.
Should an oil separator be equipped with two oil return valves, one of it must be operated by hand. Smaller oil
separators are only equipped with one automatic valve. Always keep open the shutting valve in the oil return
line of the automatic oil return valve (swimming valve in oil separator).
The oil separator valve which is operated by hand must always be kept shut.
It is only used to drain the separator or in case of a defect valve; take care to use it only for a short time and
under careful observation of the oil level in the compressor. If the valve is always open, hot gas will enter the
compressor which makes the oil boil.
This is particularly dangerous since the compressor is not used to insufficient lubrication.
Date 2016-03-21
Overpressure / Negative pressure switch KP15
The combined overpressure / negative pressure switch KP15 protects the compressor against non-
permissible suction pressures and compression pressures (final).
Circuit Diagram
ND (LP) 1 - 3 opens in case of a decrease in pressure
1 - 2 close simultaneously
HD (HP) 1 - 3 opens in case of an increase in pressure
1 - 4 close simultaneously
Adjustment:
Scale indicates the upper switch point. In order to determine the lower switch point the differential value will be
subtracted from the upper switch point.
Setting the switch back to its original position:

Unscrew cover, lift black cap and press white button.
Date 2016-03-21
Air Coolers
Ceiling air cooler Wall air cooler
The exposition of the air coolers - wall coolers or ceiling coolers - depends on the kind of room to be cooled.
The air cooler is a unit comprising of refrigerant evaporator, ventilator and tin casing with defrosting tub.
Functioning
The ventilator sucks resp. pushes warm air from the cooling room through the finned evaporator. The
refrigerant evaporators in the tubes to which the fins are adopted. The heat for the evaporator is to be taken
from the air so that it becomes cooler.
In case of the evaporator temperature being under +/- 0 °C, the humidity of the air is not being refined as
condensation water but is deposited as ice or chill at the finned evaporator.
In case of chill and ice on the finned evaporator the capacity of the air cooler is rapid reduced.
Therefore the air cooler must be defrosted in regular intervals.
1) Defrosting by air circulation
In case of air temperatures over +/- 0 °C the cooling circuit will be switched off and ventilator put on.
The warm air lets frost and ice thaw.
2) Defrosting by electric heating
In case of air temperatures under +/- 0 °C the finned evaporator must be defrosted by electric heating
while cooling circuit and ventilator are switched off. Even lower temperatures need heating of water outlet
tube and melting tub.
Note: The air cooler must be defrosted until the finned evaporator is completely free from frost or ice.
Date 2016-03-21
Expansion valve T / TE 2 and 5
The thermostatic expansion valves are used for the regulation of the liquidity supply for evaporators in
refrigerating and air-conditioning plants R134, R404a and R410 and not for the regulation of the room
temperature as is often wrongly supposed.
1. Thermostatic part
2. Nozzle insert
3. Valve box
4. Setting spindle
5. External pressure
Compensation with
6 mm flange
6. Feeler
T 2 / TE 2 T 5 / TE 5
The thermostatic expansion valves are proportional controllers regulated by overheating. They are therefore
especially suited for "dry" evaporators where the superheating is proportionally done at the outlet. The valves
can be provided with internal or external pressure compensation.
Relating to the liquidity distributors only valves with external pressure compensation should be taken.
The double contact feeler can be easily mounted reacts quickly and strictly upon any changes of temperature
in the suction line.
The valve is resistant against the normal pressure and temperature influences brought about hot gas
defrosting.
The valve cone and seat are produced of special abrasion resistant alloys, in order to obtain a long durability.
The producer adjusted them that way that they are suited for a definite static overheating. This regulation can
be modified by means of the setting spindle if necessary.
The overheat is reduced when turning the spindle to the left (counter-clockwise) and vice versa, but the
adjustment should only be done if it is really necessary.
Date 2016-03-21
Evaporation pressure control type KVP
KVP which is fitted in the suction line behind the evaporator, helps to keep a constant evaporation pressure
and therefore a constant temperature of the evaporator surface.
By throttle of the suction line the supply of refrigerant gas is accommodate (adapted) to the evaporator load.
01. Setting spindle
02. Valve panel
03. Security screw
04. Valve body
05. Locking ball
06. Nipple
07. Seal
08. Seal cap
09. Pressure gauge
Connection
10. Balance wave line
11. Attenuation device
The evaporation pressure required is set by means of the setting spindle.
For higher evaporation pressure rotate the spindle clockwise - or vice versa.
KVP is factory-set to 2 bar opening pressure. An entire rotation of the setting spindle corresponds to a change
of the evaporator pressure of approx. 0, 2 bar.
A pressure gauge can be fitted to the pressure gauge connection (9) to read the evaporation pressure
Therefore it is necessary to drain the compressor since the locking ball shuts automatically if the seal cap is
applied to gauge connection.
After removal of the pressure gauge the seal cap has to be put on again.
Date 2016-03-21
Differential oil pressure switch type MP 55/54
The type MP 55 designed for use as safety pressure control on pressure-lubricated refrigeration compressors.
The control brings the compressor to a stop after a time lag in case of oil pressure fail.
If start-up results in no oil pressure, or if during operation the oil pressure fall below the set value, the
compressor stops at the end of the release time.
1. Connection to suction
Side of refrigeration plant
7. Pressure range levelling disc
11. Reset button
19. Switch
21. Screwed cable Gland
36. Connection to delivery side of

lubricating system
40. Test device
Adjustment
By inserting pressure gauges as shown in Fig. 4, the lubricating oil pressure p1 and the crankcase pressure
p2 can be read off. The differential between them is the oil pressure available in the lubricating system. The
term "oil pressure" p1 - p2 is in this context understood to be the pressure by which the lubricating oil pressure
exceeds the crankcase pressure. The minimum permissible oil pressure is set by rotating the adjusting disc
under the upper bellows element -LP- inside the control housing. Clockwise rotation of the adjusting disc
reduces the minimum permissible oil pressure and vice versa.
During normal operation, the oil pressure should exceed the adjusted value (as read on the scale) by at least
the fixed contact differential of 0, 2 bar. If, for example, the differential pressure control is set for 3 bar the oil
pressure should increase after compressor start-up to 3 + 0, 2 = 3, 2 bar above crankcase pressure, before
the differential pressure controlled switch breaks the circuit to the timing relay. The pressure must then fall to
3,2bar - 0, 2 = 3 bar before the circuit to the timing relay is made again. If the oil pressure does not increase to
3, 2 bar within the release time, the circuit to the motor starter coil is broken, and the compressor then stops.
Date 2016-03-21
Pressure - control type RT 200 L
The pressure control type RT 200 L with dead zone is used with compressors with capacity regulation are
switched by means of pressure control RT 200 L in addition to a Programme contact control system.
Setting
The required pressure is set by rotating the adjusting-knob (5) while reading the main scale (9) at the same
time.
The adjusted pressure is switched off pressure for contacts 2 - 3.
The neutral zone required is set by rotating the differential knob (40).The dead zone is the difference between
the make pressure for contacts 2 - 3 and the make pressure for contacts 2 - 1.
Date 2016-03-21
Heat exchanger
In order to achieve a higher and more economic exploitation of the evaporation the suction gas is sucked out
slightly superheated at the end of the evaporator.
Due to evaporation delay the suction gas may contain liquid particles which would partly evaporate inside the
compressor if a heat exchanger is not employed. The result, however, is a reduction of compressor capacity.
In some cases (such as short suction line) hammering caused by liquid refrigerant could damage machinery
and valves of the compressor. In order to prevent any damage the suction gas, when leaving the evaporator,
is superheated with the liquid refrigerant going to the evaporator (during which process the still remaining
liquid particles are evaporated).
This measure avoids the danger of "wet operation" and at the same time increases the capacity of the entire
plant. Moreover the sub cooling of the liquid refrigerant increases the effective results of the evaporator.
Date 2016-03-21
Combined low and high pressure controls Type KP 15
The pressure control KP 15 is to be installed as a safety control. It breaks the compressor motor if too high or
too low pressures are accomplished. The pressure which makes the switch make or break the circuit is called
the actuating pressure.
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
1) Setting of the low pressure side of MP 15
First set the maximum actuating pressure for the low pressure side on the range scale (LP) i.e. the pressure
which makes the compressor motor start. Next, set the scale pointer on the differential scale (DIFF) for the
value by which the pressure for the LP side before the pressure motor stops again. Rotating the range
regulating spindle only changes both maximum and minimum pressures at the same time, the differential
remaining the same.
Note: Maximum actuating minus differential = minimum actuating pressure must exceed absolute vacuum (76
cm Hg = 30 in Hg.)
Normally, the compressor cannot operate at suction pressures lower than approx. 65 cm Hg (26 in Hg), which
therefore is the lower limit of the minimum actuating pressure.
The starting and breaking pressures should be measured with a pressure gauge.
Date 2016-03-21
2) Setting of the high pressure side of MP 15
There is no scale for the high pressure side.
The breaking pressure is factory-set for 18 atm. The differential is fixed. To ensure perfect functioning, the
breaking pressure must always be at least 4 atm. Higher than the max. Normal condensing pressure. If
another breaking pressure than the one factory-set is required it should be set by rotating the high-pressure
regulating spindle (HP) as shown in Fig. 2.
One revolution of the spindle corresponds to approx. 4, 5 atm for MP 15.
3) Locking the setting
The range or differential spindle can be locked by mounting the serrated locking plate over the spindle to be
locked. The knob is mounted on the other spindle which can then be rotated through approx. one rotation.
Depending on the position of the knob on the regulating spindle, it can be decided if the spindle can rotate
clockwise, anti-clockwise or in both directions.
4) Locking the differential regulating spindle (DIFF)
The range regulating spindle can be rotated.
Since the differential is then fixed, rotating the range regulating spindle will change both the maximum and
minimum actuating pressures at the same time.
5) Locking the range regulating spindle (LP)
The differential regulating spindle can be rotated.
Since the maximum actuating pressure is fixed, rotating the differential regulating spindle will only change the
minimum actuating pressure. Take care not to set it for a value lower than approx. 65 cm (26 in Hg).
6) Locking the high-pressure-spindle
The spindle can be locked in four positions by the reversible plate.
7) Setting of controls with reset*
Controls with maximum reset give protection against too high pressure.
reset = manual resetting

Date 2016-03-21
Thermostatic regulator of evaporation pressure type CPT
The type CPT is mounted into the suction line behind the evaporator. The sensor must be mounted into the
medium stream (air or liquidity) where it regulates the temperature.
Because of the universal filling of the sensor, the sensor can be arranged warmer or colder than the
thermostatic element and the capillary.
1. Setting spindle
2. Valve panel
3. Cover top
4. Valve box
10. Rubber bellow
11. Pressure resistance

spring
12. Sensor
The desired medium temperature is regulated by the means of setting spindle. A turn to the right (clockwise)
produces a higher temperature of the cooled medium and vice versa.
CPT was adjusted by the producer for a feeler temperature of about 0°C and an evaporation temperature of -
10°C.According to manufacturer’s adjustments the capacity indicated on the schedule will be obtained at tv = -
10°C.
Date 2016-03-21
Filling of the plant
Tightness test
Before you fill up a new plant and set it into operation, you must scan it very carefully if there are any leaks.
The first step is to exhaust the plant with the compressor. For this the pressure check valve behind the
evaporator must be closed and the manometer connection must be open. When the pressure has reached his
lowest point, the manometer connection must be closed.
After the exhaust an upright standing refrigerant bottle must be connected at the suction side of the plant.
Than gaseous refrigerant must be filled into the plant until an overpressure of about 1 to 2 atü is reached.
After that all screws and all abutments must be scanned. When there are any leaks in a soldered connection
the pressure must be completely remove before repairing. Border screws can be tighten by drawing on.
The scanning of the pipes must be done part by part and systematically, beginning at the pressure side along
the refrigerant circuit. This kind of searching provides to forget any parts.
All refrigerant leading parts must be very free of oil. That will be helpful to find any leakages later. When there
is any oil you can be sure that there is a leakage where refrigerant flows out.
Exhaustion
When the tightness test is done, the pressure inside the plant must be raise up to 22,5 bar with a bottle of dry
carbonic dioxide or nitrogen or dry air, and the hole plant must be light up again. When there are no leakages
the pressure must be pump down and the plant must be exhaust by the compressor or (better) by a special
vacuum pump.
This work must be done very careful; that means that the plant must be absolute free from air. There must not
be any air at the air outlet side of the compressor, the oil must ripple free from foam inside the crankcase. This
is the only possibility to remove air and moisture from the plant and prevent any problems like corrosion inside
the compressor, service order because of frozen thermo-valves, exchange of driers etc.
Do not forget that the thermo-valve will freeze at a humidity ratio of about 25g/1000kg refrigerant, when the
evaporating temperature is lower than 0°C and about 5g/1000 kg refrigerant when the evaporating
temperature is lower than -25°C.
Date 2016-03-21
Filling up with refrigerant and oil
When it is a bigger plant the refrigerant must be principle fill in liquid by a special filling-in-connection into the
liquid line. This is a fast and safety method. When it is a smaller plant, you can fill in the refrigerant also
gaseous, but this needs more time.
Liquid filling up
The refrigerant bottle must be set up slanting with the valve down and connected by way of the filling pipe with
the valve at the filling connection (see fig.1)
Connection before the dryer
Fig.1
Before drawing the screw at the filling valve you must blow some refrigerant through the filling pipe to press
the air out of the pipe, and after that the screw will be draw while refrigerant flows out. While filling up the
bottle the valve must be absolute open; it closes only to the outside when it is in end position “open” or “close”.
For this reason the bottle valve is not for regulation of the fluid capacity. This can be done with the valve at the
filling connection.
The first refrigerant flows into the plant.

Date 2016-03-21
For a continued filling of the plant the liquid line must be closed at the receiver and the refrigerant must be
sucked with the compressor out of the refrigerant bottle. Be sure that the receiver and the evaporator will not
overfill. Take a look at the pressure manometer. After a while the filling connection must be closed and the
liquid line at the receiver must be opened. After that you must test, if the plant has got enough refrigerant. Do
that while the plant is running. The following data’s may help you to estimate.
1. sight glass, liquid line
2. manometer pressure
3. cover with hoarfrost of the evaporator
4. reaction of the thermo valves
(When there is not enough refrigerant you can hear a clear piping sound at the thermo valve, because of the
outflow of gaseous refrigerant. This sound will stop when the plant has filled the right way).
When there is no filling connection at the filling pipe, you can also fill in the refrigerant fluid with the
manometer connecting piece at the receiver. When there is a water-cooled plant present, you must let flow
the cooling water into the evaporator - while the compressor stands by - so that the evaporating temperature
at the pressure manometer is lower than the ambient temperature of the bottle.
When there is an air cooled plant is present, you must make the bottle warm (Attention! Only in a water
quench or by watering with warm water that is not warmer than 40 °C!!!) , so that the bottle is warmer than the
ambient temperature of the evaporator.
Date 2016-03-21
Filling with gas
The refrigerant bottle must be set up in vertical direction and the filling pipe must be connected at the
manometer connection of the suction valve (fig. 2).
Suction connection
The ventilation of the filling line must be done the same way as described above. The compressor sucks more
or less refrigerant out of the bottle, when the suction line will be throttle down slowly, while the compressor is
running. The throttling of the suction line must be done very carefully at the beginning, so that the oil in the
crankcase will not bubble too much. The testing of the plant must be done the same way as described above.
For smaller plants this is the easiest and practicable method.
The fluid refrigerant has to be filled in only at the filter drier.
While filling with refrigerant contact with air must be provided, because many refrigerants have got a great
absorbing capacity of water.
It is forbidden in any case, to fill in liquid refrigerant at the suction side!!!

Date 2016-03-21
Filling with oil
(The following is not mentioned for plants including oil separator!)
When the plant has been filled with refrigerant it must be refilled with oil (5-10% of the
Refrigerant quantity). To do this you must set the filling connection with the manometer and the stop valve at
the suction manometer connection and screw on it a small piece of copper pipe (fig.3).
This leads into a container of oil. You must blow the air carefully out of the filling device and throttle slowly the
suction line until there arises a minor negative pressure at the manometer. Than the filling valve opens and
sucks the oil carefully into the compressor.
Be sure that you suck no air into the pipe, when the oil container is nearly empty!!!
Date 2016-03-21
Adjusting of the pressostat and the overpressure-safety-switch

When the compressor while filling or evacuation shall run, it is often necessary that the electric contacts of the
pressostat must be shut or block up for a short time. Afterwards you should not forget to adjust it again when
the correct operating status is reached.
Therefor connect a suction manometer, adjust the pressostat at the lowest switch off pressure and the largest
switch difference. After that let the compressor suck down until the desired lowest pressure. - for example by
way of careful throttle of the suction stop valve or with cutting off of the liquid line or with switch off of the
ventilators- and make the motor by way of slowly turning of the temper screw release. By way of slowly
reduction of the switch difference the compressor motor will start again at the desired pressure.
There is often the question of how high the switch-on or switch-off pressures and how high the temperatures
should be. Here we have to differ between two cases – in accordance with the usage of the pressostat:
1) The pressostat serves only as a safety valve; its only function is to prevent a suction pressure lower
than 0 atü. In this case the switch-off point should be about 0 atü and the switch-on temperature should
be the lowest cooling room temperature.
2) The plant is controlled by pressostat. In this case let the compressor run until the lowest desired room
temperature is reached, and then make the compressor stop by way of turning the temper screw when
the lowest suction pressure or temperature is reached (read off from the suction manometer). It is not
possible to indicate the switch off pressure here. This must be discover from the technician on location; it
deviates in a not to disregarded dimension. Especially when the temperatures are low, and the thermo
valve has closed before or converse.
The switch on pressure must be set on the lowest cooling room temperature. When following the room gets
too warm because of this setting, you have to choose the switch on pressure lower. This correction will be
necessary, if the evaporator is covered or installed in a way that the room is getting faster warm than the
evaporator
The over pressure safety switch must be adjust similar by carefully throttle of the pressure stop valve. Read
off from the suction manometer all the time. When a change of the producer adjusting is necessary, never
choose the off switch pressure to low. Than it may happen that the plant stops under normal conditions in
warm seasons.
It is not necessary to explain the adjusting of the thermostat at this position.

Date 2016-03-21
Control of the thermo expansion valve
The expansion valves are delivered operation ready. That means that the overheating of the expansion valve
has been done by the producer very careful at 7°C. In most cases it is not necessary to change this
adjusting. Be careful of turning the expansion valve inconsiderate; the failure is rare causes by the expansion
valve but in other places.
In following cases it is really necessary to re-adjust the expansion valve:
a) expansion valve with inner pressure compensation, when the pressure loss is much too high
b) when the temperature difference between evaporating- and room temperature is very small.
c) absorption filled expansion valve, when the evaporating temperature is much higher or lower than
10 °C,
But only, when the desired room temperature has been reached. When the valve does not inject enough
refrigerant at the beginning of the cooling, it is more probable that moisture or dirt is the reason for the wrong
adjusting.
Date 2016-03-21
Recover
The recovery of the apertures after usage, including the pilot and fuels, is for members of the EU to put on
according to the EG instructions 75/442/EWG, 91/689/EWG and the interconnected regulations.
For nations outlying the EU the recovery is to put on according the national law regulations.
3. PIPING SCHEME
5
4. ELECTRIC SCHEME
6
8. MATERIAL TEST CERTIFICATES
10
Scanned by CamScanner
9. WELDING PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION
11
10. WELDER / WELDING OPERATOR QUALIFICATION
RECORDS
12
11. DIMENSIONAL REPORT
13
12. WELDING & NDT REPORTS
14
13. NDT PROCEDURE / NDT OPERATOR CERTIFICATES
15
QidongSingamas Offshore Equipment Co., Ltd.
版本号 A
启东胜狮海工装备有限公司
文件编号 ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION PROCEDURE 修改次第 0
超声检测规程页次/总页数
QSOE-WI-QM16 3 / 21
1 Scope 1. 适用范围
1.1 This procedure specifies techniques for the 1.1本工艺规程规定了厚度在大于
manual ultrasonic testing for fusion-welded joints 或等于8mm的钢制熔化焊接头的
in steels with thickness more than or equal 手工超声波检测技术，主要用于海
8mm.It is primarily intended for using on full 工集装箱的全熔透焊接接头。
penetration welded joints of offshore containers.
1.2 These requirements are established for the 1.2这些要求用于焊缝、热影响区

ultrasonic detection, location, and evaluation of 和邻近母材中各种超声反射体的
ultrasonic reflectors within the weld, heat affected 超声探测、定位以及评定。适用
zone, and adjacent material at object 温度为0~60˚C
temperatures from 0~60˚C.
1.3 This procedure is prepared in accordance 1.3本规程编制参照了以下标准。

with Below Standard.
EN ISO 17640 2010 版焊缝无
EN ISO 17640 2010 Edition Non-destructive
损检测超声波检测技术，检测
testing of welds-Ultrasonic Testing-Techniques,
等级和评估
testing levels, and assessment
EN ISO 11666 2010 版焊缝无
EN ISO 11666 2010 Edition Non-destructive
损检测超声波检测验收等级
testing of welds-Ultrasonic testing-Acceptance
levels
DNV CN No.7 2004 Edition Section 6 Ultrasonic DNV CN No.7 2004 版第六章
Testing 超声波检测
DNV Standard for Certification No.2.7-1 2013 DNV No.2.7-1 2013 版海工集
Edition Offshore Containers 装箱
2 Personnel Qualification 2. 人员评定

2.1 All personnel performing ultrasonic 2.1所有进行超声波检测的人员
examination shall be qualified and certified in 评定及取得合格证书应按《 NDT
accordance with the requirements of the WRITTEN 人员资质和证书的书面实施细则》
PRACTICE FOR PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION AND （QSOEWP-15 Rev0）的要求进行,
CERTIFICATION IN NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING 此实施细则根据 ASNT
(QSOEWP-15 Rev0) which is in compliance with SNT-TC-1A 2011版制定。
ASNT SNT-TC-1A 2011 Edition.
3 Technique and Search Unit 3. 方法和探头
3.1 Shear wave angle beam transducer and 3.1焊缝超声波检验应使用横波
Longitudinal wave straight beam transducer with 斜探头和纵波直探头进行接触法
contact shall be used for UT examination of 检验。斜探头角度偏差不超过2˚。
welds. The shear wave angle deviation should be 探头形式，频率和晶片尺寸/形状
Copyright of QSOE whose property this document remains. No parts thereof may be disclosed, copied, duplicated or in any other way made use of except with the written
approval of QSOE
版本号 A
QSOE-WI-QM16 4 / 21
within 2˚. The search unit type, frequency, 见表3.1

and element size / shape are shown in table 3.1
Table 3.1 Search Unit for UT
表 3.1 超声波检测探头
Element Size Propagation Propagation
Technique Frequency
晶片尺寸 Angle Mode
检测方法频率 MHZ
mm 传播角度传播波型
Longitudinal
Longitudinal
wave straight
φ20 2.5 0° wave
beam transducer
纵波
纵波直探头
Shear wave
10×10 5.0 70°
横波
Shear wave
Shear wave
transducer 10×12 5.0 45°
横波
横波斜探头
Shear wave
10×10 5.0 60°
横波
Base material thickness, （T）母材厚度 Probe angle 探头角度

8~15 mm 70˚
15~40 mm 70˚ or/with 60˚ 45˚ （if necessary）
NOTE: A optimal probe angle when the weld connections is being tested for lack of fusion in the transition between weld and parent
material is the angle which gives incident sound normal to the angle of the weld bevel. The optimal angle for a V-groove can be
calculated with the groove geometry. If the calculated angle does not comply with any standard probe angle, the nearest larger probe
angle shall be selected. 注：焊缝探伤时，为检测焊缝和母材金属之间过渡区未熔合，最适宜的探头角度为入射声波和焊缝
坡口垂直的角度。V 型坡口的最佳探头角度可按坡口形状计算出来。如果计算出来的角度不符合任何标准的探头角度，则
应当选择最为接近的较大的标准角度。
4 Calibration Blocks 4. 校准试块

4.1 Reference block 4.1对比试块
Reference block (￠3mm side drilled holes) 应用对比试块（￠3mm 的横通
shall be used to establish primary reference 孔）来确定仪器的基准灵敏度
responses DAC of the equipment. DAC。
The reference block shall normally be 对比试块采用实际的（或声学

manufactured from the actual (or acoustically 性能相似的）的材料制作
similar) material tested.
4.2 The basic calibration blocks shall be as 4.2基准校准试块按国际标准试
specified as IIW V1 or V2 块V1或者V2
5 Couplant 5. 耦合剂
5.1 Machine oil is used as couplant. Other 5.1耦合剂使用机油，在必要时可

以使用声学特性与机油近似的等
material having the acoustic characteristics
效物。
similar to machine oil can be used instead when
necessary.
approval of QSOE
版本号 A
QSOE-WI-QM16 5 / 21
6 Instrument 6. 仪器
6.1 Ultrasonic instrument is to be of the pulse 6.1超声波仪器必须是数字增益
echo type, have a digital gain regulator with less 型的脉冲反射式仪器，其增益器
than 2 dB per step, be capable of working at test 应具有最小不大于2dB 的步进；
frequencies between 1 to 6 MHz, and be able to 频率范围至少覆盖1-6MHz 的范
clearly distinguish echoes with amplitudes of 5% 围；并可以清晰地辨别5%满屏高
of full screen height. All equipments shall comply 度波幅的回波。所有设备应符合
with the requirements of EN 12668 (all parts). EN 12668的要求（所有部分）。
6.2 A digital ultrasonic instrument is 6.2推荐使用数字式超声仪，如

recommended such as HS610E. HS610E。
7 检测等级和范围比例
7 Testing Level and Rate
7.1 根据DNV No2.7-1标准，检
7.1 According to DNV No.2.7-1, the testing level
测级别为B级
should be B.
7.2 检测范围和比例见表7.2
7.2 And Testing extent and Rate See Table 7.2
Category 部件 Primary Structure Essential/ Primary Structure Secondary Structure 次级结

Non-redundant 主要部件关 Non-essential 主要部件非关构
键部位键部件
Rate 比例 100% Pad eyes 吊耳 20% Spot 抽检
20% all other 其它
Depending on material thickness and accessibility for UT equipment. Spot means random examination to the discretion of the
surveyor 由母材厚度和可操作性来取决于UT设备，抽样检查由验船师决定。
7.3 For ultrasonic testing the contact surface 7.3 用于超声波检测的接触表

shall be clean and smooth, i.e. free from dirt, 面，应清洁光滑，即无影响检
scale, rust, welding spatter, etc, and be 测结果的污物、氧化皮、焊接
ensured intimate contact with probes. 飞溅等，必须保证能与探头有
良好的接触。
7.4 All welds shall be 100% visually inspected
per EN ISO 5817 level B Prior UT. 7.4 进行超声波检测前，所有的
焊缝必须按照EN ISO5817 B
级进行100%的目视检测。
8 System Calibration 8 系统的校准
8.1 Straight beam Range Calibration 8.1 直探头水平范围检测
Longitudinal wave straight beam transducer 直探头量程范围的校准，应当采
range calibration shall be carried out with IIW 用IIW (V1)标准试块或者在待检
(V1) block or free-defect area of base 材料上没有缺陷的区域进行。看
material. See Below Figure 下图
approval of QSOE
版本号 A
QSOE-WI-QM16 6 / 21
8.2 Shear wave transducer calibration 8.2 斜探头入射点的确定

8.2.1 The probe index is to be determined by 8.2.1 下图所示放置探头，找到半
placing the probe as shown （ See below 径为 100 mm （IIW）或50 mm
Figure） and by maximizing the echo against （V2）的圆弧面的最高波，并调
the cylinder surface with radius 100 mm (IIW 整至满屏高度的80％，确定探头的
V1) or 50 mm (V2), the echo height is adjusted 入射点。探头的入射点可以标记在
to about 80% of full screen height. The probe 探头上。
index can be marked off on the probe.
8.2.2 The probe angle is to be checked on the 8.2.2 用得出的入射点来

IIW block using the index found. The echo from 确定探头折射角。探头对准圆形
the circular Perspex reflector or Φ1.5mm side 有机玻璃反射体或者 1.5mm 的
drilled hole is maximized and put at 80% of full 圆孔找到最高波并调整至满屏
screen height. The probe angle can now be 高度的 80％。探头的入射角度
read off on the calibration block against the 即可在校准试块刻度上读出，见
engraved centre point, see below Figure. The 下图；也可以通过测量并计算
probe angle is also to be obtained through 得出。
measure and calculation.
approval of QSOE
版本号 A
QSOE-WI-QM16 7 / 21
8.2.3The calibration of angle beam probes is to 8.2.3 斜探头的水平范围校准

be carried out on an IIW(V1) or V2 calibration 应当采用 IIW (V1) 或 V2 标
block. The range is to be selected in order to 准试块进行。选取的水平范围应
cover minimum scanning zone width, See 当至少覆盖扫查区域宽度。见下
below figure：图：
8.3 Sensitivity Set up for shear wave DAC 8.3 设定灵敏度斜探头的 DAC
曲线
The Diameter 3mm Side drilled holes with
various deep block should be adopt to set up 利用有不同深度的 3mm 横通孔
DAC. The first echo reflected from the drilled 的时刻来建立 DAC 曲线，找到
hole in the reference block is maximized and 对比试块横通孔反射的最高回
the gain control regulated so that the echo 波，调整增益使回波高度达到满
amplitude is 80% of full screen height (FSH). 屏高度（FSH）的 80%。
This gain setting is called the primary gain and 这时的增益值为主增益，应记录
is to be noted. 下来。
Without altering the primary gain, the probe is 保持主增益不变，探头移动去探
positioned to seek various deep holes, And the 查不同深度的孔，并且分别在屏
reflected echo should be record on the screen 幕上记录相应回波的幅度。
These points are connected with a smooth 这些点用平滑的曲线连接起来，
approval of QSOE
版本号 A
QSOE-WI-QM16 8 / 21
line with a length, which covers the required 曲线长度覆盖所需要扫查区域。

scanning area. This is reference DAC 这就是参考曲线（DAC）。
8.4 Sensitivity Set up for straight wave DAC 8.4 设定灵敏度直探头的 DAC
曲线
For testing of weld using straight beam probes,
the 3mm side drilled hole (SDH) in the 用直探头检测焊接接头时，和斜
reference block is to be used for gain setting 探头一样，用对比试块上的横孔
same as for the angle probes. The reflected 调整灵敏度。反射回波调至
echo is put to 80% of FSH and the gain setting FSH 的 80% ，在屏幕上绘制一
is the primary gain with record. 条水平线作为参考基准。该增益
即为主增益，应记录下来。
DAC calibration on two different reference
blocks.（See below Fig）在对比试块两个不同孔上的校
准。（下图）
approval of QSOE
版本号 A
QSOE-WI-QM16 9 / 21
9.Transfer correction(Surface compensation) 9 传输修正(表面补偿)

9.1Any possible difference in attenuation and 9.1 采用以下的方法检查校准试
surface character between the reference block 块和待检工件在衰减及表面特
and the object to be tested are to be checked in 性上任何可能的差异：用两个和
the following way: Two angle probes of the 检测使用的探头类型相同的斜
same type as those to be utilized during the 探头，按下图所示将探头放置在
testing are to be used. The probes are placed 待检工件上；其中一个探头用作
on the object to be tested as shown on below 发射探头，而另一个用作接收探
Fig. One of the probes works as transmitter 头；调整增益将第一个最高波调
probe, whilst the other acts as receiver. The first 整至 DAC，记录该增益。保持
echo is maximised and with the aid of the gain 该增益不变，将探头移动至校准
control it is adjusted to reach DAC. The gain 试块，将回波调整至达到 DAC
setting is noted. Without altering this gain 并记录此时的增益。
setting the probes are moved to the reference
block. The echo is adjusted to reach DAC and
the gain setting is noted. 两种材料中任何回波高度上的
差异即可通过调整增益来确定。
Any difference in echo amplitude between the
two materials can now be determined with the
adjustment of the gain control.
If the differences are less than 2 dB, correction
如果差别小于 2 dB，则不需要
is not required. If the differences are greater
修正。如果差别大于 2 dB 却小
than 2 dB but smaller than 12 dB, they shall be
于 12 dB，则应当进行补偿。
compensated.
如果传输损失大于 12 dB，则应
If transfer losses exceed 12 dB, the reason
当考虑原因，如适用，可对扫查
shall be considered and further preparation of
表面进行更进一步的准备处理。
the scanning surfaces shall be carried out, if
applicable. 如果并没有明显的导致高修正
值的原因，则应当在检测工件上
When there are no apparent reasons for high
的不同位置测定衰减情况。如果
correction values, the attenuation at various
衰减的变化非常显著，则必须考
locations on the test object shall be measured.
虑降低检测频率，以改善衰减状
If the high correction values happened, lower
况。
testing frequency must be considered.
approval of QSOE
版本号 A
QSOE-WI-QM16 10 / 21
9.2.Check and Calibration of Equipment 9.2.设备的检测和效验

Before testing every day, the range scale, probe 每天检测前，必须对量程、探头
angle, and primary gain must be checked and 角度和主增益进行检查和修正。
corrected. The temperature difference during 声程和灵敏度设置时的温度与
range and sensitivity setting and during the test 检测期间的温度差异应在±
shall be within ±15 °C. 15 °C 之内
Use the IIW (V1 – V2) to determine the index IIW（ V1-V2 ）试块被用来测
point and the angle of probe. The front distance 定斜探头的前沿和折射角。斜探
of angle probe shall be not more than ±2 mm of 头前沿和其标称值相差不能大
the nominal value. The refracted angle is within 于±2mm，折射角的偏差也不能
the ±2 degrees of the nominal angle 大于±2°。
During the test, at approximately 4-hourly 检测过程中，至少以大约每 4
intervals at least the range scale, probe angle 个小时一次的间隔期，对量程、
and primary gain must be checked and 探头角度和主增益进行必须的
corrected. Checks shall also be carried out 检查和修正。当系统的参数被改
whenever a system parameter is changed or 变或对相应的设置产生疑虑时，
changes in the equivalent settings are 也应当进行检查。如果进行参数
suspected. If deviations are found during 检查时发现有偏差，则应按下表
parameter checks, the corrections given in 进行修正。
below table shall be carried out.
approval of QSOE
版本号 A
10 Testing 10 检测
10.1 Testing volume 10.1 检测的体积
The testing volume is defined as the zone which 检测的体积被定义为包括焊缝
includes weld and parent material for at least 10 和焊缝两侧至少各 10mm 范围
mm on each side of the weld, or the width of the 与热影响区二者之中，面积较大
heat affected zone (HAZ), whichever is greater. 的区域范围内的母体材料。
10.2 Testing of parent material, 10.2 母材的检测

The parent material in the scanning zone area, 扫查区域内的母材，应当在斜探
shall be examined with straight beam probes 头扫查前用直探头进行检查。
prior to scanning with angle probes
对母材的扫查是为了发现分层、
Scanning of parent material is performed in 缺陷、显著的衰减改变或厚度变
order to reveal laminations, imperfections, large 化，这些可能会影响斜探头检
variations in attenuation or thickness variation, 查。
which might influence the angle beam testing.
应当在没有缺陷的母材上进行
The gain setting shall be calibrated on a defect 灵敏度校准。二次背面回波应当
free place on the parent material. The second 调整至满屏高度 FSH 的 80%。
back wall echo shall be set to 80% of FSH. 应当记录报告横截面大于波束
Imperfections with a cross section larger than 的缺陷（底波消失）。当底波完
approval of QSOE
版本号 A
the sound beam (loss of back wall echo) shall 全消失时，用 6dB 法测量出缺
be reported. The extent of the imperfections is 陷的范围。
measured with the aid of the 6 dB-drop method
when complete loss of back wall echo occurs.
在发现缺陷的部位，需相应调整
Where imperfections are found, the techniques
检测技术。当严重影响超声检测
adjusted correspondingly. When satisfactory
完全覆盖检测体积时，应考虑其
coverage by ultrasonic testing is seriously
他的检验技术（如射线检测）。
affected, other inspection techniques (e.g.
radiography) shall be considered. 此检查不必作为母材判废的依
据。
The examination is not consider as criterion for
rejection of the parent material. 10.3 焊缝的检测
10.3 Testing of weld connections 检测等级、技术及相应的探头数
量、扫查面等应符合章节 10.5
The testing level, testing techniques and
的要求。
corresponding number of probe etc. shall
comply with paragraph 10.5 当由于工件的外形或邻接部件
的原因，无法从两侧进行扫查的
Where configuration or adjacent parts of the
情况应当在报告中予以说明。
object are such that scanning from both sides is
not possible this fact shall be included in the 探头扫查速度不应大于
report. 150mm/s。
The scanning speed shall not exceed 扫查时，为了增大对方位困难缺
150mm/second. 陷的检出灵敏度，可以最小 14
dB 的增量进一步提高增益。当
When scanning, the gain is to be the corrected
依据 DAC 进行缺陷评估时，必
primary gain plus 14 dB in order to increase the
须减去提高了的增益量。
sensitivity to defects with a difficult orientation.
The gain must then be reduced to the corrected
primary dB level when defect evaluation is
对缺陷的评估应当采用 DAC 曲
carried out.
线。用于评估缺陷的增益为主增
For evaluation of defects, the DAC curve shall 益，用 6dB 法测量出缺陷的范
be use. The gain which is to be used in the 围。
evaluation of the imperfection is the primary
gain. The extent of the imperfections is
measured with the aid of the 6 dB-drop method
10.4 Scanning method 10.4 扫查方法
10.4.1 Use of angle probes for detection of 10.4.1 用斜探头检测纵向缺
longitudinal imperfections. The angle probe is 陷。斜探头放置在母材上的方式
placed on the parent material in such a way that 必须保证波束和焊缝垂直。下图
the sound beam is normal to the weld. The 所示，探头应在扫查区域内前后
probe is to be moved forwards and backwards 移动，探头在前后移动的同时应
approval of QSOE
版本号 A
in the scanning area, and during this movement 作 5-10º 的摆动。

the probe is to be continuously turned 5-10° in
the horizontal plane, as intimated on below
Figure
10.4.2 The scanning with angle probes for 10.4.2 用斜探头检测横向缺陷

detection of transverse imperfections are: The 的方法有：探头在余高磨平的
one is parallel scan technique that the probe is 焊缝上沿焊缝扫查的平行法；在
placed on the surface to scan along the centre 焊缝两侧，探头波束与焊缝中心
line of the weld which cap is ground flush with 线成一个小角度（约 15°）的斜
the parent material. The other is lateral 平行法；以及双探头法，下图所
scanning with oblique angle that the probe is 示。
placed alongside the weld connection, so that
如果焊缝表面足够光滑，通常采
the beam forms a small angle with the centre
用平行法检测横向缺陷。在必要
line (about 15°), and double probe (tandem)
时，应将焊缝余高磨平。平行法
technique, as intimated on below Figure.
扫查无法进行时，可采用斜平行
If enough smooth on the weld surface, parallel 扫查。
scan is normally performed for detection of
任何情况下，斜平行扫查应在焊
transverse imperfections. If necessary, the weld
缝的双侧双向进行，并且需要提
reinforcement shall be ground flush. Lateral
高扫查灵敏度（通常不少于 14
scan technique with oblique angle may be used
approval of QSOE
版本号 A
when parallel scan technique is not applied. dB）。

When lateral scan technique with oblique angle
is used, scanning is in all cases to be performed
from both sides of the weld and in both
directions, and the scanning sensitivity is to be
improved (normally not less than 14dB).
10.5 Testing techniques

10.5 检测技术
The figures and tables in below are normative,
下列图和表是规范性的，应遵照
and shall be followed.
执行。
10.5.1 For butt joints in plates
10.5.1 对于板对接焊缝
approval of QSOE
版本号 A
approval of QSOE
版本号 A
approval of QSOE
版本号 A
11 Evaluation of Imperfection 11 缺陷的评估

Imperfections, from which the reflected echo 所有反射回波高度大于评估等
response is greater than evaluation level shall be 级的缺陷，操作人员应对其进行
investigated to the extent that the operator can 分析以确定所有缺陷的形状、类
determine the shape, identity and location of all 型、位置，并按照验收准则进行
such imperfections and evaluate them in terms 评估。
of the acceptance criteria.
应当报告所有超出验收准则的
All defects exceeding the acceptance criteria 缺陷，见下图:
shall be reported，see below Figure:
本验收准则根据 EN ISO 11666
This acceptance criterion is prepared according 制定，验收等级 2、3 相当于 EN
to EN ISO 11666, and the levels 2 and 3 are ISO 5817 的质量水平 B、C。根
equal to quality levels B and C of EN ISO 5817. 据 DNV No. 2.7-1，焊缝的质量
According to DNV No. 2.7-1, weld quality shall 水平应符合等级 2。验船师认可
correspond to level 2. With permission of the 时，也可以采用其他验收等级。
surveyor other acceptance level may be
adopted.
Evaluation level is DAC-14 dB
评估线是 DAC-14dB
approval of QSOE
版本号 A
Accept level 2 接收等级 2
Accept level 3 接收等级 3
approval of QSOE
版本号 A
12 Grouping of indications 12 显示的组合

12.1 Grouping is based on the length and the 12.1 显示的组合是基于波幅高
separation of two individually acceptable 于记录等级的两个合格显示的
indications having amplitudes above the 长度和间距。一组已组合的显示
recording level. The length of a group shall not 的长度不得与其他显示再组合。
be used for further grouping.
同时满足以下条件的显示应作
For evaluation, a group of indications shall be 为一个缺陷进行评定：
considered as a single one if:
a)距离 dx 小于较长显示的长度
a)The distance, dx, is less than twice the length 的两倍；
of the longer indication ;
b)距离 dy 小于厚度的一半但不
b)The distance, dy, is less than half of the 超过 10mm；
thickness but not more than 10 mm;
c)距离 dz 小于厚度的一半但不
c)The distance, dz, is less than half of the 超过 10mm。
thickness but not more than 10 mm.
组合的长度为：l12 = l1 + l2 + dx
The combined length is: l12 = l1 + l2 + dx
应以组合显示中的较大的缺陷
The larger maximum amplitude of the grouped 的最高波幅按章节 11 中给出的
indications shall then be assessed against the 相应验收等级评定。
applicable acceptance levels given in paragraph
11.
approval of QSOE
版本号 A
12.2 Cumulative length of acceptable indications 12.2 合格显示的累计长度

The cumulative length of all individually 在一给定的焊缝长度 lw 内，超
acceptable indications, lc, above recording level 过记录等级的所有分开的合格
is given as the sum of lengths of both single 显示的累计长度 lc 包括单个显
indications and linearly aligned indications of 示的长度和线性排列显示的组
combined length within a given section of weld 合长度，见下图:
length, lw,. See below Figure:
Limited cumulative length of acceptable

合格显示的累积长度限值见下
indications, see below Table:
表:
13 Repair and Retesting

13 返修和复检
Rejected defects may be repaired by grinding,
不合格的缺陷可以通过修磨、机
machining and/or welding, and shall be comply
加和/或焊接去除，且应符合验船
with the procedure approved by the surveyor. In
师认可的程序。为了验证是否完
order to verify complete removal of defects,
全去除了缺陷，应当采用适当的
effected areas shall be examined with suitable
NDT 方法对受影响区进行检查。
NDT methods.
进行焊接修补后，应对整个焊缝
After repair welding has been performed, the
（即修补区域连同各端 100 mm
complete weld, (i.e. the repaired area plus at
的范围内）进行检测，检测方法
least 100 mm on each side) shall be subjected to
应当与先前所用的检测方法相
at least to the same method as specified for the
同。
original weld.
approval of QSOE
版本号 A
14 Reporting 14 报告
The report shall include a reference to the 报告必须包括引用的适用标准
applicable standard and acceptance criteria. 和验收准则。也包括下面内容:
Also should including:
工件和引用图纸
object and drawing references
材料类型和尺寸
material type and dimensions
检查区域的位置，接头的类型
location of examined areas, type of joint
采用的焊接方法
welding process used
表面状态
surface conditions
探头，类型和频率
probes, type and frequency
所用参考试块的标识
identification of reference blocks used
表面补偿/传输修正
surface compensation/transfer correction
缺陷类型(如果适用)
defect type (if applicable)
参照验收等级的检查结果
examination results with reference to
其他相关信息
acceptance level
other relevant information
15 不能进行 100%检验的区域应在
15. The areas which can not be inspected by
100% coverage under examination shall be 报告中说明。
stated in the report.
16 检验报告应由无损检测 II 级
16. All reports shall be prepared by an NDE level
人员签发，另一个无损检测 II 级
II Personnel and reviewed by another NDE level
II Personnel. 人员审核。
17. Records and report shall be retained for a 17 检验记录和报告应至少保存 3 年。
minimum period of three years.
approval of QSOE
版本号 A
文件编号 MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION 修改次第 0
PROCEDURE 磁粉检验规程页次/总页数
QSOE-WI-QM17 3 / 11
1 Scope 1. 适用范围
1.1 This procedure provides the method and 1.1 本规程为海工集装箱部件
acceptance standard for wet particle method of 及其焊缝的湿磁粉检验方法和验
magnetic particle examination of ferromagnetic 收标准。
materials for offshore container.
1.2 This procedure is prepared in accordance 1.2 本规程编制参照了以下标
with Below Standard. 准。
EN ISO 17638 2009 Edition Non-destructive EN ISO 17638 2009 版焊缝无

testing of welds-Magnetic Particle testing 损检测焊缝磁粉检测
EN ISO 23278 2009 Edition Non-destructive EN ISO 23278 2009 版焊缝无
testing of welds-Magnetic particle testing of 损检测焊缝磁粉检测验收等级
welds-Acceptance levels
DNV CN No.7 2004 Edition Section 3 Magnetic
DNV CN No.7 2004 版第三章
particle testing
磁粉检测
DNV Standard for Certification No.2.7-1 2013
DNV No.2.7-1 2013 版海工集
Edition Offshore Containers
装箱
1.3 Processing details shall be specified in the 1.3 检验的具体参数应列入 “磁

MT Technical Sheet which is to be considered a 粉检测工艺卡”中，作为对本规程
supplement for the procedure . 文件的补充。
1.4 Wet and non-fluorescent particle continuous 1.4 本规程规定的非荧光湿磁
method of magnetic particle testing is to be used 粉连续法适用于检测工件对接焊
for detecting discontinuities at the surface of 缝和T型角接焊缝的表面缺陷，
butt-welded joints of objects and fillet welds of T 如：裂纹、夹渣、气孔及钢板边
joints of objects. Such as cracks, inclusion, 缘分层等。
porosity and laminations on edges of plate.
1.5 This procedure is applicable to welds of 1.5 本规程适用于检测碳钢结
Steel materials 构上焊缝的表面。
1.6 Magnetic particle examination shall include 1.6 对焊缝的磁粉检验应包括
base metal for at least 25mm on each side of the 焊缝两侧各25mm的母材金属。
weld.
2 Personnel Qualification 2. 人员资格评定
approval of QSOE
版本号 A
QSOE-WI-QM17 4 / 11
All personnel performing magnetic particle 所有进行磁粉检测的人员评定及

examination shall be qualified and certified in 取得合格证书应按的《NDT人员资
accordance with the requirements of the 质和证书的书面实施细则》
WRITTEN PRACTICE FOR PERSONNEL （QSOEWP-15 Rev0）的要求进行,
QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION IN 此实施细则根据 ASNT
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING (QSOEWP-15 Rev0) SNT-TC-1A 2011版制定。
which is in compliance with ASNT SNT-TC-1A
2011 Edition.
3 Examination Medium 3. 检验介质
3.1 The examination medium shall consist of 3.1 检验介质应具有高导磁率
finely divided ferromagnetic particle which have 和低矫顽力的细颗粒的铁磁性粉
high permeability and low retentivity 末，其尺寸和形状应易于产生磁
characteristics. They shall be of suitable size and 粉显示。
shape to readily produce magnetic particle
indication.
3.2 The wet particle with conditioned water 3.2 检验介质应采用水基磁悬
vehicle suspensions shall be used for this 液-黑磁粉(非荧光磁粉)。
procedure . The color was Black
(Non-fluorescent).
3.3 Magnetic particles medium are shown in 3.3 磁粉检验介质见表1。
table 1.
Table 1 Magnetic Particles Medium
表 1 磁粉检验介质
Temperature
Range Limitations
Supplier Medium Name Type Color by Manufacturer
制造厂名称类型颜色
制造商温度范围限
制
Conditioned
Hyperd Vehicle HD- Black
-5~50˚C
宏达 Suspensions BW 黑色
水基磁悬液
3.4 For nonfluorescent particles, the required 3.4 对非荧光磁粉，除非磁粉生

settling volume is from 1.2 to 2.4mL per 100mL if 产厂另有规定，磁悬液沉淀体积
vehicle unless otherwise specified by the particle 应为每100mL载体1.2- 2.4mL。
manufacturer.The batch certificate from 生产商提供的批次证书上应标明
manufacturer shall include the setting volume 磁悬液浓度
data
3.5 The storage life for suspension (HD-BW) 3.5 磁悬液 (HD-BW) 贮存时间
approval of QSOE
版本号 A
QSOE-WI-QM17 5 / 11
shall not exceed 2 year . 不超过2年。
3.6 Contrast Enhancement agent. 3.6 反差增强剂

3.6.1 The contrast Enhancement agent applied 3.6.1 检验员对于非涂层表面采
by the examiner to uncoated surfaces for 用反差增强对比，仅用于增强颜
enhance color contrast. Thickness 色对比性。此反差增强剂不需要
measurement of this nonmagnetic surface 测量厚度。反差增强剂型号为
contrast enhancement is not required. The type FC-5。
of the enhance particle is FC-5.
4 Equipment /Yoke 4. 磁化仪器/磁轭
4.1 Recommended magnetizing equipment is 4.1 检验人员应选用表2的磁化
shown in Table 2. 设备。
Table 2 Recommended Magnetizing Equipment
表 2 推荐的磁化设备
Max Lifting
Model Type Supply Voltage Lifting Power Technique
Distance
型号类型输入电源电压磁轭交流提升力工艺
最大提升距离
Portable 10 Ib (4.5 Kg) Yoke
MP-A2L 220v AC 190mm
便携式 10 磅（4.5kg）磁轭
4.2 Calibration for Lifting Power of Yoke 4.2 磁轭提升力校验

4.2.1 Each alternating current （AC）yoke shall 4.2.1 交流电磁轭在使用的最大
have a lifting power of at least 10 lbs (4.5kg) at 间距上应有至少4.5公斤（10磅）
the maximum pole spacing that will be used. 的提升力。
4.2.2 The lifting power of electro- magnetic 4.2.2 磁轭的提升力检测应该每
yokes shall be checked every 12 month or per 12个月检测一次或按照客户其
client requirement. 它要求。
5 Surface Preparation 5. 表面制备
5.1 All the welds should pass and satisfied the 5.1 焊缝必须经过ISO5817 B级
Visual inspection Per ISO 5817 as level B. And 的外观检验和验收。可以通过以
reduce the affect by surface roughness and 下方式减少表面粗糙度和凹凸不
irregularities. In some cases it can be necessary 平对磁粉检验的影响：
to:
5.1.1 打磨处理咬边缺陷和表面
5.1.1 Dress undercut and surface irregularities 凹凸不平处;
by grinding;
5.1.2 去除或减小焊缝余高;
5.1.2 Remove or reduce the weld
approval of QSOE
版本号 A
QSOE-WI-QM17 6 / 11
reinforcement;
5.2 Prior to all magnetic particle examination, 5.2 磁粉检验前, 焊缝及邻近至
weld and adjacent areas within at least 25mm 少25毫米区域应干燥、没有污物、
shall be dry and free of all dirt, grease, lint, scale, 油脂、纤维屑、氧化皮、焊渣和
weld flux and spatter or oil, other 飞溅以及油和其它影响磁悬液流
extraneousness that could interfere With the 动和缺陷磁痕辨认的杂质。
examination .
5.3 As Acceptance level-1 adopt, the surface 5.3 按照接受标准为1级，焊缝表
condition should be fine surface. Such as the 面必须为良好的表面，焊缝的盖
weld cap and parent material offer smooth clean 面和母材必须平滑过渡，没有咬
surface with negligible undercut, rippling and 边/凹凸不平/飞溅等缺陷。
spatter etc.
6 Examination 6. 检测
6.1 Examination Extent and rate 6.1 检测范围和比例
Magnetic Particle 1 Primary Structure： Primary Structure: Secondary Structure 次结构
examination 磁粉检测 Essential/Non-redundant Non-essential 主结构非关
主结构关键部位键部位
Rate 检测比例 100% 2 20% SPOT 3
1 Dye penetrant examination shall be used where magnetic particle examination is not possible.不能进行磁粉检测的地方应使用
渗透检测。
2 This amount MT need not be applied to welds between fork pockets and floor plates or intermediate structure between these.
The extent of MT on these welds will be decided by the surveyor in each case. 磁粉检测的数量不包括叉槽和底板之间，或其中
间结构的焊缝。这些焊缝的检测范围由验船师或根据不同情况确定。
3 Spot means random examination to the discretion of surveyor.抽样检测由验船师决定。
6.2 Magnetization 6.2 磁化

6.2.1 Verification of magnetization 6.2.1 磁化的验证
The tangential magnetic field strength of 周围磁场强度应该保持在

2KA/m to 6KA/m is recommended, Verification 2KA/m 到 6KA/m之间，验证磁
of the magnetic field strength shall be carried 场强度可以通过以下方式：
out using below method：在最不利的位置采用带有细小
By using the a component containing fine 的自然或者人工不连续的试验
natural or artificial discontinuities in the lest 件。
favorable locations.
approval of QSOE
版本号 A
QSOE-WI-QM17 7 / 11
6.2.2 Overall performance test 6.2.2 综合性能测试

The overall performance for system sensitivity 在现场应进行系统灵敏度的综
shall be checked. The test shall be designed to 合性能试验。试验是来检测设
ensure a proper function/parameters including 备，磁场强度和方向，表面特征，
equipment, the magnetic field strength and 检测介质和亮度的综合性能。
direction, surface characteristics, detecting
media and illumination. 最常用的的检测是采用具有代
The most common test is to use representative 表性的试片进行的，该试片带有
test pieces containing artificial imperfection of 已知类型，尺寸和分布的人工缺
known type, size, and size-distribution, e.g. 陷。像ASME标准的”Pie” 磁场
“Pie” field indicator or shims CX-430 per ASME 指示剂或者CX-430试片或者
Code or A1－30/100 Per GB code. GB标准的A1-30/100型试片。
6.2.3 Direction of Magnetization 6.2.3 磁化方向
To ensure detection of imperfection in all 为了保证所有方向的缺陷都能
orientations, At least two separate 够检测出，各区域至少应分别
examinations shall be performed on each area. 进行两次检测。第二次检测的
During the second examination, the lines of 磁力线方向应与第一次检测的
magnetic flux shall be approximately 方向近似垂直，最大偏差角度
perpendicular to those used during the first 不超过30˚（看图-1）
examination with a maximum deviation of 30˚ 图-1
（See Fig-1）
Fig-1
6.2.4 Magnetizing Technique 6.2.4 磁化技术
approval of QSOE
版本号 A
QSOE-WI-QM17 8 / 11
Yoke Technique 磁轭技术

6.2.5 The magnetization shall be made using 6.2.5 磁化电流采用交流。
alternating current.
6.2.6 The techniques used for magnetizing 6.2.6 选用的磁化方法必须保证
shall produce sufficient magnetic flux in the part 工件上有足够的磁通并使磁力
and the lines of flux oriented perpendicular to 线垂直缺陷。
the direction of discontinuities.
6.2.7 The adequacy of magnetizing field shall 6.2.7 所采用的磁场强度必须满
meet the requirement for indication rejection 足显示拒收缺陷的要求，但过强
discontinuities, however, excessive field 的磁场易产生伪缺陷显示。
strength may produce false indications .
6.3 Method of Examination
6.3 检测方法
6.3.1 White background contrast should be
6.3.1 喷涂反差增强剂前要摇晃
spray properly after sufficiently agitate to
均匀，喷涂的厚度要均匀。
uniformity. The thickness of contrast should be
applied uniformly.
6.3.2 The continue method should be 6.3.2 检验采用连续法，磁悬液
adopt ,The magnetic Particles with vehicle 应该充分搅拌，以保证喷涂过程
should be sufficiently agitated and keep the 中浓度的均匀性. 喷洒磁悬液
concentration was uniformity during spray. 与工件磁化应同时进行，当见到
Suspension spraying and work piece 喷洒的磁悬液的数量已能均匀
magnetization shall be performed at the same 覆盖被检工件时，应迅速停止喷
time and Until all the test surface have been 洒，但是要保持通电两次或以
covered uniformly, then stop spraying but still 上，每次要1到2秒。以获得足够
keep power on 1 to 2S for two shot or more to 的磁场强度，促使磁粉有效聚
achieve sufficient magnet field intensity and 积。
effective gather of magnetic particle.
6.3.3 The Sensitivity testing shim shall be
6.3.3 开始探伤、更换磁悬液以
magnetized under the same condition at
及探伤结束时，须在同一条件下
beginning, suspension change and completed,
对灵敏度试片进行磁化。用以检
to check overall performance of instruments
验仪器设备和磁悬液的综合性
and magnet suspension as well as effective
能，以及被检工件表面有效磁场
magnetic field strength, direction and operation
强度、方向和操作是适当。
capability.
6.4 Examination Coverage 6.4 检测覆盖率
approval of QSOE
版本号 A
QSOE-WI-QM17 9 / 11
Examination shall be performed 100% 进行检验时应保证在所规定的

coverage of the part under inspection at the 灵敏度下能有100%的覆盖。
required sensitivity.
At least Two Separated examination should be 同一位置至少垂直交叉检测两
used, the second direction should be 次。
approximately perpendicular with first
examination.
Once the indication was detected, The close 当一个显示被发现后，应该再做
range examination should be carried out least 近距离垂直方向的检查。
again on the perpendicular the orient of
indication.
6.5 Interpretation 6.5 解释
6.5.1 The interpretation shall identify if an 6.5.1 解释应能分别出非相关指
indication as non-relevant or relevant indication. 示或相关指示。能够解释显示的
Interpretation shall be carried out to identify the 位置和特性。
locations of indications and the character of the
indication.
6.5.2 Surface discontinuities are indicated by 6.5.2 由磁粉堆积指示的表面不
accumulations of magnetic particles which 连续与待检验表面有差别。磁粉
should contrast with the examination surface. 的颜色应与检测表面的颜色有
The color of the magnetic particles shall be 明显的区别。要求检测表面的最
sufficiently different than the color of the 低光强度为1000 Lx 以保证在
examination surface. A minimum light intensity 指示的检测和评估过程中具有
of 1000 Lx is required on the surface to be 足够的灵敏度。
examined to ensure adequate sensitivity during
the examination and evaluation of indications.
6.6 Post Examination Cleaning 6.6 检验后的清洁
After evaluation and final acceptance, the 评定和最终验收后,检验介质应
examination media shall be completely removed. 全部清除,方法如下:
Typical post-cleaning techniques employed are:
a) Drying of wet particles and subsequent a) 湿磁粉应压缩空气或刷子
removal by brushing or compressed air; 吹干擦掉;
b) Removal of wet particles by flushing with b) 用溶剂擦掉湿磁粉。
solvent.
7 Evaluation of Indication 7. 磁粉显示评定

7.1 The test and Evaluation area should be 7.1 检测和评定区应该是焊缝
include the weld metal and adjacent parent metal 和焊缝两边各10mm的母材区域
up to a distance of 10mm on each side
approval of QSOE
版本号 A
7.2 A non-linear indication is one of circular or 7.2 把长与宽之比小于等于3的

elliptical shape with a length equal to or less than 圆形或椭圆形缺陷叫非线性显
three times its width. 示。
7.3 A linear indication is one having a length 7.3 把长与宽之比大于3的缺陷
greater than three times the width. 叫线形显示。
7.4 Any questionable or doubtful indications 7.4 任何有问题或可疑的显示
shall be reexamined with this procedure to 应按本规程要求重新进行检验以
determine whether or not they are relevant. 确定是否为相关缺陷。
7.5 Interpretation of indications shall base on the 7.5 对缺陷的评定除了依据缺
shape and character of the indication. In 陷的形状和特征外，也应参照缺
addition, by reference to the location, orientation 陷的位置、方向，结合工艺过程
of indication, processing sequence and structure 和工件结构特点作综合分析。
design of the part to be examined, composite
analysis may be necessary.
7.6 Unacceptable imperfections shall be 7.6 对检验有不合格区域，在返
removed and welding repairs may be required. 修后应按相同的规程进行复检。
After repair, repaired area shall be reexamined
with the original test procedure.
8 Acceptance Standards 8 接收等级
Acceptance Level 接收等级 Linear Indication 线性显示 Non-Linear Indication 非线性显示
l=length of indication 显示的长度 d=major axis dimension 最大的轴向尺寸
Level 1 等级 1 l≤1.5mm d≤2mm
9 密集型显示
9 Grouped indications
相邻且间距小于其中较小显示主尺寸
Any adjacent indications separated by less than
的显示，应作为单个的连续显示评定。
the major dimension of the smaller shall be
密集显示应按本标准评定。
assessed as a single, continuous indication.
Grouped indications shall be evaluated in
accordance with application standards.
10 Removal of imperfections
10 缺陷的去除
local grinding may be used to reduce or remove
可通过局部打磨减小或去除引起不可
imperfections which are the cause of unacceptable
接受的显示的缺欠。返修区域应使用相
indications. All such areas shall be re-tested and
同的磁化系统和技术重新检测和评定。
evaluated with the same magnetic system and
approval of QSOE
版本号 A
technique.
11 Records and Reports 11 检验记录和报告
The “Magnetic Particle Examination Report” 磁粉检验结束后应签发 “磁粉检
shall be submitted with the final examination 测报告” 。
records.
Report shall include the following information：
报告应包括下列内容：
 Procedure identification and revision.
 程序文件号及版本
 Magnetic particle equipment and type of
 磁粉检测设备和电流类型
current.
 磁粉(目视或荧光，湿或干)
 Magnetic particles (visible or fluorescent,
wet or Dry).  磁化方法
 Magnetizing method.  检测人员及级别
 Inspector and level  材料和厚度
 Material and thickness.  照明设备
 Lighting equipment.  检测结果
 Inspection result  检测日期
 Date of examination.
12 The areas which can not be inspected by 12 不能进行100%磁粉检验的
100% coverage under examination shall be 区域应在报告中说明。
stated in the report.
13 All reports shall be prepared by an NDE level 13 检验报告应由无损检测 II
II Personnel and reviewed by another NDE level 级人员签发，另一个无损检测II
II Personnel. 级人员审核。
14 Records and report shall be retained for a 14 检验记录和报告应至少保存
minimum period of three years. 3年。
approval of QSOE
14. PAINTING RECORD
16
Jotspec
Technical specification
New construction
EPC: Taicang Modex Energy Engineering Limited

Name: QSOE2015092 20FT WORKSHOP CONTAINER
Client: Unit ID: Sub contr:
Cons/Eng: 启东胜狮海工装备有限公司 Version: 1 Date: 2016/1/12
Project: QSOE2015092 20FT WORKSHOP CONTAINER
Prepared by: Alice Wang - Jotun Coatings (ZJG) Co. Ltd - Shanghai
2016-01-12 04:32:41 (UTC) Page 1 of 5

Summary
Project QSOE2015092 20FT WORKSHOP CONTAINER Prepared by Alice Wang - Jotun Coatings (ZJG) Co. Ltd - Shanghai
Customer Taicang Modex Energy Engineering Limited 太仓莫迪思能 Approved by Alice Wang Version 1
源工程有限公司
Location Date 2016/1/12
The paint specification(s) include(s) the following positions and areas

Position Area m²
external 1
internal 1
Total 2
Summary of products and volumes

Product Consumption (l)
HARDTOP XP,RAL 9010 0
JOTACOTE UNIVERSAL,ALUMINIUM RED TONED 1
JOTACOTE UNIVERSAL,GREY 1
JOTUN THINNER NO. 10,CLEAR 0
JOTUN THINNER NO. 17,CLEAR 0
Total 2
2016-01-12 04:32:41 (UTC) Page 2 of 5

Position external ISO 12944-2 category N/A

Substrate Carbon Steel Area 1 m² No. 1
Surface Prep. Surfaces to be coated shall be degreased to ISO 12944-4, Part 6.1.4 Alkaline Cleaning, and abrasive blast cleaned to Sa 2½ (ISO 8501-1) with a
minimum surface profile 75 µm, grade Fine to Medium G, Ry5 (ISO 8503-2).
Product Type Area to Vol. solids Filmthickness (µm) Loss Recoating intervals Thinner Consumption (l)
of paint % % (%) 10°C 23°C 40°C
coat
Dry spec. Wet spec. Min Max Min Max Min Max No. Max Theor. Practical
%
JOTACOTE UNIVERSAL,ALUMINIUM RED TONED FC 100 72 125 174 44 7 h 3 mth 4 h 3 mth 2 h 2 mth 17 10 0 0
JOTACOTE UNIVERSAL,GREY FC 100 72 125 174 44 7h 20 d 4h 14 d 2h 10 d 17 10 0 0
HARDTOP XP,RAL 9010 FC 100 63 60 95 44 14 h * 7h * 4h * 10 10 0 0
Total 310
Remarks: 底架为黑色面漆HARDTOP XP;RAL 9005

顶部警示器为HARDTOP XP;RAL1023
2016-01-12 04:32:41 (UTC) Page 3 of 5

Position internal ISO 12944-2 category N/A

Substrate Carbon Steel Area 1 m² No. 2
Surface Prep. Surfaces to be coated shall be degreased to ISO 12944-4, Part 6.1.4 Alkaline Cleaning, and abrasive blast cleaned to Sa 2½ (ISO 8501-1) with a
minimum surface profile 75 µm, grade Fine to Medium G, Ry5 (ISO 8503-2).
Product Type Area to Vol. solids Filmthickness (µm) Loss Recoating intervals Thinner Consumption (l)
of paint % % (%) 10°C 23°C 40°C
coat Dry spec. Wet spec. Min Max Min Max Min Max No. Max Theor. Practical
%
JOTACOTE UNIVERSAL,ALUMINIUM RED TONED FC 100 72 125 174 44 7 h 3 mth 4 h 3 mth 2 h 2 mth 17 10 0 0
JOTACOTE UNIVERSAL,GREY FC 100 72 125 174 44 7h 20 d 4h 14 d 2h 10 d 17 10 0 0
HARDTOP XP,RAL 9010 FC 100 63 60 95 44 14 h * 7h * 4h * 10 10 0 0
Total 310
Remarks:
2016-01-12 04:32:41 (UTC) Page 4 of 5

* please refer to the relevant technical datasheets and AG application guide for recoating and curing conditions
NR: Not recommended for this exposure or generic type:
Unless otherwise agreed in writing, all product supplied and technical advice given by us are subject to our standard terms and conditions of sale. In the event that supplies are made and
technical advice is given by one of our associated companies or dealers, then such supplies and technical advice shall be subject to the standard terms of sale of that company, a copy of which
is available upon request. The given data must be considered as guidelines only, the figures in some columns may be rounded. Drying times and paint consumptions may vary depending on
actual conditions.
For updated information about our products please refer to our web site at www.jotun.com
2016-01-12 04:32:41 (UTC) Page 5 of 5

15. MANUFACTURING WORKFLOW CARD
17
16. MANUFACTURING TEST REPORTS
18
17. AS BUILT DRAWINGS & SPECIFICATION
19
PROJECT NO. P2005
REV 1
AREA
RATING
PTB 99 ATEX 1161

1 Ex. Safety switch 1 92-ECS-001 CEAG GHG 263 2301 R0002 Rated 690V, 40A, 50/60Hz Outside IP66 Zone1 Exed IIC T6 1
IECEx BKI 07.0012
-55℃ to +52℃
PTB 00 ATEX 1074
2 Ex. Safety switch 2 92-ECS-002 CEAG GHG 261 0005R0010 Rated 690V, 10A, 50/60Hz Outside IP66 Zone1 Ex ed IIC T6 1
IECEx BKI 07.0014
Nemko 10 ATEX 1054

3 PA loudspeaker 92-RA-001/002 DNH CAREEX-6T 100V, Aluminum Inside IP67 Zone1 Ex de IIB+H2 T6 2 -20℃ to +40℃
IECEx NEM 11.0016
WCP2A-R470SF- Sira 06 ATEX 2131X

4 MCP 92-BM-001 KAC 30Vdc Max. . Inside IP66 Zone0 Ex ia IIC T4 1 -25℃ to +70℃
K013 IECEx SIR 08.0105X
8.5 to 33Vdc, Alarm current 40mA@ Baseefa 06 ATEX0007X

5 Smokedetector+base 92-BS-001/002 Apollo ORB-OP-52028-APO Inside IP44 Zone0 Ex ia IIC T5 2 -40℃ to +40℃
24V dc IECEx BAS 06.0002X
IBEx U99ATEX 1096

6 PA JB 92-TJ-001 Bartec 07-56D2-0411 SS316L, 200x200x120 Outside IP66 Zone1 Ex e IIC T5 1 -20℃ to +55℃
IECEx IBE 09.0017
Data JB with Ex IBExU99 ATEX 1096

7 92-TJ-002 Bartec 07-3116-2012 SS316L, 200x200x120 Outside IP66 Zone 1 Ex e II T6 1
IBEx U99ATEX 1096

8 Signal JB 92-CJ-001 Bartec 07-56D2-0411 SS316L, 200x200x120 Outside IP66 Zone1 Ex e IIC T5 1
IECEx IBE 09.0017
-20℃ to +55℃
Power JB with Ex IBEx U99ATEX 1096
9 92-EJ-001 Bartec 07-3116-3012 SS316L, 300x200x120 Outside IP66 Zone 1 Ex e II T6 1
IBEx U99ATEX 1096

10 EX JB 92-EJ-003 Bartec 07-56B2-0111 SS316L, 150x150x80 Inside IP66 Zone 1 Ex e II T6 1
IECEx IBE 09.0017
48X1.2W LED'S 60W，AC110- SIRA 09 ATEX 5159X

11 Ex Flood Light 92-EFL-001 HADAR HDL106N1HMHW004 Outside IP66 Zone1 Ex e mb IIC T4 1 -20ºC to +50ºC
240V，50/60hz IECEx SIR 09.0064X
PTB 98 ATEX 3121

12 Ex Light Switch 92-ELS-002 CEAG GHG273 2000 R0003 Zone1 ATEX&IECEX,2xM20 Inside IP66 Zone1 Ex ed IIC T6 1 –20 °C to +40 °C
IECEx BKI 07.0036
230V,50/60Hz 2x8W with INERIS 13 ATEX 0027X

13 Emergency light 92-EXL-001/002 Bartec EVFG208E Inside IP66 Zone1 Ex d IIC T5 2 -20℃ to +60℃
batterybackup IECEx INE 13.0056X
PTB 00 ATEX 1068

14 ESD button 92-ECS-004A/B Bartec 07-3511-10N84 Zone1 ATEX&IECEX Inside IP66 Zone1 Ex ed IIC T6 2 -55℃ to +60℃
IECEx PTB 08.0022
NEMKO 04ATEX 1338
15 Duct heater(Optional) 92-FE-001 Backer OKB-2020 4kw, 400V, Duct heater Inside IP66 Zone 1 Ex ed II T3 1 -60℃ to +80℃
IECx NEM 13.0020X
Operation on 380-690V power
SIRA 10ATEX 1239X
16 CPFG Panel 92-IB-001 PDC EJB 241M supply, combined pressure, F&G Inside IP65 Zone 1 Ex d [ia] IIB T5 1 -20℃ to +55℃
IECEx SIR 12.0071X
control, IP65
PTB 02 ATEX 1159
17 Audible&Visual alarm 92-IX1-001 Bartec 07-3103-2209 24Vdc, triple lights for alarm Inside IP65 Zone 1 Ex d IIC T6 1 -55℃ to +80℃
IECEx PTB 10.0043

air inlet） N 20mA,consumption 50mA@24V IECEx BAS 05.0043X

main room ,Optional) N 20mA,consumption 50mA@24V IECEx BAS 05.0043X
Page 1 of 2
PROJECT NO. P2005
REV 1
AREA
RATING
CH4 gas detector（in Zone1 ATEX&IECEx, 7- DMT 02ATEX E 202X

20 92-AB-003 MSA Ultima XE Inside IP66 Zone 1 EEx d IIC T4 1 -40℃ to +60℃
airlock） 30VDC,3wires, 4-20mA IECEx FWG 07.0006X
Baseefa 04 ATEX
H2S gas detector CROWCO
21 92-AS-001 Xgard type 1 10-30Vdc, output 4-20mA Inside IP65 Zone 0 Ex ia IIC T4 1 0115/6X -20℃ to +50℃
(Optional) N IECEx BAS 05.0042X
SCHISCHE PTB 04 ATEX 1028X

22 Fire DamperActutor ExMAX-15-SF 24 - 230Vac/dc Inside IP66 Zone 1 EEx d IIC T5/T6 2 -40℃ to +40℃
K IECEx PTB 07.0057X
Fire Damper Limit IBEXU 01ATEX1007X

23 92-GE-001/002 Bartec 07-2511 24Vdc Inside IP66 Zone 1 Ex d IIC T6 2 -55°C to +75 °C
Switch IECEx PTB 07.0045X
Fire Damper Junction PTB 08ATEX 1064

24 Bartec 07-5103-1221/2090 Max 1100V, 500A Inside IP66 Zone 1 Ex e II T6 2 -55℃ to +40℃
Box IECEx PTB 09.0009X
Pressurization fan
25 92-GK-003 Systemair EX 180-4 400V, 3-Phase, Centrifugal fan Outside IP56 Zone 1 EEx e II T3 1 SP03ATEX3101X -20℃ to +40℃
motor
-20 °C to +60 °C OriginalIP rating is

CESI 01 ATEX 103
26 Condenser fan motor 92-GK-001/002 CEMP AC80 220v/380v,50Hz,0.6KW Outside IP56 Zone 1 Ex de IIC T4 2 IP 55, Modex installprotection cover
IECEx CES 10.0014
to increase the IPrating to IP56
DMT 02ATEX E183

27 Exd Telephone 92-RG-001 Bartec FHF 24 VDC to 66 VDC Inside IP66 Zone1 EEx emb[ib] IIC T5 1 -25℃ to +60℃
IECEx BVS 11.0033
Reserved for disconnection of UPS INERIS 03 ATEX 0210

28 Isolator Panel 92-IB-002 Bartec CCF2 Inside IP66 Zone1 Ex d IIB T6 1 -20℃ to +40℃
battery IECEx INE 13.0065X
29 CPFG Battery 92-EB-002 STAHL 8316/22-24-100 24V,10AH, With Exe enclosure Inside IP65 Zone 1 Ex d IIC T6 1 KEMA 04ATEX 2237X -20℃ to +40℃
Brass, Nickel plated, for armoured Inside/Out TUV 14ATEX 7534X

30 Cable Gland CCG E1EXU IP66 Zone 1 Ex de IIC T3 -20℃ to +95℃
power& instrumentation cable side IECEx ITA 14.0008X
Brass, Nickel plated, for Inside/Out TUV 13ATEX 7397X

31 Cable Gland CCG A2F IP66 Zone 1 Ex de IIC T3 -20℃ to +95℃
communication cable. side IECEx ITA 12.0014X
Brass, Nickel plated, compund barrier Inside/Out Sira 06 ATEX 1097X

32 Cable Gland CMP PX2KX-REX IP66 Zone 1 Ex d IIC T3 -20℃ to +95℃
gland for Exd enclosure side IECEx SIR 06.0044X
Page 2 of 2
PROJECT NO. P2005
Non-Ex Equipment List Type 20FT Pressurized Workshop
REV DESCRIPTION DATE EXEC. CHECK APPR. UNIT NO.
1 Initial design 24/11/2015 Shiliang Chunlei Yang DOC NO. P2005-EL-LS-0103
REV 1

ITEM DESCRIPTION IDENTIFICATION MODEL NO. TECHNICAL SPEC. MAKER QTY IP RATING REMARK
1 Transformer 92-ET-001 Dyn11 20KVA, 380-690V 50/60Hz AET 1 IP21
2 Distribution box 92-EL-001 DJB-704520S 700x450x200 Hanyu 1 IP44

CLEVECONTRO
3 Pressure switch 92-IP-001 AFS-262 Differential pressure switch 50-250Pa 1 _
L
CLEVECONTRO
4 Air flow switch 92-IF-001 AFS-262 Differential pressure switch 50-250Pa 1 _
L
5 Pressure gauge 92-IG-001 MAGNEHELIC 0-250Pa Dwyer 1 _
6 Roof light in main room 92-ENL-001 to 002 GRMB G 236 220V 2x36W GLAMOX 2 IP65
7 Light switch 92-ELS-001 K4876WHI 220V 10A 2-pole MK 1 IP20
8 230V sockets 2-gang 92-EO1-001 to 007 S2647WHI 230V, 13A, 2-gang, UK type MK 7 IP20
9 110V sockets 2-gang 92-EO2-001 to 004 K2252WHI 110V, 15A, 2-gang, US type MK 4 IP20
10 230V red sockets 2-gang 92-EO4-001 to 003 K2747RED 230V, 13A, 2-gang, UK type MK 3 IP20
11 230V socket 1-gang 92-EO3-001 572104 230V, 10A, 1-gang LEGRAND 1 _
12 LAN socket LAN 001 to 004 572303 Cat5E，RJ45 LEGRAND 4 _
13 USB socket USB 001 to 004 572275 NA LEGRAND 8 _
14 VGA VGA 001 to 004 572282 NA LEGRAND 4 _
15 Compressor 92-KC-001 to 002 ZR36K3E-TFD-522 380V 2.02KW, three phase COPELAND 2 _
16 Evaporator fan 92-KV-001 to 002 YWM311 28000BTU 50/60hz 220-240V YORK 2 IP44
17 Battery Charger 92-BC-001 Series G0-300 Input 110V~240V, output 24V, 1A MENTZER 1 IP54
18 Charge JB 92-EJ-002 BC-AG-6P 75x75x35mm BOXOCO 1 IP44
19 Dual thermostat NA 01172.0-00 NO:0 to+60℃，NC:0 to 60℃ STEGO 2 IP20
20 Thermostat(Heating) 92-ITS-003 RAA 21 220V SIEMENS 1 IP30
21 Thermostat(AC) 92-ITS-001 to 002 RAB10 220V SIEMENS 2 IP30
PAGE 1 OF 1
Transmission Calculation
P2005-HV-CA-0101
Ver. 1.0
Date 2/9/2015
Project No. P2005

Project Name 20ft Pressurized Workshop Cabin
Customer -
Unit No. -
MODEX Kevin Liu Ben Xue Steve Shen

TEMPERATURE, HEATING, COOLING DATA
ORDER : P2005-HV-CA-0101_1.0
55C @ 70%
SYSTEM : Air Con Base Calc

SYS.TYP : REGOVENT
OUTSIDETEMPERATURES :
tOUT,WI -10 °C
tOUT,PR 55 °C 70 % R.H.
tOUT,SEK 55 °C 70 % R.H.
tWATER,WI -10 °C
tWATER,SU 55 °C
ROOMTEMPERATURES :
tWI 24 °C SOLL: IST:
tPR 24 °C 50 55.0 % R.H
tSEK 24 °C 50 55.0 % R.H
tENG,WI 5 °C
tENG,SU 55 °C (GEM. KLASSE)
RECIRC. AIR / REGOTHERM : AIR QUANTITIES:

REC. AIR 75 % FRESH AIR 30 m³/h/PERSON
REGOTHERM 0 % REC.AIR 90 m³/h/PERSON
REC.+REGO 75 %
HEATING :
tiPREH -10.0 °C dtPREH 20 °C
tiREH 10 °C dtREH 14 °C
tiHUMIDIF. °C QPREH 4 KW
tuHOT 24 °C QREH 3 KW
dtLOSS,HOT 0 K
COOLING : dhPR 61.3 KJ

tiCOOLPR 34.0 °C 75.5 %R.H. dhSEK 61.3 KJ
tiCOOLSEK 34.0 °C 75.5 %R.H. QPR 14 KW
dtCOLD 10.0 K QSEK 14 KW
dtMOT 0.0 K dh/dxPR 38970 KJ/KG
tuPR 14.0 °C 100 %R.H. dh/dxSEK 38970 KJ/KG
tuSEK 14.0 °C 100 %R.H. KOND. 0.003 l/s
HEAT EMITTED BY A PERSON (SENSIBLE): SOLAR HEAT GAIN:

PRIMARY 75 W/PERSON 350 W/m²
SEKUNDERY 75 W/PERSON
AIR VOLUME : ROOM VOLUME:

Vct 142 l/s 510 m³/h 20 m³
Vh 0 l/s 0 m³/h 128 m³/h
Purging Calculation
P2005-HV-CA-0102
Ver. 2.0
Date 2016/3/28
Project No. P2005

Project Name 20ft Pressurized Workshop Cabin
DNV 2.7-2 No. DVR-P5994-J-7528
Customer -
Unit No -
MODEX Kevin Liu Ben Xue Steve Shen
2.0 2016/3/28 Second Version Ben Xue Kevin Liu Steve Shen
1.0 2015/4/8 First Version Kevin Liu Ben Xue Steve Shen
PURGING CALCULATION
20ft Pressurized Workshop Cabin
DIMENSION OF Outlet:
Measured opening: 0.0475 sqm
DIMENSION TABLE OF OBJECT:
Length: 5.74 meter Void Space 0.41 m3

Width: 2.14 meter
Height: 2.39 meter
Area: 5.11 meter
Total Volume: 28.70 m3
REQUIREMENTS:
IECEX 10.00 n/h used for calculation
ATEX 10.00 n/h
DNV 2.7-2 6.00 n/h
Norsok 8.00 n/h
MODEX 8.00 n/h
PURGING TIME CALCULATION:
Fan Air Volume 300.00 m3/h

Space Volume 28.29 m3/h
Time / air change 339.48 sec
Total purging time 56.58 minutes 3395 Seconds
Pressure Switch
Set point: 50 Pa Reset point: 30 Pa
AC-03-01
AC-02-02
AC-09-08
01 Frist 04.08.2015 Kevin Ben Steve
AC-04-01/
AC-04-02
20ft Offshore Customized Cabin

Aircon piping
Refrigerant: R134a schematic P2005
Air Con Piping Principle
Kevin
1.0 02.09.2015
P2005-HV-DW-0401
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATON
P2005 20FT PRESSURIZED WORKSHOP CABIN
Reference Picture
1
SPECIFICATION CODE: P2005-TE-SP-0101
PRODUCT CODE: P2005 VERSION 5.0
DATE: 29.10.2015 PAGE 2 / 12
Document Revision Status / Change Log
PREPARED CHECKED APPROVED CUSTOMER
Jonathan Wu Lars Jacobsen Samsinah Amsah

1. Use the new template.
2. All dimensions as well in inch/ft.
3. All weights as well in lbs.
4. All temperatures as well in Fahrenheit.
5. Delete several description. (3.1)
6. Change noise level to "noise from the cabin" (3.3)
7. Delete the original 4.1.4.
8. Delete the original 4.2.3, 4.2.4.
9. Change the title electrics. (5)
5.0 2015-10-29 10. Add amperage to the power supply. (5.1) JW LJ SA
11. Change the title F&G System (Fire and Gas Safety
System). (6)
12. Add the "optional" at the H2S gas detector. (Table-
6.1)
13. AC indicate the capacity in BTU and kW. (Table-8.1)
14. Move all the optional to the last page. (13)
15. Add the optional UPS System for power backup.(13.4,
13.5)
16. Add the optional 1200mm kickplate.(13.15)
4.0 2015-09-08 Adjust 9.1 JW LJ SA
3.0 2015-08-29 Adjust 2.1, 3.4, 3.5, 4.1.3, 4.4.11, 10, 12 JW LJ SA
2.0 2015-07-16 Adjust the type of the computer cabinet. JW LJ SA
1.0 2015-07-01 INITIAL ISSUE JW LJ SA
2
DATE: 29.10.2015 PAGE 3 / 12
Content
1 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................................ 4
2 DESIGN COMPLIANCE CODES ..................................................................................................... 4
2.1 Design certified (C.O.C: Third party certification) ........................................................................... 4
2.2 Design compliancy (D.O.C: Declaration of conformity) ................................................................... 4
3 GENERAL DESIGN AND CRITERIA ............................................................................................... 4
3.1 Area Classification ...................................................................................................................... 4
3.2 Gas Group & Temperature Class ................................................................................................. 4
3.3 Noise levels ................................................................................................................................ 4
3.4 Design Temperature ................................................................................................................... 4
3.5 Design Pressure ......................................................................................................................... 5
3.6 Fire Classification........................................................................................................................ 5
4 CONSTRUCTION .......................................................................................................................... 5
4.1 Steelwork & Ratings .................................................................................................................... 5
4.2 Coating & Marking ...................................................................................................................... 5
4.3 Architectural ............................................................................................................................... 5
4.4 Internal Fitments ......................................................................................................................... 6
5 ELECTRIC FITOUT ........................................................................................................................ 7
6 FIRE AND GAS SAFETY SYSTEM .................................................................................................. 8
7 CABIN VENTILATION .................................................................................................................... 9
8 COOLING SYSTEM ....................................................................................................................... 9
9 P.A. / TELECOMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ...............................................................................10
10 SUBMITTAL SCOPE & DESIGN VERIFICATION ............................................................................10
11 DOCUMENTATION ......................................................................................................................11
12 APPENDICES .............................................................................................................................11
APPENDIX A: P2005-TE-DW-0101, only for reference. ......................................................................... 11
13 OPTIONAL FEATURES ...............................................................................................................11
CONFIDENTIAL DOCUMENT
The information contained in this document and its attachments is confidential. Unless otherwise specified, no part of this
publication may be reproduced or utilized in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and
microfilm, without permission in writing from the owner below:
MODEX ENERGY SERVICES LTD

Email: info@modexenergy.com
Web: http://www.modexenergy.com
3
DATE: 29.10.2015 PAGE 4 / 12
1 INTRODUCTION
This document presents the technical specification, standards of compliancy and detailed quality
requirement of Modex pressurized cabin product, in design, fabrication, testing and commissioning.
The cabin is equipped with standard accessories and fittings according to layout and functional
requirements. With optional additional features if specified. Product Code: P2005
2 DESIGN COMPLIANCE CODES

2.1 Design certified (C.O.C: Third party certification)
DNV 2.7-1 Offshore Containers (June 2013)
DNV 2.7-2 Offshore service modules (May 2013)
BS EN 12079-1:2006 Offshore containers – design, manufacture and marking
CSC – Container Shipping Certificate
2.2 Design compliancy (D.O.C: Declaration of conformity)

SOLAS (Safety of Life at Sea) regarding P.F.P. (Passive Fire Protection Aspects)
NORSOK Z-015 Temporary equipment (Rev.4, Sept. 2012)
Directive 94-9-EC ATEX (Zone 2)
IEC 60079-13-2010 Equipment Protection by Pressurized Room “p”
BS EN 50381 – Transportable ventilated rooms
3 GENERAL DESIGN AND CRITERIA

3.1 Area Classification
5.0 Ambient: Zone 1 / Zone 2
Main Room: Safe Zone during pressurization
Air-lock: Zone 1 / Zone 2
3.2 Gas Group & Temperature Class

Group II, IIB T3
3.3 Generated noise levels

5.0 External noise maximum = 80db (A)
Internal noise maximum = 55db (A)
3.4 Design Temperature

Environment Design Temperature: -10℃ to +55℃, max. Relative Humidity: < 80%
+14°F to +131°F, max. Relative Humidity: < 80%
Steel design Temperature: -40℃ to +50℃ = -40°F to +122°F
DNV 2.7-2 temperature: -20℃ to +40℃ = -4°F to 104°F
4
DATE: 29.10.2015 PAGE 5 / 12
3.5 Design Pressure

Internal pressure minimum = 75Pa
3.6 Fire Classification

The total cabin is rated to A-60 for the structure execution and all subparts
4 CONSTRUCTION
4.1 Steelwork & Ratings
4.1.1 External Dimensions: 6058mm (20ft) Length x 2438mm (8ft) Width x 2896mm (9.5ft)
Height, Roof, Wall steel materials thickness 4mm
4.1.2 Ratings: Max Gross weight 10,000 kg, Payload 1,500 kg (approx.), Tare Mass
8,500kg.Ratings: Max Gross weight 22,040lbs, Payload 3,300lbs (approx.), Tare Mass
18,740lbs.
4.1.3 Lifting point: 4 no Pad-eyes
5.0 4.1.4 ISO Conner Castings: 8 no ISO corner casting fitted to top/base corners
4.1.5 Prefabrication welded Multi Cable Transits for cables and pipe entries through steelwork
walls. (4.3 details)
4.2 Coating & Marking
4.2.1 Coating of steelwork

Blast clean to Sa 21/2 ISO 8501-1
Paint specification ref to TE-13-02-TE-SP-0001
4.2.2 External Color: According to MODEX standard marking layout
4.2.3 All internal and external safety labels shall be off fluorescent type.
5.0
4.3 Architectural
4.3.1 1 no. recessed A60 outward personnel door, carbon steel, external stainless steel handle,
automatic door closer and heavy duty hinges to be included. Stainless steel crash bar
installed to protect the handle. Note: Door paint shall be 3 coat painting system, same as
Carbon steel. Dimensions: 2000mm(79in) Height x 800mm(32in) Width
4.3.2 1 no. recessed A60 outward escape hatches, Carbon steel, internal panic bar and external
handle, escape hatches can be opened on both sides. Stainless steel crash bar installed
5
DATE: 29.10.2015 PAGE 6 / 12
to protect the handle. Note: Escape hatches paint shall be 3 coat painting system, same
as carbon steel, dimension 800mm(32in) x 800mm(32in).
4.3.3 2 no. S4*1 and 4 no. S2*1 Transits for all cables and pipe entries.
2 no. S4*1 Transit provided for customer cable entries at the end of cabin.
4.3.4 At one end a recess will be formed to house all technical hook-up connections and outside
AC condenser units.
4.3.5 A60 Rated Mineral wool insulation will be applied to all steelwork inside, walls, roofs.
Pre-Fabricated A60 rated floating floor system welded in steel floor.
4.3.6 1 no. Air-lock incorporating B15 door with viewing window and automatic door closer.
4.3.7 2 no. Earth Boss fixed at the each end of cabin.
4.3.8 1 no. step ladder facility to safely access the rooftop
4.3.9 B15 Rated marine panelling system will be utilized for the wall lining and internal partitions
4.3.10 Non-slip PVC flooring, color grey
4.3.11 1 no. A60 windows with mesh protection, carbon steel, dimension 550mm(22in) x
650mm(26in)
4.3.12 1 no. ABUS Key Garage 787 for secure storage of keys, mounted on the wall outside.
Note: Key shall be properly tagged/labelled.
4.4 Internal Fitments

The internal fitments will be built to suit the configuration and layout of cabin, the exact furniture
will have to be approved by customer before execution. All interior stainless steel parts defined as
SS316.
4.4.1 Fixed height Workbench: “L” shape worktop, Worktops manufactured in Stone/Corian. .
Left side part dimensions: about 4000mm(158in) x 600mm(24in) x 910mm(36in)
Front side (end of cabin) part with a fold down workbench. Dimensions: about 2100mm
(83in) x 600mm(24in) x 910mm(36in). Foldable dimension 1000mm(40in) x 600mm(24in)
Fixed sink section inside the end L –shaped section.
4.4.2 2 no. drawer cabinet c/w five drawers under the workbench. The loading of each drawer
is 50 kg(110lbs), material steel.
6
DATE: 29.10.2015 PAGE 7 / 12
4.4.3 2 no. cupboard 550mm(22in) x 370mm(15in) x 500mm(20in) mounted at high level of side
wall, fitted above workbench. All cupboards manufactured in white aluminium with two
locks.
4.4.4 2 no. cupboard 550mm(22in) x 370mm(15in) x 500mm(20in) mounded at high level of

side wall. All cupboards manufactured in white aluminium with two locks.
4.4.5 1 no. White board.
4.4.6 1 no. Coat hooks in airlock.
4.4.7 1 no. 5kg(lbs) CO2 fire extinguisher close to the airlock internal door
4.4.8 1 no. Services air input fittings, 8 bars Maximum, four quickly connector fitted in inside.
Outside connected via quick coupling.
4.4.9 1 no. 42U 19” Computer cabinet c/w Spring damping Mechanism
4.4.10 1 no. Glass blasted aluminium frame with four tilt and swivel brackets for monitors
mounted.
4.4.11 Use of the standard Modex Lock in stainless steel with Modex Logo engraved
4.4.12 Slide frame for 3pcs monitor brackets
5 ELECTRIC FITOUT
5.0
5.1 Power supply: acceptable voltage input 380v/415v/440v/480v/600v-690v 3 phase + Earth
5.0 Power Consumption of the cabin = 25Amps/Phase
5.2 Cables: Minimum of flame retardant according to IEC 60332-1-2 and IEC 60332-3-22
Cable containment: Cables installed within cable trunking or clipped on stainless steel
perforated plate. Metal cable glands.
5.3 2 no. Ex rated hook-up isolator safety switch for the power input
5.4 3 no. Ex rated Junction for Signal, Data, P.A. loudspeaker hook-up, it is rust proof.
5.5 1 no. 20KVA rated transformer with Primary 380-415-440-480-600-690V/3P, Secondary

output of 400V/3P+N 18KVA and 110V/1P 2KVA.
5.6 1 no. Distribution board c/w circuit breakers.
7
DATE: 29.10.2015 PAGE 8 / 12
5.7 2 no. fluorescent light fixed at the ceiling. 1no. light switch control.
5.8 2 no. Ex emergency light fitting: one fixed in airlock ceiling, one fixed in main room above
the emergency Exit. The emergency light Zone 1 Ex-approved and light fittings with
integral battery and battery capacity for at least 60 min should be used.
5.9 7 no. 230V 13A UK twin type switch socket above the workbench.
5.10 4 no. 110V 15A US twin type socket above the workbench
5.11 3 UPS (red) sockets 220V-1Ph that are prewired to the server rack.
5.12 1 no. Ex flood light to be provided at recessed area for night operations/servicing.
6 FIRE AND GAS SAFETY SYSTEM

5.0
The system is Ex-approved and suitable for installation within Pressurized Cabin, and the system
has an emergency supply interface fitted which will operate the CPFG Control and Monitoring. For
the system, each unit is prepared for fitting the total of 3 CH4 sensors and 1 H2S sensor, but the
real installation detector is selective. The system is suitable for operation on
380/415/480/600/690Vac 50/60Hz power supply. System Operating Temperature: -20(-4°F) to
+55℃(131°F), Storage Temperature: -40(-40°F) to +60℃(140°F). The CPFG for controlling the
purge, pressurization and shut down of the cabin, the system also incorporate the Air pressure,
Fire and Gas monitoring and alarm Ex-approved equipment.
6.1 2 no. Smoke detector
6.2 2 no. CH4 Gas detector, fixed in air inlet and fixed in Air-lock.
6.3 A power hook up of emergency power 200~240v must be provided for function system.
Table-6.1 List of Ex-approved equipment
5.0
Ex-approved Equipment AREA RATING QTY
Ex. Safety switch Zone1 1

Ex. Safety switch Zone1 1
Manual Call Point Zone1 1
Smoke detector Zone1 2
ESD Push button Zone1 2
Audible & Visual alarm Zone 1 1
CH4 gas detector Zone 1 2 (optional 1)
H2S gas detector Zone 1 (optional1)
8
DATE: 29.10.2015 PAGE 9 / 12
7 CABIN VENTILATION
The ventilation fan will be powered and controlled via the cabin CPFG panel.
7.1 1 no. packaged ventilation unit included an Ex-rated pressurize fan. Unit casing
manufactured to the stainless steel to withstand the offshore conditions c/w duct and
adapter flange to connected fire damper, this unit fixed in the external recess.
7.2 2 no. A60 fire-rated and Ex-rated electrical fire damper fixed in air inlet and outlet, frame
material thickness 3mm (0.12in) with galvanized. Function of cut off the air supply and
close the damper from CPFG control. Normal release temperatures of fuses included.
7.3 1 no. Pressure adjustment damper fixed in outlet and close to the fire damper
7.4 1 no. Minihelic gauge to monitor and provide reading of internal pressure.
7.5 1 no. Pressure switch
7.6 1 no. Air flow switch
8 COOLING SYSTEM
The cabin has been designed to cooling to inside temperature approx. 24℃ (75°F) or less during
summer conditions. 2 sets of independent Split Air conditioning is specially customized for offshore
operation to withstand the toughest weather conditions. The two compressor combined unit is
mounted inside and next to a wall mounted evaporator cooling unit. Two condenser will be fixed in
the external recess. The functions of the units are reduced to cooling only.
8.1 1 no. combined control panel is designed to AC operate and control c/w status indication
lamps on the panel.
8.2 2 no. temperature control thermostats designed to control the cooling supply.
Table-8.1 Summary list of AC equipment

5.0
Capacity 1 x 24000BTU & 1 x 7kW
Refrigerant Gas R134a
Compressor COPELAND 400V 3-Phase 50/60Hz
Evaporator YORK 28000 BTU
Condenser Fan motor Zone 1, Exe II T3, 400V 3-Phase 50/60Hz
Expansion Valve DANFOSS
9
DATE: 29.10.2015 PAGE 10 / 12
9 P.A. / TELECOMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT

9.1 2 no. Ex P.A. speaker located in the main room
Speakers wired to Ex e junction box in the hook-up recess.
9.2 1 no. Telephone cable wired to the externally located Ex e junction box in the hook-up
recess.
9.3 1 no. CAT6 LAN cable wired to the externally located Ex e junction box in the hook-up
recess.
9.4 PC & Monitor Cabling

VGA: 4 no. VGA socket above workbench
USB: 8 no. USB socket above workbench
LAN: 4 no. Ethernet ports above workbench
PC and monitor cable shall have end protector cap and be secured in a junction box /
plastic box.
10 SUBMITTAL SCOPE & DESIGN VERIFICATION

Each product shall be design approved by the contracted client prior to production start. The
design approval is acceptable to be staged to allow better project time management.
Submittal, Review and Confirmation of the container body:

XXXXX-TE-DW-0203 Marking Layout
XXXXX-TE-DW-0101 General Arrangement
XXXXX-ST-DW-1012 Container Verification Drawings
Submittal, Review and Confirmation of the cabin and systems:

XXXXX-TE-DW-0101 General Arrangement
XXXXX-TE-DW-0203 Marking Layout
XXXXX-EL-DW-0301 Electrical System - Hook-up Client
XXXXX-EL-DW-0201 Electrical System - Layout
XXXXX-EL-DW-0202 Electrical System - Block Diagram
XXXXX-EL-DW-0401 Electrical System - Single Line
XXXXX-EL-DW-0402 Electrical System - Schematic
XXXXX-HV-CA-0101 Transmission Calculation
XXXXX-HV-CA-0102 Purge Calculation
XXXXX-HV-DW-0401 P&ID AC Scheme
XXXXX-HV-DW-0402 P&ID Ventilation Scheme
XXXXX-EL-LS-0102 Electrical System - Ex Equipment List
XXXXX-EL-LS-0103 Electrical System - Non-Ex Equipment List
10
DATE: 29.10.2015 PAGE 11 / 12
Submittal, Review and Confirmation of the construction drawings:

All detail drawings of the product that are relevant for the layout or installation or product for
components or outsourced assemblies.
Submittal of the as built drawings:
As final set of drawings as per above clarified scope is to be submitted with the data book and
separately to the approval center.
All design drawings are to be submitted in its original form CAD / Word / Excel or else and in PDF
for review and confirmation.
11 DOCUMENTATION
• Scope for documentation as per standard MODEX data book supply scope:
• Container Certificates 2.7-1
• Load Test Report & Weight Report
• Vendor Data Intrinsic Safe Equipment
• Lifting Sling Certificate
• Operation Manual & Hook Up
• AC Operation Manual
• Material Test Certificates
• Welding Procedure Specification
• Welder / Welding Operator Qualification Records
• Dimensional Report
• Welding & NDT Report
• NDT Procedure / NDT Operator Certificates
• Painting Record
• Manufacturing Test Reports
• As built Drawings & Specification
• MSDS Compliance Documents
12 APPENDICES
APPENDIX A: P2005-TE-DW-0101, only for reference.
13 OPTIONAL FEATURES
5.0
13.1 Slide frame for 7pcs monitor brackets
13.2 1 no. CPFG Battery and associated with the enclosures for CPFG power supply.
11
DATE: 29.10.2015 PAGE 12 / 12
13.3 1 no. Exd Separation panel for battery functions
13.4 1 no. 3kVA UPS System for power backup

5.0
13.5. 1 no, 5kVA UPS System for power backup
13.6 1 no. CH4 Sensor mounted in the main to allow for usage of batteries
13.7 1 no Ex Duct Heater mounted into air inlet with thermostat control
13.8 1 no. H2S Sensor mounted In the main room to allow for storage of chemicals
13.9 1 no. Flexible Ducting for relocation of air turbine in rated zones
13.10 1 set. 30m (98.4ft) power cable terminated with plug and rolled in cable hanger
13.11 1 no. Oven, JIM Type: GPME-OV-52
13.12 1no. Fume Hood. Steel Sheet Metal Design c/w Plexiglas viewport about 300mm (11in) x
300mm (11in) of the effective use of space
13.13 Worktop Material Upgrade: MDF worktops.
13.14 Worktop Material Upgrade: MDF with stainless steel surfacing worktops
13.15 1200mm (47in) stainless steel kick plates in the cabin

5.0
12
18. MSDS COMPLIANCE DOCUMENTS
20
Material Safety Data Sheet
DuPont™ SUVA® 134a refrigerant

Version 2.3
Revision Date 09/12/2011 Ref. 130000000349
This SDS adheres to the standards and regulatory requirements of the United States and may not meet the regulatory
requirements in other countries.
SECTION 1. PRODUCT AND COMPANY IDENTIFICATION
™ ®
Product name : DuPont SUVA 134a refrigerant
Product Grade/Type : ASHRAE Refrigerant number designation: R-134a
Tradename/Synonym : HFC-134a
®
SUVA 134a
MSDS Number : 130000000349
Product Use : Refrigerant
Manufacturer : DuPont
1007 Market Street
Wilmington, DE 19898
Product Information : 1-800-441-7515 (outside the U.S. 1-302-774-1000)

Medical Emergency : 1-800-441-3637 (outside the U.S. 1-302-774-1139)
Transport Emergency : CHEMTREC: 1-800-424-9300 (outside the U.S. 1-703-527-3887)
SECTION 2. HAZARDS IDENTIFICATION

Emergency Overview
Rapid evaporation of the liquid may cause frostbite.
Potential Health Effects

Skin
1,1,1,2- : Contact with liquid or refrigerated gas can cause cold burns and frostbite.
Tetrafluoroethane May cause skin irritation.
May cause: Discomfort, itching, redness, or swelling.
Eyes
1,1,1,2- : Contact with liquid or refrigerated gas can cause cold burns and frostbite.
Tetrafluoroethane May cause eye irritation.
May cause: tearing, Redness, Discomfort.
1 / 10

Version 2.3
Inhalation
1,1,1,2- : Misuse or intentional inhalation abuse may cause death without warning
Tetrafluoroethane symptoms, due to cardiac effects.
Other symptoms potentially related to misuse or inhalation abuse are:
Anaesthetic effects, Light-headedness, dizziness, confusion,
incoordination, drowsiness, or unconsciousness, irregular heartbeat with a
strange sensation in the chest, heart thumping, apprehension, feeling of
fainting, dizziness or weakness.
Vapours are heavier than air and can cause suffocation by reducing oxygen
available for breathing.
Carcinogenicity
None of the components present in this material at concentrations equal to or greater than 0.1% are listed by
IARC, NTP, or OSHA, as a carcinogen.
SECTION 3. COMPOSITION/INFORMATION ON INGREDIENTS
Component CAS-No. Concentration
1,1,1,2-Tetrafluoroethane 811-97-2 100 %
SECTION 4. FIRST AID MEASURES

Skin contact : In case of contact, immediately flush skin with plenty of water for at least 15
minutes. Take off all contaminated clothing immediately. Consult a physician.
Wash contaminated clothing before re-use. Treat for frostbite if necessary by
gently warming affected area.
Eye contact : In case of contact, immediately flush eyes with plenty of water for at least 15
minutes. Consult a physician if necessary.
Inhalation : Remove from exposure, lie down. Move to fresh air. Keep patient warm and
at rest. Artificial respiration and/or oxygen may be necessary. Consult a
physician.
2 / 10

Version 2.3
Ingestion : Is not considered a potential route of exposure.
General advice : Never give anything by mouth to an unconscious person. When symptoms
persist or in all cases of doubt seek medical advice.
Notes to physician : Because of possible disturbances of cardiac rhythm, catecholamine drugs,

such as epinephrine, that may be used in situations of emergency life support
should be used with special caution.
SECTION 5. FIREFIGHTING MEASURES

Flammable Properties
Flash point : does not flash
Ignition temperature : > 743 °C (> 1,369 °F) at 1,013 hPa
Lower explosion limit : Method : None per ASTM E681
Upper explosion limit : Method : None per ASTM E681
Fire and Explosion Hazard : Hazardous thermal decomposition products:

Carbon oxides
Hydrogen fluoride
Carbonyl fluoride
Cylinders are equipped with pressure and temperature relief devices, but may
still rupture under fire conditions. Decomposition may occur. Contact of
welding or soldering torch flame with high concentrations of refrigerant can
result in visible changes in the size and colour of the torch flame. This flame
effect will only occur in concentrations of product well above the
recommended exposure limit. Therefore stop all work and ventilate to
disperse refrigerant vapors from the work area before using any open flames.
3 / 10

Version 2.3
HFC-134a is not flammable in air at temperatures up to 100 deg. C (212 deg.

F) at atmospheric pressure. However, mixtures of HFC-134a with high
concentrations of air at elevated pressure and/or temperature can become
combustible in the presence of an ignition source. HFC-134a can also
become combustible in an oxygen enriched environment (oxygen
concentrations greater than that in air). Whether a mixture containing HFC-
134a and air, or HFC-134a in an oxygen enriched atmosphere become
combustible depends on the inter-relationship of 1) the temperature 2) the
pressure, and 3) the proportion of oxygen in the mixture. In
general, HFC-134a should not be allowed to exist with air above atmospheric
pressure or at high temperatures; or in an oxygen enriched environment. For
example HFC-134a should NOT be mixed with air under pressure for leak
testing or other purposes.
Experimental data have also been reported which indicate combustibility of
this substance in the presence of certain concentrations of chlorine.
Suitable extinguishing media : Use extinguishing measures that are appropriate to local circumstances and
the surrounding environment.
Firefighting Instructions : In the event of fire, wear self-contained breathing apparatus.

Cool containers / tanks with water spray. Water runoff should be contained
and neutralized prior to release.
SECTION 6. ACCIDENTAL RELEASE MEASURES

NOTE: Review FIRE FIGHTING MEASURES and HANDLING (PERSONNEL) sections before proceeding with clean-
up. Use appropriate PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT during clean-up.
Safeguards (Personnel) : Evacuate personnel to safe areas. Ventilate area, especially low or enclosed
places where heavy vapours might collect.
Spill Cleanup : Evaporates.
Accidental Release Measures : Should not be released into the environment.

Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) is required if a large release
occurs. Avoid open flames and high temperatures.
4 / 10

Version 2.3
SECTION 7. HANDLING AND STORAGE

Handling (Personnel) : Use sufficient ventilation to keep employee exposure below recommended
limits. For personal protection see section 8.
Handle in accordance with good industrial hygiene and safety practice.
Handling (Physical Aspects) : The product should not be mixed with air for leak testing or used with air for
any other purpose above atmospheric pressure. Contact with chlorine or
other strong oxidizing agents should also be avoided.
Storage : Valve protection caps and valve outlet threaded plugs must remain in place
unless container is secured with valve outlet piped to use point. Do not drag,
slide or roll cylinders. Use a suitable hand truck for cylinder movement. Use a
pressure reducing regulator when connecting cylinder to lower pressure
(>3000 psig) piping or systems. Never attempt to lift cylinder by its cap. Use a
check valve or trap in the discharge line to prevent hazardous back flow into
the cylinder. Cylinders should be stored upright and firmly secured to
prevent falling or being knocked over.
Separate full containers from empty containers. Keep at temperature not
exceeding 52°C. Do not store near combustible materials. Avoid area where
salt or other corrosive materials are present.
Storage temperature : < 52 °C (< 126 °F)
SECTION 8. EXPOSURE CONTROLS/PERSONAL PROTECTION
Engineering controls : Normal ventilation for standard manufacturing procedures is generally

adequate. Local exhaust should be used when large amounts are released.
Mechanical ventilation should be used in low or enclosed places. Refrigerant
concentration monitors may be necessary to determine vapour concentrations
in work areas prior to use of torches or other open flames, or if employees are
entering enclosed areas.
Personal protective equipment

Respiratory protection : For rescue and maintenance work in storage tanks use self-contained
breathing apparatus. Vapours are heavier than air and can cause suffocation
by reducing oxygen available for breathing.
Hand protection : Additional protection: Impervious gloves
5 / 10

Version 2.3
Eye protection : Wear safety glasses with side shields. Additionally wear a face shield where
the possibility exists for face contact due to splashing, spraying or airborne
contact with this material.
Protective measures : Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) is required if a large release

occurs.
Exposure Guidelines
Exposure Limit Values
1,1,1,2-Tetrafluoroethane
AEL * (DUPONT) 1,000 ppm 8 & 12 hr. TWA
* AEL is DuPont's Acceptable Exposure Limit. Where governmentally imposed occupational exposure limits which
are lower than the AEL are in effect, such limits shall take precedence.
SECTION 9. PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL PROPERTIES

Form : Liquefied gas
Color : colourless
Odor : slight, ether-like
Boiling point : -26.1 °C (-15.0 °F) at 1,013 hPa
% Volatile : 100 %
Vapour Pressure : 6,661 hPa at 25 °C (77 °F)
: 13,190 hPa at 50 °C (122 °F)
Density : 1.206 g/cm3 at 25 °C (77 °F)
(as liquid)
Specific gravity : 1.208 at 25 °C (77 °F)
Water solubility : 1.5 g/l at 25 °C (77 °F) at 1,013 hPa
Vapour density : 3.6 at 25 °C (77 °F)
(Air = 1.0)
Evaporation rate : >1
(CCL4=1.0)
SECTION 10. STABILITY AND REACTIVITY

Stability : Stable under recommended storage conditions.
6 / 10

Version 2.3
Conditions to avoid : The product is not flammable in air under ambient conditions of temperature
and pressure. When pressurised with air or oxygen, the mixture may become
flammable. Certain mixtures of HCFCs or HFCs with chlorine may become
flammable or reactive under certain conditions.
Incompatibility : Alkali metals Alkaline earth metals, Powdered metals, Powdered metal salts
Hazardous decomposition : Decomposition products are hazardous., This material can be decomposed
products by high temperatures (open flames, glowing metal surfaces, etc.) forming
hydrofluoric acid and possibly carbonyl fluoride., These materials are toxic
and irritating., Avoid contact with decomposition products
Hazardous reactions : Polymerization will not occur.
SECTION 11. TOXICOLOGICAL INFORMATION

™ ®
DuPont SUVA 134a refrigerant
Further information : Cardiac sensitisation threshold limit : 312975 mg/m3
Anaesthetic effects threshold limit : 834600 mg/m3
Did not show carcinogenic or teratogenic effects in animal
experiments.Inhalation of decomposition products in high
concentration may cause shortness of breath (lung oedema).Rapid
evaporation of the liquid may cause frostbite.
Dermal : not applicable
Oral : not applicable
Inhalation 4 h LC50 : 567000 ppm , rat
Inhalation : dog
Cardiac sensitization
Skin irritation : slight irritation, rabbit

Not expected to cause skin irritation based on expert review of the
properties of the substance.
No skin irritation, human
7 / 10

Version 2.3
Eye irritation : slight irritation, rabbit

Not expected to cause eye irritation based on expert review of the
No eye irritation, human
Skin sensitization : Did not cause sensitization on laboratory animals., guinea pig
Not expected to cause sensitization based on expert review of the
Did not cause sensitization on laboratory animals. There are no

reports of human respiratory sensitization.
Repeated dose toxicity : Inhalation

rat
No toxicologically significant effects were found.
Carcinogenicity : Overall weight of evidence indicates that the substance is not

carcinogenic.
An increased incidence of benign tumours was observed in laboratory
animals.
Mutagenicity : Did not cause genetic damage in animals.

Did not cause genetic damage in cultured mammalian cells.
Did not cause genetic damage in cultured bacterial cells.
Reproductive toxicity : Animal testing showed no reproductive toxicity.
Teratogenicity : Animal testing showed effects on embryo-fetal development at levels

equal to or above those causing maternal toxicity.
SECTION 12. ECOLOGICAL INFORMATION

Aquatic Toxicity
96 h LC50 : Oncorhynchus mykiss (rainbow trout) 450 mg/l
72 h EC50 : Algae > 118 mg/l

Information given is based on data obtained from similar substances.
8 / 10

Version 2.3
48 h EC50 : Daphnia magna (Water flea) 980 mg/l
SECTION 13. DISPOSAL CONSIDERATIONS

Waste Disposal : Can be used after re-conditioning. Recover by distillation or remove to a
permitted waste disposal facility. Comply with applicable Federal,
State/Provincial and Local Regulations.
Environmental Hazards : Empty pressure vessels should be returned to the supplier.
SECTION 14. TRANSPORT INFORMATION

DOT UN number : 3159
Proper shipping name : 1,1,1,2-Tetrafluoroethane

Class : 2.2
Labelling No. : 2.2
IATA_C UN number : 3159
Class : 2.2
Labelling No. : 2.2
IMDG UN number : 3159
Class : 2.2
Labelling No. : 2.2
SECTION 15. REGULATORY INFORMATION
SARA 313 Regulated : SARA 313: This material does not contain any chemical components with
Chemical(s) known CAS numbers that exceed the threshold (De Minimis) reporting levels
established by SARA Title III, Section 313.
9 / 10

Version 2.3
California Prop. 65 : Chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects or
any other harm: none known
SECTION 16. OTHER INFORMATION

HMIS
Health : 1
Flammability : 0
Reactivity/Physical hazard : 1
®
SUVA is a registered trademark of E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company
Before use read DuPont's safety information.
For further information contact the local DuPont office or DuPont's nominated distributors.
®
DuPont's registered trademark
The information provided in this Safety Data Sheet is correct to the best of our knowledge, information and belief at
the date of its publication. The information given is designed only as a guidance for safe handling, use, processing,
storage, transportation, disposal and release and is not to be considered a warranty or quality specification. The
information relates only to the specific material designated and may not be valid for such material used in combination
with any other materials or in any process, unless specified in the text.
Significant change from previous version is denoted with a double bar.
10 / 10

P20050001 Databook

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

P20050001 Databook

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PRODUCT DATABOOK

Project No. MRS-MEA-15005

OWNER PREPARED CHECKED APPROVED

Modex Alice Cao Henry He Jinghui Cui

1. Container Certificates 2.7-1 & 2.7-2 & CSC

2. Type Approval Certificates

3. Load Test Report & Weight Report

4. Vendor Data Intrinsic Safe Equipment

6. Operation Manual & Hook Up

8. Material Test Certificates

11. Dimensional Report

12. Welding & NDT Report

14. Painting Record

15. Manufacturing Workflow Card

E UfC 592-2 regulation of International Union of Railways (UlC)

Herstellerkennzeichnung der Container gemdR:

Customs Conventidh on the International Transport of Goods

Der Container entspricht

ISO-(D lN) Normbezeichnung: - 16058

Typbezeichnung des Herstellers: Wsrori.ol - ]

Ort und Datum der Typ-Prtifung: lQidong,12.2015 I

Place and date of type test

Zul.Gesamtgewicht R: 10.000 kg 22.046 lb Leergewicht T: 1.500 kg 3.307 rb

Netto-Rauminhalt . flr3 - cu.ft U-Wert der lsolierung WrK

CSC-ldent-Nr. / Bau-Nr.: P 20050001 .20050002

Eigner-Nr.: MOOU 500022.500023 (P20050001-20050002)

Herstellungsdatum Date manufactured 0112016

Eigner: Modex Energy Rentals Singapore Pte. Ltd.

DNV GL SE, Brooktorkai LA, D - 20457 Hamburg - www.dnvgl.com F048KE / 2015-05

fiood immunization heatment (acc. to maker's statement): NO EXPOSED TIMBER

1 Stapeln Belastung je Eckpfosten Zul.Stapellast bei 1,Bg (CSC)

2. Heben an den oberen Eckbeschlagen senkrecht

9. /erwindung (Belastung in Quenichtung)

12. Sreifkanten-Test Beladen auf

13. rrrifung der Spritzwasserdichtigkeit

14. Sonstige Prufungen / Bemerkungen: other tests / remarks:

DNV GL SE, Brooktorkai 78, D :20457 Hamburg - www.dnvgl.com F048KE / 2015-05

PTB 99 ATEX 1161

Nemko 10 ATEX 1054

WCP2A-R470SF- Sira 06 ATEX 2131X

8.5 to 33Vdc, Alarm current 40mA@ Baseefa 06 ATEX0007X

IBEx U99ATEX 1096

Data JB with Ex IBExU99 ATEX 1096

IBEx U99ATEX 1096

IBEx U99ATEX 1096

48X1.2W LED'S 60W，AC110- SIRA 09 ATEX 5159X

PTB 98 ATEX 3121

230V,50/60Hz 2x8W with INERIS 13 ATEX 0027X

PTB 00 ATEX 1068

CH4 gas detector（in CROWCO 10-30Vdc, output 4- Baseefa 04 ATEX0024X

CH4 gas detector（in CROWCO 10-30Vdc, output 4- Baseefa 04 ATEX0024X

CH4 gas detector（in Zone1 ATEX&IECEx, 7- DMT 02ATEX E 202X

SCHISCHE PTB 04 ATEX 1028X

Fire Damper Limit IBEXU 01ATEX1007X

Fire Damper Junction PTB 08ATEX 1064

-20 °C to +60 °C OriginalIP rating is

DMT 02ATEX E183

Reserved for disconnection of UPS INERIS 03 ATEX 0210

Brass, Nickel plated, for armoured Inside/Out TUV 14ATEX 7534X

Brass, Nickel plated, for Inside/Out TUV 13ATEX 7397X

Brass, Nickel plated, compund barrier Inside/Out Sira 06 ATEX 1097X

Certificate No.: IECEx BKI 07.0012 Issue No: 2 Certificate history:

Applicant: Cooper Crouse-Hinds GmbH

Approved for issue on behalf of the IECEx János FEJES